Home

ATLAS 890 System Manual (Rev A)

1. Cause Code Event Category Code NONEXISTENT_MSG MAJOR 97 NORMAL_CLEARING INFO 16 NUMBER_CHANGED INFO 22 OUTGOING_CALL_BARRED MINOR 52 PRE_EMPTED WARNING 45 PROTOCOL_ERROR MAJOR 111 REQ_CHANNEL_NOT_AVAIL WARNING 44 RESP_TO_STAT_ENQ INFO 30 SERVICE_NOT_AVAIL MINOR 63 TEMPORARY_FAILURE WARNING 41 TIMER_EXPIRY MAJOR 102 UNASSIGNED_NUMBER INFO 1 UNSPECIFIED_CAUSE INFO 31 USER_BUSY INFO 17 WRONG_MESSAGE INFO 98 WRONG_MSG_FOR_STATE MAJOR 101 5 CAUSE CODE LOG ENTRIES Cause Code IEs that are non Q 931 i e the Coding Standard field is not 0 are logged with the following format lt message gt lt coding standard gt code lt cause code gt The coding standard field is one of the following Reserved National or Local Each Cause Code IE log entry ends with a location designation Table 11 shows these designations Table 12 through Table 14 pro vides a listing of system events Table 11 Cause Code Log Entry Location Designations Code Location INOTL International network INWK Network beyond internetworking point ATLAS 890 System Manual 2001 ADTRAN Inc 61200321L1 1A ATLAS 890 Section 6 System Event Logging Page 15 of 16 Table 11 Cause Code Log Eniry Location Designations Continued LN Public network serving the local user LPN Private network serving the local user RLN Publ
2. Alarm Relay Connection This connection alerts the user when a selected alarm condition exists The four pin removable terminal block connects with external wiring Refer to DLP 002 Connecting the Alarm Contacts and the External Input for detailed instructions Clear the alarm condition by pressing the ACO switch located on the front panel of the ATLAS 890 Table 6 shows the pinout for the Alarm Relay connector Table 6 Alarm Relay Connector Pinout Pin Name Description 1 Normally Closed NC Opens when a selected alarm condition is present 2 Normally Open NO Closes when a selected alarm condition is present Common connection between external circuitry and NC or NO 3 Common COM terminal 4 Chassis Ground GND External Input Connection This connection alerts the user when a selected external alarm condition exists This connection could be used to monitor a UPS with dry contacts or another ATLAS 890 The three pin removable terminal block connects with external wiring Refer to DLP 002 Connecting the Alarm Contacts and the External Input for detailed instructions Clear the alarm condition by pressing the ACO switch located on the front panel of the ATLAS 890 Table 7 shows the pinout for the External Input connector Table 7 External Relay Monitor Connector Pinout Pin Name Description 1 INPUT Monitors for the presence or absence of 48 VDC VOUT 48 VDC 1
3. lslllseseel eh 98 Modules Menu T3 Option Module 0 000 cc n 99 Modules Menu T3 with Drop and Insert Option Module ssleeseslsslssn 109 Packet Manager d sel ged Aa ey ee A CU ILE tb Rb S 119 HOUler s on Lee v EIDR S eed hae ee ea ONE S Ra YE X abe edi EOD S EE x 142 D dicated MAPS EET 167 Dedicated Maps Quad T1 PRI Option Module 0 0 0 eee eee 170 Dedicated Maps Quad E1 PRA Option Module 00 00 cece eee eee 172 Dedicated Maps Quad Nx 56 64 Option Module 0 0000 cece eee 173 2001 ADTRAN Inc ATLAS 890 System Manual 61200321L1 1A ATLAS 890 Section 4 User Interface Guide Page 2 of 234 Dedicated Maps Quad USSI Option Module 0 0 0 0 eee 173 Dedicated Maps Octal BRI Option Module 000 ccc eee eee 174 Dedicated Maps T3 and T3 with Drop and Insert Option Modules 174 Dedicated Maps Pkt Endpt Connections 0000 cece eee eee eens 176 Dedicated Maps Packet Voice Connections 0 0 00 cece teens 177 eT CI Mc DU 178 Dial Plan ze se Stl eats D ERES Ws tae essere due e ep MU qe esos 181 Dial Plan Quad T1 PRI T3 and T3 Drop and Insert Option Modules 193 Dial Plan Quad E1 PRA Option Module sssssssselee eh 214 Dial Plan Quad Nx 56 64 Option Module llllelseeeelses n 219 Dial Plan Quad USSI Option Module
4. 00 0c cece eee eee 5 2001 ADTRAN Inc ATLAS 890 System Manual 61200321L1 1A ATLAS 890 Section 3 Network Turnup Procedure Page 2 of 8 1 INTRODUCTION This section discusses the installation process of the ATLAS 890 installation 2 TOOLS REQUIRED The tools required for installation of the ATLAS 890 shelf are e 2 Phillips head screwdriver e Hlat head screwdriver for installing modules 6 To prevent electrical shock do not install equipment in a wet location or during a Ww MANN lightning storm Electronic modules can be damaged by static electrical discharge Before handling mod ules wear an antistatic discharge wrist strap to prevent damage to electronic components diio Place modules in antistatic packing material when transporting or storing When working on modules always place them on an approved antistatic mat that is electrically grounded 3 UNPACK AND INSPECT THE SYSTEM Each ATLAS 890 is shipped in its own cardboard shipping carton Open each carton carefully and avoid deep penetration into the carton with sharp objects After unpacking the unit inspect it for possible shipping damage If the equipment has been damaged in transit immediately file a claim with the carrier then contact ADTRAN Customer Service see Customer Service Product Support Information and Training in the front of this manual Contents of ADTRAN Shipments Your ADTRAN shipment includes the foll
5. 0000 c cece es 8 Table 2 IP St llstiCS icc Senes XE RE tO teli ee a aoe opel Gack a a aa Seb a 154 Table 3 ICMP Statistics het ib Gee eek wae HE DULL EPUM EAS 156 Table4 TCP Statistics 2 0 onai e aa e hh rne 157 Table 5 UDP Statistics 04 2 mee p Sy a o seal ae ERE LENA EYES 158 Table 6 IP Fast Cache Statistics eea e a a n ka E E VARSA 159 ATLAS 890 System Manual 2001 ADTRAN Inc 61200321L1 1A ATLAS 890 Section 4 User Interface Guide Page 3 of 234 1 NAVIGATING THE TERMINAL MENU Terminal Menu Window The ATLAS 890 uses a multi level menu structure that contains both menu items and data fields All menu items and data fields display in the terminal menu window see Figure 1 through which you have com plete control of the ATLAS 890 Telnet Connection 172 22 12 50 Session Edit Options Capture Help ibl System ystem Name AILAS FU System Location Adtran ATLAS 890 ystem System Config System Contact Adtran ATLAS 890 System Utility Firmware Revision A0012 05 20 01 08 37 44 Modules System Uptime 4 days 4 amp hours 23 min 42 secs Packet Manager Startup Mode Power cycle Router Current Time Date 24h Friday ay 11 13 27 47 2001 Dedicated Maps Installed Memory Flash 4194304 bytes DRAM 16777216 byte Serial Number Boot ROM Rev 8 00 03 03 06 01 Circuit Status Dial Plan Right Pane SCU A ONLN ALR ALR BLRE ERG ZALRM 6 ALRN ZALRM S
6. TEST BACKUP DELAY IN SECONDS The amount of time within which any of the enabled switch criteria must be met before service is switched to the backup circuit RESTORE DELAY IN SECONDS The amount of time within which the criteria for switching to backup are reached before service is returned to the primary circuit USAGE Read security 5 This field displays a 7 character summary of the references to this link Each position is populated with a dash or a character indicating the resource represented The characters are as follows Packet connection in the first dedicated map Packet connection in the second dedicated map Packet connection in the third dedicated map Packet connection in the fourth dedicated map a A Q N Packet connection in the fifth dedicated map Reserved and currently not is use o Used as a Packet Endpoint in the switched dial plan Used by one or more packet switch connections or packet voice entries Write security 3 Read security 5 Provides menus for controlling options and setting for packet endpoints ENDPNT NAME Write security 3 Read security 5 Displays the name of the packet endpoint PROTOCOL Write security 3 Read security 5 Displays the protocol running on the packet endpoint SUBLINK FRAME RELAY Write security 3 Read security 5 Displays test menus for the packet endpoint sublinks The menus vary depending on the protocol Testing is not supported on TBOP o
7. ALARMS Read security 5 Displays an alarm condition on the ATLAS 890 unit SLIP A rate mismatch exists between the DTE clock and the network side clock as set by DSO assignment PLL The USSI port is not able to lock onto the clock provided by the network interface ZERO The DTE is sending an excessive number of consecutive zeroes to the network inter face ATLAS 890 System Manual 2001 ADTRAN Inc 61200321L1 1A ATLAS 890 Section 4 User Interface Guide Page 59 of 234 No Ext CLK The DTE is not providing an external transmit clock This alarm displays only if the USSI port is configured to get its transmit clock from the DTE PKT EP ALM A packet endpoint has detected missing or incorrect framing DTE STATUS Read security 5 Shows the status of key DTE interface signals An asterisk indicates the presence of a signal and a hyphen indicates no signal present PRT Operating port number The following signals are monitored these options are read only RTS CTS DTR DsR DCD RI TD RD EC DATA RATE Read security 5 Request to send from DTE Clear to send to DTE Data terminal ready from DTE Data set ready to DTE Data carrier detect to DTE Ring indicate to DTE Transmit data from the DTE Receive data toward the DTE External clock present Displays the data rate at which each USSI port is currently operating A port s data rate is determined by the number of DSOs assign
8. In applications where two ATLAS 890 units are used in a point to point configuration a port in the ATLAS 890 at one end would act as the network user termination while the Win ATLAS 890 at the opposite end would be terminating a network connection network ter mination SLOT SVC Write security 3 Read security 5 Selects the ATLAS 890 slot or service that terminates a network connection PORT PEP Write security 3 Read security 5 Selects the ATLAS 890 port or packet endpoint that terminates a network connection There may be more than one endpoint associated with a particular port If a TI is con Win nected to the PSTN some DSOs may be used for long distance while others are used for local calls These would constitute two endpoints trunks over a single physical port SIG Write security 3 Read security 5 Defines the type of signaling being used for this connection endpoint Select RBS for a T1 using Robbed Bit Signaling or PRI for a Primary Rate ISDN interface Select NFAS for a non facility associated signalling interface or NONE for OSC when bonding DSOs This selec tion is only necessary if a TI PRI is selected as the SLOT PORT type Win One HDLC resource is used by each PRI or each Packet Endpoint OUT ACCEPT Write security 3 Read security 5 Defines the parameters for the outgoing calls that ATLAS 890 sends to the network SRc ID Identifies the call source ID from
9. LB ACCEPT Write security 3 Read security 5 Sets unit to accept or reject the in band loop up and loop down codes as defined in ANSI T1 403 This is a line loopback Choose either ACCEPT or IGNORE DS1 TEST Write security 3 Read security 5 These options initiate different types of tests and display test results PRT Read security 5 Displays the T1 number Loc LB Write security 4 Read security 5 Causes loopback on near end local port see Figure 12 on page 108 The following options are available LINE Loopback without regenerating framing PAYLD Payload loopback framing and clocking are regenerated REMOTE LB Write security 4 Read security 5 Sends loopback code to Remote CSU The following options are available AT amp T INBAND LINE Works in ESF and D4 mode ANSI FDL LINE Requires ESF mode ANSI FDL PYLD Requires ESF mode INBAND NIU Works in ESF and D4 mode PATTERN Write security 4 Read security 5 Test pattern to be transmitted out the port The following options are available ALL ONES Framed ones ALLZEROS Framed zeros QRSS Pseudo random pattern with suppression of excess zeros 2001 ADTRAN Inc ATLAS 890 System Manual 61200321L1 1A ATLAS 890 Section 4 User Interface Guide Page 108 of 234 QRSS RLB RESULTS Write security 4 Read security 5 Displays current status of T1 tests including information regarding loopbacks and test patterns When displ
10. PIN SIGNAL DESCRIPTION PIN SIGNAL DESCRIPTION 23 DSR A 2 4 62 68 Not used 24 DSSR B RI 2 4 69 MOD1 25 DCD A 2 4 70 EXT TXC B 1 3 26 DCD B 2 4 71 TXC B 1 3 27 DTR A 2 4 72 TXC A 1 3 28 DTR B 2 4 73 TXD B 1 3 29 37 Not used 74 TXD A 1 3 38 RTS A 1 3 75 RXC B 1 3 39 RTS B 1 3 76 RXC A 1 3 40 RTS A 2 4 77 RXD B 1 3 78 RXD A 1 3 Note 1 3 or 2 4 indicates the port on the Nx 56 64 Module Quad USSI Option Module P N 1200261L 1 Table 13 through Table 18 show pinouts for the available interfaces for the Quad USSI Option Module and the cable part numbers required by each interface Table 13 DB 78 Pinout for the Quad USSI Option Module PIN SIGNAL DESCRIPTION PIN SIGNAL DESCRIPTION 1 RXD A 2 4 41 RTS B 2 4 2 RXD B 2 4 42 GND 3 RXC A 2 4 43 48 Not used 4 RXC B 2 4 49 MOD2 5 TXD A 2 4 50 MODO 6 TXD B 2 4 51 EXT TXC A 1 3 7 TXC A 2 4 52 DTR B 1 3 8 TXC B 2 4 53 DTR A 1 3 9 EXT TXC A 2 4 54 DCD B 1 3 10 EXT TXC A 2 4 55 DCD A 1 3 11 17 Not used 56 DSR B RI 1 3 Note 1 3 or 2 4 indicates the port on the USSI Module 2001 ADTRAN Inc ATLAS 890 System Manual 61200321L1 1A ATLAS 890 Section 2 Engineering Guidelines Page 14 of 22 Table 13 DB 78 Pinout for the Quad USSI Option Module Continued PIN SIGNAL DESCRIPTION PIN SIGNAL DESCRIPTION 18 GND 57 DSR A 1 3 19 GND 58 CTS B 1 3
11. PRT Read security 5 Indicates the port number ALARMS Read security 5 Displays an alarm condition on the ATLAS 890 unit Press Enter to access this menu item LOS Indicates a loss of signal detected on port interface RED Indicates inability to frame data received on the port Alternately referred to as Out of Frame OOF YELLOW Receiving remote alarm RAJ on port BLUE Receiving unframed all ones from the port Alarm Indicator Signal AIS ATLAS 890 System Manual 2001 ADTRAN Inc 61200321L1 1A ATLAS 890 Section 4 User Interface Guide Page 41 of 234 DSO ALARM Displays per DSO alarm status that is at least one DSO channel is in alarm if an aster isk appears These alarms usually indicate the failure to receive the protocol that has been configured for the DSO Rx LEVEL Receive Level Indicates the strength of the signal in dB received on the port DSO STATUS Read security 5 The DSO status indicates usage on a DSO basis These options are read only Unallocated Inactive Signaling mismatch Active B Channel Active D Channel Maintenance Dedicated nailed Off hook originate RBS Ringing RBS Restart ISDN m O Zz Z O0 D Waiting dial tone DSO ALARMS Read security 5 Displays per DSO alarm status These alarms usually indicate the failure to receive the protocol that has been configured for the DSO No Alarm DSO D D Channel
12. llilsilslelsslels In 220 Dial Plan Octal BRI U Option Module sssssseseee Ih 222 Dial Plan Async 232 Option Module ssssssseesslseee ees 225 Dial Plan Pkt Endpt Connections 0 000 eee 226 Dial Plan Circuit Backup Connections 0 20 00 cee 228 Dial Plan Packet Voice Connections 0 0 0 c eects 231 FIGURES Figure 1 Top Level Terminal Menu Window esee I II 3 Figure 2 Alternate Menu View 000 cee ee hh n 4 Figure 3 System Information Menu slsssssssesee n 9 Figure 4 System Status Menu 0 0 teeta 11 Figure 5 System Configuration Menu lille 17 Figure 6 System Utility Menu 1 2 0 0 0 0 ee RR Rm 27 Figure 7 View Selftest Log 0 2 0 ccc rr 32 Figure 8 ATLAS 890 System Controller Self Test Log nanunua e eee eee eee 33 Figure9 Modules Menu cee nee rn 37 Figure 10 Loopback Test Diagram 0 ete ee 44 Figure 11 E1 PRA Network Loopback Tests 00 c cece eee eae 50 Figure 12 Network Loopback Tests 0 000 cece tet eee 108 Figure 13 Packet Manager Menu issslsseeeeeee eee 119 Figure 14 Router Menu IP Selected 0 0000 cece eee 142 Figure 15 Dedicated Maps Menu 00 mn 167 Figure 16 Circuit Status Menu 2 2 shes 178 Figure 17 Dial PIAN MENU ect rauru renren e ea RI I e e ul 181 TABLES Table 1 Password Security Level
13. ATLAS 550 System Manual 2001 ADTRAN Inc 61200321L1 1A ATLAS 890 Section 5 DLP 013 Page 3 of 4 Any event logged in the ATLAS 890 Event Log SYSTEM STATUS EVENT LOG should also appear in the Syslog Additional Syslog Features The Monitor feature allows all Syslog messages to be pre filtered by SYSTEM NAME SOURCE SLOT and Port before displaying these messages to the user and logging the message to the predesignated monitor log file Various filter options may be defined by selecting SOURCE The figure below shows the SOURCE FILTER window When the MONITOR button is selected the file will be logged to LOCAL8 TXT To look at the text file click on the EDIT LOG button on the left side of the Syslog screen Only source options selected with an X will be displayed in the Syslog file In this example all options will be displayed e Under the Loc FILES menu option the user may erase log files define Red events set priorities and clear Red events The ERASE Loc FiLES option will erase the specified txt log file DEFINE RED EVENTS allows the user to predefine a message priority condition so that if the condition occurs the file is highlighted in red In the figure below any CRITICAL or MAJOR conditions will cause any LOCALO through LOCAL7 facility to become highlighted in red if it receives a critical or major alarm Atlas SysLog Host j a Sel m x File Log Files Help Monitor 172
14. LOGGING IN TO THE SYSTEM Introduction Once connected to the ATLAS 890 via either a VT 100 terminal or PC configured as a VT 100 terminal it is necessary to login to the system to gain access to the management and provisioning functions This DLP provides specific steps for logging in to the system and accessing the various management and provision ing functions Prerequisite Procedures Complete DLP 007 Connecting the Terminal or PC to the ADMIN or CRAFT Port before logging in to ATLAS 890 Tools and Materials Required e Data cable to connect to a VT 100 terminal or a PC configured as a VT 100 terminal shipped with unit e WVT 100 terminal or PC configured as a VT 100 terminal 2001 ADTRAN Inc ATLAS 890 System Manual 61200321L1 1A ATLAS 890 Section 5 DLP 006 Page 2 of 4 DLP 006 Perform Steps Below in the Order Listed 1 After connecting to the system a blank screen will appear Pressing any key will display the login screen shown below ATLAS 890 HyperT erminal File Edit View Call Transfer Help Dia e soe cs Connected 0 00 12 vT100 8500 8 N 1 SCROLL CAPS NUM Capture Print echo The cursor will blink at the LOGIN field waiting for a password to be entered 2 At the LociN field enter the password for the ATLAS 890 The manufacturer s default password for the ATLAS 890 system is password in lowercase let ters The ATLAS 890 has five levels of ac
15. System resource usage for analog and digital call resources can be viewed under the SYSTEM STATUS menu of the ATLAS This menu provides detailed resource availability ore information for each resource type including hourly average available minimum avail able and number of times there were no available resources of a particular type MODULATION Read security 5 Displays the modulation scheme being used by the analog resource for a currently active call If the analog resource is not in use this field will display n a Rx RATE Read security 5 Displays the receive bit rate of the analog resource for a currently active call If the analog resource is not in use this field will display n a TX RATE Read security 5 Displays the transmit bit rate of the analog resource for a currently active call If the analog resource is not in use this field will display n a ERROR CORR Read security 5 Displays the error correction mode being used by the analog resource for a currently active call If the analog resource is not in use this field will display n a DATA COMPR Read security 5 Displays the data compression mode being used by the analog resource for a currently active call If the analog resource is not in use this field will display n a LAST Disc Read security 5 Displays the reason for the previous disconnect which occurred on this analog resource If no disconnect has occurred on this analog resource t
16. 11 From the CHAIN PORT menus select the PORT TYPE menu and select DIAL If you are connected to the ATLAS 890 using the CRAFT or ADMIN interfaces SING changing the PORT TYPE mode to DIAL will terminate your session You MUST have W ARN Ethernet access to the ATLAS 890 to change the PORT TYPE back to DIRECT and restore your terminal session To complete the connection to the shelf the ATLAS 890 must now be called from a PC that Win is configured to emulate a VT 100 terminal with communication software set as in step 3 and configured for dial mode Follow up Procedures Once this procedure is complete return to the procedure which referred you to this DLP and continue with the tasks indicated there 2001 ADTRAN Inc ATLAS 890 System Manual 61200321L1 1A ATLAS 890 Section 5 DLP 001 Page 4 of 4 ATLAS 890 System Manual 2001 ADTRAN Inc 61200321L1 1A ATLAS 890 Section 5 DLP 002 Page 1 of 4 CONNECTING THE ALARM CONTACTS AND THE EXTERNAL INPUT Introduction This DLP explains how to connect the alarm contacts and the external input on the ATLAS 890 Prerequisite Procedures Before making alarm connections the unit should be mounted in its permanent location Tools and Materials Required Wire strippers Small straight slot screwdriver e 220r24 AWG 2 conductor twisted pair cross connect wire To prevent electrical shock do not install equipment in a wet location or during a
17. DS1 DSO STATUS Read security 5 Indicates usage on a DSO basis for each T1 in the T3 circuit These options are read only Unallocated Inactive Signaling mismatch Active B Channel Active D Channel Maintenance Dedicated nailed O 2 5 O P Off hook originate RBS ATLAS 890 System Manual 2001 ADTRAN Inc 61200321L1 1A ATLAS 890 Section 4 User Interface Guide Page 115 of 234 R Ringing RBS Restart ISDN Ww Waiting dial tone DS1 DSO ALARMS Read security 5 Displays per DSO alarm status for each T1 in the T3 circuit These alarms usually indicate the failure to receive the protocol that has been configured for the DSO No Alarm DSO D D Channel Alarm ISDN F Frame Alarm packet T TBOP Alarm packet P PPP Alarm packet DS1 Sic STATUS Read security 5 Read only field that indicates signaling of all 24 DSOs for each T1 in the T3 circuit The A B bits for Rx receive and Tx transmit DSOs are shown when the T1s are configured for D4 framing When the T1s are configured for ESF framing ABCD bits are shown for each DSO Dashes display for those DSOs where robbed bit signaling RBS is not being transferred by the ATLAS 890 DS1 PERF CURRENT Write security 3 Read security 5 The performance fields either current 15 minute total or 24 hour total provide status on key perfor mance measures as specified in ANSI T1 403 and AT amp T TR54016 for each T1 in the T3 circuit Exc
18. NEIGHBORS Write Security 2 Read security 2 Contains a list of all the neighbors discovered The router forms adjacencies with other OSPF routers on a network these routers are known as neighbors ROUTER ID Displays the router ID of the neighbor PRIORITY Shows the priority of the selected neighbor STATE Displays the state of the neighbor The possible states are as follows DOWN Indicates no communication has been established INIT Indicates a hello packet has been transmitted to the neighbor 2WAY Indicates a hello packet has been received from the neighbor EXCHANGE Exchanges database packet information with this neighbor FULL Indicates that an adjacency with this neighbor has been accom plished and a router designation has been established Designated router backup designated router or non designated router may appear as DR BDR or DROther respectively DROther repre sents routers which are on point to point links such as PPP or non meshed Frame Relay UP Indicates that an adjacency to a neighbor over a virtual link is established DOWN Indicates that an adjacency to a neighbor over a virtual link has not been established ATLAS 890 System Manual 2001 ADTRAN Inc 61200321L1 1A ATLAS 890 Section 4 User Interface Guide Page 167 of 234 DEAD TIME Displays the number of seconds to elapse before the neighbor is considered to be down ADDRESS Shows the IP address associated with the neigh
19. Rx BYTES Read security 5 Displays the number of data bytes received by the digital resource from the client modem curing the current call This parameter is reset once the call is disconnected RX OVRNS Read security 5 Displays the number of receiver overruns which occurred on the digital resource dur ing the current call A receiver overrun occurs when the client modem transmits data too fast for the digital resource to keep up This causes data to be lost This parameter is reset once the call is disconnected Rx CRC BAD Read security 5 Displays the number of frames of data received by the digital resource with an invalid CRC This parameter is reset once the call is disconnected ATLAS 890 System Manual 2001 ADTRAN Inc 61200321L1 1A ATLAS 890 Section 4 User Interface Guide Page 95 of 234 RX ABORTED Read security 5 Displays the number of aborted receive frames detected by the digital resource during the current call This parameter is reset once the call is disconnected RESET STATS Write security 5 Read security 5 Resets the input and output statistics for the given analog resource This option resets the transmit and receive statistics for the analog resource CONFIGURATION Write security 5 Read security 5 Displays the configuration submenus available for both analog and digital resources available on the option module ANALOG RSRC Write security 5 Read security 5 Display
20. TYPE Defines how OSPF should treat the interface There are four OSPF types possible but not all of them are available for certain interface types The OSPF types are as fol lows BROADCAST Use for Ethernet or Bridged IP media NBMA To use Non Broadcast Multi Access media a neighbor list of each router must be specified POINT TO POINT Use when it is known that only one router is on the other end of the link POINT TO MULTIPOINT Use for meshed Frame Relay PVCs A neighbor list of each router must be speci fied PRIORITY Sets the priority of this interface Priorities range from 0 255 Used in multi access networks this field is used in the designated router election algorithm The value 0 signifies that the router is not eligible to become the designated router on this particu lar network In the event of a tie in this value routers will use the lowest Router ID as a tie breaker NEIGHBORS Displays a list of up to ten neighbor s IP addresses used to communicate when TYPE NBMA or TYPE POINT TO MULTIPOINT ATLAS 890 System Manual 2001 ADTRAN Inc 61200321L1 1A ATLAS 890 Section 4 User Interface Guide Page 151 of 234 PROXY ARP Enables or disables Proxy ARP on this interface Allows the network portion of a group of addresses to be shared among several physical network segments When ENABLED and an ARP address resolution protocol request is received on the Ethernet port the address is loo
21. N ARNING lightning storm Electronic modules can be damaged by static electrical discharge Before handling modules wear an antistatic discharge wrist strap to prevent damage to electronic di components Place modules in antistatic packing material when transporting or storing When working on modules always place them on an approved antistatic mat that is electrically grounded 2001 ADTRAN Inc ATLAS 890 System Manual 61200321L1 1A ATLAS 890 Section 5 DLP 002 Page 2 of 4 DLP 002 Connect Alarm Relay Contacts 1 For the alarm relay contacts labeled ALARM on the rear of the ATLAS 890 as shown in Figure 1 determine whether the external alarm reporting device uses normally open NO or normally closed NC relay contacts to sense an alarm condition 2 Using standard Telco cross connect wire or equivalent determine and cut the length required to reach from the alarm header to the alarm reporting device s 3 Using wire strippers strip v4 inch from both ends of each wire 4 Remove the alarm relay 4 pin terminal block 5 Using the small straight slot screwdriver loosen the screws in the terminal block 6 Insert one strand into the COM connection from the ATLAS 890 and tighten the screw T Insert another strand into either the NC or NO connections and tighten the screw A chassis ground connection is also provided Replace the terminal block Connect External Input 1 The externa
22. PRIMARY TIMING SOURCE Write security 1 Read security 5 Selects the primary timing source You can select either INTERNAL or any port from one of the installed network or option modules BACKUP TIMING SOURCE Write security 1 Read security 5 Selects the secondary timing source You can select either INTERNAL or any port from one of the installed network or option modules ATLAS 890 uses the backup timing source if the primary timing source goes into alarm The BACKUP TIMING SOURCE should be different from the PRIMARY TIMING SOURCE for the most reliable operation 2001 ADTRAN Inc ATLAS 890 System Manual 61200321L1 1A ATLAS 890 Section 4 User Interface Guide Page 18 of 234 ADLP ADDRESS Write security 2 Read security 5 Shows the system ADTRAN Data Link Layer Protocol ADLP address for connecting remote devices to ADTRAN management software The allowable range is between 2 and 65520 Enter a value not used by any other ADTRAN units controlled by the management software SESSION TIMEOUT Write security 3 Read security 5 Defines the number of seconds the terminal session must remain idle before the session times out You can enter zero to deactivate this option the session will never time out MAX TELNET SESSIONS Write security 3 Read security 5 Defines the maximum number of Telnet sessions that can be active at the same time Enter a number between 0 and 12 in this field to completely lock
23. Wor Setting the threshold to NORMAL will not set the ALARM RELAY for NORMAL events No NORMAL events set the ALARM RELAY ATLAS 890 System Manual 2001 ADTRAN Inc 61200321L1 1A ATLAS 890 Section 5 DLP 005 Page 3 of 4 Configure the Alarm Monitor Win Complete the following steps only if you wish to monitor for external alarms 4 Go to the SYSTEM CONFIG menu and press the right arrow key to access the right pane menus Then select the EVENT LOGGING menu and press Enter Once in the EVENT LOG GING menu press the right arrow key to access the right pane menus 5 From the EVENT LOGGING menu select the EXTERNAL INPUT menu and set it to the same value as the ALARM RELAY THRESHOLD Any event on the ALARM Monitor will now be logged in the EVENT Loc and set the ALARM RELAY Clearing the Alarm Relay Remotely 6 Go to the SvsTEM CONFIG menu and press the right arrow key to access the right pane menus Then select the ALARM RELAY RESET field and press lt Enter gt Win The ALARM RELAY may be cleared locally by pressing the ACO switch Follow up Procedures Once this procedure is complete return to the procedure which referred you to this DLP and continue with the tasks indicated there 2001 ADTRAN Inc ATLAS 890 System Manual 61200321L1 1A ATLAS 890 Section 5 DLP 005 Page 4 of 4 ATLAS 890 System Manual 2001 ADTRAN Inc 61200321L1 1A ATLAS 890 Section 5 DLP 006 Page 1 of 4
24. criterion Note also that this includes any datagrams which a host cannot route because all of its default gateways are down The maximum number of seconds which received fragments are held while they are awaiting reassembly at this ATLAS 890 The number of IP fragments received which needed to be reassembled at this ATLAS 890 The number of IP datagrams successfully reassembled The number of failures detected by the IP reassembly algorithm for what ever reason timed out errors etc Note that this is not necessarily a count of discarded IP fragments since some algorithms notably RFC 815s can lose track of the number of fragments by combining them as they are received The number of IP datagrams that have been successfully fragmented at this ATLAS 890 The number of IP datagrams that have been discarded because they needed to be fragmented at this ATLAS 890 but could not be e g because their Don t Fragment flag was set The number of IP datagram fragments that have been generated as a result of fragmentation at this ATLAS 890 Clears the accumulated statistics 2001 ADTRAN Inc ATLAS 890 System Manual 61200321L1 1A ATLAS 890 Section 4 User Interface Guide Page 156 of 234 Table 3 ICMP Statistics Name Description INMSGS The total number of ICMP messages which the ATLAS 890 received Note that this counter includes all those counted by INERRORS INERRORS The number of ICM
25. 61200321L1 1A ATLAS 890 Section 4 User Interface Guide Page 63 of 234 TEST Write security 4 Read security 5 These options initiate different types of tests and display test results LOOPBACK Write security 4 Read security 5 Test pattern to be transmitted out the port The following options are available No LOOPBACK No active loopback LOCAL Activates both a local loopback back toward the DTE and a LOOPBACK port loopback toward the network REMOTE V 54 loopback code to be sent to the far end and if the device LOOPBACK at the far end supports V 54 the device activates a loopback on detection of the V 54 code LOOPBACK STATUS Read security 5 This read only option indicates a port s current loopback status by displaying any of the fol lowing status messages No LOOPBACK ACTIVE LOOPING UP REMOTE UNIT REMOTE UNIT LOOPED BACK LOOPING DOWN REMOTE UNIT REMOTE LooP UP FAILED PoRT LooPED FROM REMOTE SOURCE PORT LOOPBACK ACTIVE 511 Write security 4 Read security 5 Controls the activation of the 511 test pattern generator and detector 511 RESULT Read security 5 Displays the results of the 511 test This option is read only Clear these results by pressing Enter when CLR is selected 2001 ADTRAN Inc ATLAS 890 System Manual 61200321L1 1A ATLAS 890 Section 4 User Interface Guide Page 64 of 234 NONE Pattern is not synchronized LOS At
26. Companding The process of compressing and expanding a signal ATLAS 890 System Manual 2001 ADTRAN Inc 61200321L1 1A ATLAS 890 Glossary Page 3 of 12 clocking An oscillator generated signal that provides a timing reference for a transmission link A clock pro vides signals used in a transmission system to control the timing of certain functions The clock has two functions 1 to generate periodic signals for synchronization and 2 to provide a time base CPE Customer premise equipment All telecommunications terminal equipment located on the customer premises including telephone sets private branch exchanges PBXs data terminals and customer owned coin operated telephones CS See CTS CSU Channel Service Unit A device that functions similarly to a modem except that the CSU works with digital signals rather than analog signaling CTS Clear to send A signal on the DTE interface indicating that the DCE is clear to send data D channel Delta channel Controls the operation of the ISDN connection DACS Digital Access Cross Connect System An architecture that allows the cross connecting of several T1 circuits that is any DSO on any T1 circuit can be groomed to any other DSO on any of the other T1 circuits in the system DCE Data communications equipment The part of a computer or data terminal that connects to a commu nications channel or network dedicated bandwidth Bandwidth which has been set asid
27. SLOT Configures the slot that the interface is physically connected to PORT Configures the port that the interface is physically connected to INTERFACE NUMBER Configures the NFAS Interface ID associated with the interface The configure ID must match the ID configured by the provider BACKUP D CHANNEL Backup D channel is not supported on User Term NFAS interfaces Won Only one backup D channel can be configured per NFAS interface group SwiTCH TYPE Defines the type of PRI switch to which the port is connected If connected to another ATLAS 890 both need to be set to the same switch type The following options are available Lucent 5E Northern DMS 100 National ISDN AT amp T AESS 2001 ADTRAN Inc ATLAS 890 System Manual 61200321L1 1A ATLAS 890 Section 4 User Interface Guide Page 212 of 234 First DSO Defines to the ATLAS 890 the first DSO for this endpoint The ATLAS 890 uses DSOs starting with this selection to send and receive calls to and from the network The outgoing calls which are allowed or restricted over these DSOs are set by OUTH HACCEPT see page 182 and OUTHREJECT see page 184 NUMBER OF DSOS Specifies the number of DSOs ATLAS 890 uses for this endpoint STRIP MSD Strips a selected quantity choose from NONE 1 2 and 3 of the most significant dig its MSD of a dialed number prior to being forwarded out of the port Example A network port could be set to accept
28. The ATLAS 890 system controller automatically detects the presence of the Voice Compression VCOM Resource Module when it is installed in the system listed as VCOM X where X is 8 for 1200221L1 16 for 120022112 24 for 1200221L3 and 32 for 1200221L4 To see the menus for the VCOM Resource Module via the terminal menu use the arrow keys to scroll to the MODULES menu and press lt Enter gt to access the module choices Refer to the VCOM Resource Module Quick Start Guide for a menu tree con taining a complete listing of menus INFO Read security 5 Provides information about the module part number serial number and assembly revision PART NUMBER Read security 5 Displays the part number of the module ATLAS 890 System Manual 2001 ADTRAN Inc 61200321L1 1A ATLAS 890 Section 4 User Interface Guide Page 71 of 234 SERIAL NUMBER Read security 5 Displays the serial number of the module BOARD REVISION Read security 5 Displays the board revision of the installed module FIRMWARE REVISION Read security 5 Displays the current firmware revision of the selected module STATUS Read security 5 Displays the status of each of the voice compression resources DEVICE Read security 5 Indicates the resource number of the packet voice device listed On the ATLAS 890 packet voice devices are numbered 1 32 STATUS Read security 5 Indicates the condition of the indiv
29. The cus tomer should be aware that compliance with the above limitations may not prevent degradation of service in some situations Repairs to certified equipment should be made by an authorized Canadian maintenance facility designated by the supplier Any repairs or alterations made by the user to this equipment or equipment malfunctions may give the telecommunications company cause to request the user to disconnect the equipment Users should ensure for their own protection that the electrical ground connections of the power utility telephone lines and internal metallic water pipe system if present are connected together This precaution may be particularly important in rural areas Users should not attempt to make such connections themselves but should contract the UT appropriate electric inspection authority or an electrician as appropriate The Load Number LN assigned to each terminal device denotes the percentage of the total load to be con nected to a telephone loop which is used by the device to prevent overloading The termination on a loop may consist of any combination of devices subject only to the requirement that the total of the Load Num bers of all devices does not exceed 100 ATLAS 890 System Manual 2001 ADTRAN Inc Warranty and Customer Service ADTRAN will replace or repair this product within five years from the date of shipment if it does not meet its published specifications or fails while in s
30. on this interface NORMAL Always start with the last channel configured i e for a full PRI channel 23 would be used if available CIRCULAR Contiguous channels from last to first Busy OPTION Defines the response propagated to the CPE upon receipt of a DISCONNECT USER BUSY message from the network NORMAL Send a Progress message to the CPE and map busy tones Pass THRU Send a DISCONNECT USER BUSY message to the User Term CPE device USER TERM RBS This menu allows the user to define option parameters for ports which emulate an RBS T1 connection from the network IFCE CONFIG RBS Write security 3 Read security 5 Specifies the configuration parameters for the endpoint First DSO Defines the first DSO for this endpoint The ATLAS 890 uses DSOs starting with this selection to send and receive calls to and from the network The outgoing calls which 2001 ADTRAN Inc ATLAS 890 System Manual 61200321L1 1A ATLAS 890 Section 4 User Interface Guide Page 208 of 234 are allowed or restricted over these DSOs are set by OUTHACCEPT see page 182 and OUT REJECT see page 184 NUMBER OF DSOs Specifies the number of DSOs ATLAS 890 uses for this endpoint DSOs AVAILABLE Indicates which DSOs of the T1 have been defined in this switched endpoint indicated by in another switched endpoint indicated by s or in a DEDICATED MAP indicated by n This field is read only The fo
31. 2001 ADTRAN Inc ATLAS 890 System Manual 61200321L1 1A ATLAS 890 Section 4 User Interface Guide Page 28 of 234 XMODEM protocol The second transfer method uses the ATLAS 890 built in Ethernet port of the system controller and Trivial File Transfer Protocol TFTP For more details on updating firmware please refer to DLP 009 and DLP 010 MODULE SLOT Write security 1 Read security 5 Displays the slot you selected for firmware updating When this option first appears NONE SELECTED displays When you move the cursor to this field and press Enter a dialog box opens allowing you to select SCU A SCU B SLOT 1 through SLOT 16 or ALL MODULES OF A TYPE MODULE TYPE Write security 1 Read security 5 Reflects the module type selected in MODULE SLOT The selections only include upgradable modules TRANSFER METHOD Write security 1 Read security 5 Lists the two transfer methods for updating firmware after selecting a module slot XMODEM and TFTP XMODEM transfers files by connecting to a communications program that sup ports XMODEM uploads to the terminal interface TFTP transfers files by specifying an appropriate server address and filename The standby controller may only be upgraded using the ICC channel TFTP SERVER IP ADDRESS Write security 1 Read security 5 Configures the IP address of the TFTP Server on which the update file resides ATLAS 890 uses this field to locate t
32. 61200321L1 1A ATLAS 890 Section 2 Engineering Guidelines Page 7 of 22 Table 3 ATLAS 890 LEDs Continued FOR THESE LEDS THIS COLOR INDICATES THAT LIGHT MODULE ONLINE Green solid Module has an active connection Green fast blink e has invalid flash memory or is downloading irmware MODULE TEST Yellow solid Module is in a test mode 4 REVIEWING THE REAR PANEL DESIGN The ATLAS 890 rear panel contains 16 slots for housing option modules which provide a variety of addi tional resources and data ports All slots are functionally identical The ATLAS 890 also contains two slots for housing controller modules and a single slot dedicated for power supply use only see Figure 2 The most common configuration is a fully redundant system with two system controllers and two power sup plies A fully redundant AC powered ATLAS 890 provides 13 option slots A fully redundant DC powered ATLAS 890 provides 15 option slots OPTION MODULES EN a ae MODULES POWER ONLY OR POWER ONLY INSTALL POW ER INRGHTMOST SLOTS CAUTD N MAINTENANCE BY TRAINED SERV LE PERSO NN ELONLY CAUTION RISK OF SUPPLEMENTAL EARTH GROUND MUST BE ASF SPTELECOMMUNICATION WIRING Figure 2 ATLAS 890 Rear Panel 2001 ADTRAN Inc ATLAS 890 System Manual 61200321L1 1A ATLAS 890 Section 2 Engineering Guidelines Page 8 of 22 Admin Port The Admin port EIA 232 connects to a computer or modem The
33. ETHERNET RATE Indicates whether the Ethernet network is 10 or 100BaseT ATLAS 890 System Manual 2001 ADTRAN Inc 61200321L1 1A ATLAS 890 Section 4 User Interface Guide Page 13 of 234 ADMIN PORT Write security 2 Read security 5 Displays the status of the RJ 45 Admin port SIGNAL LEADS Displays the state of the Admin port signals RTS CTS DCD and DTR TX BYTES Displays the number of bytes transmitted from the Admin port RX BYTES Displays the number of bytes received by the Admin port OVERRUN ERRS Displays the number of overrun errors received by the Admin port FRAMING ERRS Displays the number of framing errors received by the Admin port CLEAR COUNTERS Write security 5 Read security 5 Clears the Admin port statistics Press Y to activate this command CRAFT PORT Write security 2 Read security 5 Displays the status of the RJ 45 Craft port TX BYTES Displays the number of bytes transmitted from the Craft port RX BYTES Displays the number of bytes received by the Craft port OVERRUN ERRS Displays the number of overrun errors received by the Craft port FRAMING ERRS Displays the number of framing errors received by the Craft port CLEAR COUNTERS Write security 5 Read security 5 Clears the Craft port statistics Press Y to activate this command SYSTEM ALARMS Read security 5 Contains alarm information for the ATLAS 890 system includi
34. IP traffic between a public frame relay network a private frame relay net work or a point to point PPP network and the Ethernet port e Concentrates IP traffic from a public or private frame relay network to one or more serial ports V 35 The protocol passed over the serial port is frame relay RFC 1490 encapsulation e Passes Systems Network Architecture SNA Bisync and other legacy protocols between a public or private frame relay network and an external DTE running frame relay to ATLAS e Performs voice compression decompression G 723 1 and interfaces to either a Private Branch Ex change PBX or the Public Switched Telephone Network PSTN This feature requires an additional option module the VCOM Module P N 1200221Lx e Supports LMI Annex D or Annex A signaling on frame relay connections 2001 ADTRAN Inc ATLAS 890 System Manual 61200321L1 1A ATLAS 890 Section 1 System Description Page 4 of 6 PPP Switching e Supports up to 100 simultaneous PPP connections e Performs PAP CHAP or EAP authentication methods on a per connection basis e Includes keepalive functionality for PPP connections e Provides capability for numbered or unnumbered PPP interfaces 3 OPTION MODULES The ATLAS 890 has a system controller module and 15 option modules e ATLAS 890 System Controller Module P N 1200322L 1 e Quad TI PRI Option Module P N 1200185L3 e Quad EI PRA Option Module P N 1200264L1
35. Indicates the number to be dialed Configure this field in the Nx INTERFACE CONFIGURATION section of the DIAL PLAN Write security 4 Read security 5 These options initiate different types of tests and display test results LOOPBACK Write security 4 Read security 5 Test pattern to be transmitted out the port The following options are available No LOOPBACK No active loopback LOCAL Activates both a local loopback back toward the DTE and a LOOPBACK port loopback toward the network REMOTE V 54 loopback code to be sent to the far end and if the device LOOPBACK at the far end supports V 54 the device activates a loopback on detection of the V 54 code LOOPBACK STATUS Read security 5 This read only option indicates a port s current loopback status by displaying any of the fol lowing status messages No LOOPBACK ACTIVE LOOPING UP REMOTE UNIT ATLAS 890 System Manual 2001 ADTRAN Inc 61200321L1 1A ATLAS 890 Section 4 User Interface Guide Page 57 of 234 REMOTE UNIT LOOPED BACK LOOPING DOWN REMOTE UNIT REMOTE LOOP UP FAILED PoRT LooPED FROM REMOTE SOURCE PORT LOOPBACK ACTIVE 511 Write security 4 Read security 5 Controls the activation of the 511 test pattern generator and detector 511 RESULT Read security 5 Displays the results of the 511 test This option is read only Clear these results by pressing Enter when CLR is selected NONE Pattern is not sync
36. Moving through the Menus 0 00 ee eae 5 Session Management Keystrokes 20000 e eee eee tee 6 Configuration KeystrokeS lisse 7 Getting Helps onines no dew tes gif EE Sys e CEU T CASS d 7 Terminal Menu and System Control 2002 cece eee 8 Selecting the Appropriate Menu lsilslssessesee e 8 Secun Levels ease wade deeds eere eed bee xad e Ub eR er ASA TREE us da 8 Menu Descriptions 24 ui lr EIG eee d red wp a Eide E 9 Jsem 2 1 Eck eden teint ie E utei docet brefs Tel od A tsi i d i ste ea 9 SySte mSIatis 9 sra dra se Es Lue ro fU de ola dte o edes s 11 System Contig 1 2 e IER v Py eee ato LAE goat deed ec e eed a 17 Systemi WUY PT kD iag e E k l i a E ERIRE E DAE S EEE TKa e R DE a 27 Modules 2 4 e Ene eet epe ed Rahs nee e ee a d 37 Modules Menu Quad T1 PRI Option Module 0 000 cee eee 39 Modules Menu Quad E1 PRA Option Module 000 cece eee eee 46 Modules Menu Quad Nx 56 64 Option Module 0 00 cece eee 51 Modules Menu Quad USSI Option Module sllslelile eee 58 Modules Menu IMUX 56 64 Resource Module 0 cee eee 65 Modules Menu Octal BRI Option Module 0 0 0 rs 68 Modules Menu Voice Compression Resource Module 2000 cece e nee eas 70 Modules Menu Async 232 Option Module 0 0c cece 77 Modules Menu Modem 16 Option Module illis 86 Modules Menu HDLC Option Module
37. OSPF To RIP Translates OSPF routing updates into RIP advertisements using the values defined here MODE When set to ON the router redistributes OSPF into RIP 2001 ADTRAN Inc ATLAS 890 System Manual 61200321L1 1A ATLAS 890 Section 4 User Interface Guide Page 164 of 234 INTRA AREA METRIC OSPF intra area routes are advertised out RIP using this value as the metric or router hops INTER AREA METRIC OSPF inter area routes are advertised out RIP using this value as the metric or router hops EXTERNAL TYPE METRIC OSPF external types 1 and 2 are advertised out RIP using this value as the metric or router hops STATIC TO OSPF Static routes defined under the STATIC ROUTES menu see Static Routes on page 142 can be advertised out OSPF using the values defined here MODE When set to ON the router advertises the static routes as external LSAs EXTERNAL TYPE Defines two external types TYPE 1 Cost metrics are comparable to the state link metrics TYPE 2 Cost metrics are assumed to be larger than the cost of any intra AS path INTERNAL Write Security 2 Read security 2 Contains the configuration and status information for database overflow EXTERNAL LSA OVERFLOW When the number of non default external LSAs reaches this value the router enters Overflow state In this state all locally generated external LSAs are flushed during the overflow interval and all new external LSAs which push the total past t
38. SEFS Severely Errored Frame Second is a second that contains four consecutive errored framing patterns DM Degraded Minutes is the number of minutes with a bit error rate of 10 or greater Lcv Line Code Violation Pcv Path Code Violation LES Line Errored Second LOFC Loss of Frame Count is a count of seconds in which a valid framing pattern could not be obtained PERFORMANCE 15 MIN Write security 5 Read security 5 In the PERFORMANCE 15 MIN menu the performance data for the previous 15 minute window is stored Refer to Performance Curr above for a detailed description ATLAS 890 System Manual 2001 ADTRAN Inc 61200321L1 1A ATLAS 890 Section 4 User Interface Guide Page 49 of 234 PERFORMANCE 24 HR Write security 5 Read security 5 Stores the performance data for the previous 24 hour window Refer to Performance Curr on page 48 for a detailed description CONFIGURATION Write security 5 Read security 5 All of the following configurable parameters apply regardless of whether the port is connected to a Pri mary Rate Access or channelized E1 circuit PRT Write security 3 Read security 5 Displays the port number NAME Write security 3 Read security 5 Enter any text up to 16 characters to uniquely identify each port on the Quad E1 PRA Option Module FAS2 Write security 3 Read security 5 It enabled the network interface receiv
39. SLT PRT Displays the usage data broken down by slots and ports RESET Write security 4 Read security 5 Activates the reset of all accumulated availability statistics CONFIG Write security 5 Read security 5 Configures the statistics displayed under data tables DISPLAY FORMAT Write security 5 Read security 5 Sets the display format for all RESOURCE USAGE statistics to either raw data or percentages RESET MODE Write security 3 Read security 5 Sets the reset mode for the RESOURCE USAGE statistics to one of the following DAILY performs reset daily at 12 00 AM WEEKLY performs reset on Saturday night 12 00 AM MANUAL disables automatic reset of the resource usage statistics REDUNDANCY Write security 5 Read security 5 SCUA Read security 5 Displays the current status of the controller module installed in the controller A slot SCUB Read security 5 Displays the current status of the controller module installed in the controller B slot HARDWARE COMPATIBILITY Read security 5 Displays the current hardware of the controller modules installed in the controller A and con troller B slots Provides status for any compatibility issues that exist FIRMWARE COMPATIBILITY Read security 5 Indicates whether the firmware revision of controller A and controller B have any incompati bility problems that would affect controller switchover ACTIVE STANDBY CONFIGURATION
40. V2 If RIP V2 is used a new menu AUTHENTICATION opens Won If RIP V2 is used a user defined secret may have to be created METHOD Defines the method used to send RIP route advertisements The options are listed below NONE All routes in the router table are advertised through this interface with no modifi cation of the routing metric SPLIT HORIZON Only advertises routes not learned through this interface POISON REVERSE All routes are advertised but the routes learned through this interface are poi soned with an infinite route metric UPDATES Defines when RIP advertisements are transmitted PERIODIC RIP advertisements are periodically transmitted TRIGGERED RIP advertisements are transmitted only when new routes are learned and learned routes do not age 2001 ADTRAN Inc ATLAS 890 System Manual 61200321L1 1A ATLAS 890 Section 4 User Interface Guide Page 148 of 234 OSPF AUTHENTICATION Defines the secret used to advertise routes when using RIP V2 REDISTRIBUTE DEFAULT GATEWAY Enables or disables the transmission of the Default Gateway to be sent with RIP on a per interface basis Write Security 2 Read Security 2 Defines the parameters for this protocol MODE Turns ON or OFF default OSPF AREA ID Uniquely identifies an area with 32 bit integer Area 0 0 0 0 default is used as the OSPF backbone AUTHEN METHOD Enables authentication for this interface at two l
41. When working on modules always place them on an approved antistatic mat that is electrically grounded 2001 ADTRAN Inc ATLAS 890 System Manual 61200321L1 1A ATLAS 890 Section 5 DLP 012 Page 2 of 4 DLP 012 Perform Steps Below in the Order Listed 1 Connect to the ATLAS 890 using the 10 100 BASET interface If you are not already connected to the unit s 10 100 BASET port using Telnet client software use the procedure in DLP 003 to connect to the unit 2 Login to the unit Login to the unit using at least a level 3 password see DLP 006 for details 3 Go to the SYSTEM UTILITY menu and select the CONFIGURATION TRANSFER menu then press lt Enter gt 4 Set the TFTP SERVER IP ADDRESS to the IP address of the machine running the TFTP Server Program If you are using the ADTRAN TFTP server the IP address displays in the STATUS field UT For other TFTP servers please refer to the appropriate documentation 5 Change TFTP SERVER FILENAME to a unique filename including path This will be the name of the configuration file retrieved from the remote server Some TFTP servers constrain the format of the filename depending on the operating system of the server For example a TFTP server running on a PC under Windows 3 1 may only permit 8 3 for mat filenames 8 characters period and three extension characters G The ATLAS 890 system is rebooted immediately after a configuration is successful
42. Write security 3 Read security 5 Accepts any alpha numeric name up to 16 characters long to uniquely identify each port on the Quad V 35 Option Module CLK Write security 3 Read security 5 Controls the clock used by the ATLAS 890 to accept the transmit TX data from the DTE This is usually set to NORMAL If the interface cable is long causing a phase shift in the data the clock can be set to INVERTED This switches the phase of the clock which compensates for a long cable DATA Write security 3 Read security 5 Controls the inverting of the DTE data This inversion can be useful when operating with a high level data link control HDLC protocol often used as a means to ensure 1s density Select either NORMAL or INVERTED Data inversion configuration must match at both ends of the circuit CTS Write security 3 Read security 5 Determines the behavior of the Clear To Send CTS signal If set to NORMAL CTS will fol low the value of Request To Send RTS If set to FORCED ON CTS will always be asserted DCD Write security 3 Read security 5 Determines the behavior of the Data Carrier Detect DCD signal also called RLSD on V 35 interfaces If set to NORMAL DCD will generally be asserted when the interface is capable of passing data consult the ATLAS 890 User Manual for exact conditions If set to FORCED ON DCD will always be asserted If set to REMOTE RTS the value of DCD will track the value of the rem
43. Write security 5 Read security 5 Resets the connection statistics for the given digital resource This option resets the connection attempts connection completions and the connections failures fields for the analog resource 2001 ADTRAN Inc ATLAS 890 System Manual 61200321L1 1A ATLAS 890 Section 4 User Interface Guide Page 94 of 234 DIGITAL RsRC I O STATS Write security 5 Read security 5 Displays the input and output statistics for the digital resource available on the Modem 16 Option Module All statistics are for the current active call and are reset once the call becomes disconnected RSRC Read security 5 Indicates the resource number of the digital call resource On the Modem 16 Option Module analog resources are numbered 1 16 and digital ISDN resources are num bered 17 32 TX FRAMES Read security 5 Displays the number of data frames transmitted by the digital resource to the remote client modem during the current call This parameter is reset once the call is discon nected RX FRAMES Read security 5 Displays the number of data frames received by the digital resource from the remote client modem during the current call This parameter is reset once the call is discon nected Tx BvrES Read security 5 Displays the number of data bytes transmitted by the digital resource to the remote cli ent modem during the current call This parameter is reset once the call is discon nected
44. a 10 100 Base T Ethernet interface is provided for Telnet access ATLAS 890 System Manual 2001 ADTRAN Inc 61200321L1 1A ATLAS 890 Section 1 System Description Page 5 of 6 Quad T1 PRI Option Module P N 1200185L3 The Quad T1 PRI Option Module provides four channelized T1 or PRI interfaces Each interface can oper ate independently in DS 1 DSX 1 or PRI mode and any port can deliver timing for the system Quad E1 PRA Option Module P N 1200264L1 The Quad E1 PRA Option Module provides four channelized E1 or PRA interfaces using a supplied 120 ohm DB 15 converter cable The Quad E1 PRA Option Module may also be purchased to include BNC converter cables P N 4200264L 1 This interface operates in CCS or CAS signaling mode and can deliver timing for the system Quad Nx 56 64 Option Module P N 1200184L 1 The Quad Nx 56 64 module provides four synchronous V 35 DTE ports using supplied DB 78 to V 35 converter cables that can operate from 56K to 2 048 Mbps in steps of 56 or 64 kbps Any port can deliver timing for the system Quad USSI Option Module P N 4200261LX The Quad USSI Option Module provides four synchronous DTE ports that can operate from 56K to 2 048 Mbps in steps of 56 or 64 kbps The DTE ports available using adapter cables are EIA 530 EIA 530A RS 449 RS 232 and CCITT X 21 Any port can deliver timing for the system Octal Basic Rate ISDN Option Module 1200186L2 The Octal Basic Rate ISDN m
45. and ones are transmitted as pulses that alternate polarity Although B8ZS is an enhancement to AMI B8ZS and AMI are normally referred to as mutually exclusive options for a T1 See also B8ZS ANI Automatic Number Identification Service provided by a local phone company that provides the transmission of the Billing Number for the originating party ANI information is sent through the net work from the originating central office through all intermediate tandem offices to the terminating central office Unlike Caller ID ANI information cannot be blocked by the calling party Annex A Standard for frame relay signaling as defined by the International Telecommunication Union Tele communication in publication Q 933 A Annex D Standard for frame relay signaling as defined by the American National Standards Institute ANST in publication T1 617 D ANSI T1 617 D Annex D See Annex D ANSI T1 617 D Annex D See Annex D ARP Address Resolution Protocol A protocol that maps an IP address to an ethernet MAC address B channel Bearer channel Bearer channels of an ISDN service carry provide data transmission Compare with D channel 2001 ADTRAN Inc ATLAS 890 System Manual 61200321L1 1A ATLAS 890 Glossary Page 2 of 12 B8ZS Bipolar eight zero substitution In a T1 carrier system a specific eight bit pattern containing two deliberate bipolar violations which replaces eight consecutive data zero bits bandwidth T
46. available e ETSI DSSI First DSO Defines the first DSO for this endpoint The ATLAS 890 uses DSOs starting with this selection to send and receive calls to and from the network PSTN The outgoing calls which are allowed or restricted over these DSOs are set by OUTHACCEPT see page 182 and OUTZREJECT see page 184 NUMBER OF DSOs Specifies the number of DSOs ATLAS 890 uses for this endpoint STRIP MSD Strips a selected quantity choose from NONE 1 2 and 3 of the most significant dig its MSD of a dialed number prior to being forwarded out of the port ATLAS 890 System Manual 2001 ADTRAN Inc 61200321L1 1A ATLAS 890 Section 4 User Interface Guide Page 215 of 234 Example A network port could be set to accept all calls beginning with 9 9 and then with STRIP MSD set to 1 all digits would be sent toward the network except the leading 9 that are subsequently stripped are used as accept criterion toe STRIP MSD does not affect CALL ACCEPT criteria All of the digits including the MSDs NETWORK SPECIFIC FACILITY VOICE AND DATA Enables the sending of appropriate information to the PSTN Currently not supported for E1 PRA use CALLED DIGITS TRANSFERRED Some PRI switches may be provisioned to send only a portion of the called number like DID This menu item allows the ATLAS 890 to know how many digits to expect choose from NONE THREE FOUR SEVEN and ALL The default is ALL and would alm
47. e g 7 to Port 1 of the module and then configure Port 2 to only accept calls from that unique Source ID 7 Min DSO s Set this to 1 for typical single call connections Setting this greater than 1 will restrict connections to endpoints supporting aggregation e g BONDING of the specified number of DSOs Max DSO s Set this to 1 for typical single call connections Setting this greater than 1 will accom modate connections to endpoints supporting aggregation e g BONDING of up to the specified number of DSOs This also sets the number of DSOs presented in the negotiation of outgoing aggregate calls DIAL PLAN QUAD USSI OPTION MODULE USER TERM This menu allows the user to define option parameters for ports configured for USSI interface connec tions FCE CONFIG Write security 3 Read security 5 Specifies the configuration parameters for the endpoint PORTS AVAILABLE Indicates which ports of the selected Quad USSI Option Module have been defined in this switched endpoint indicated by in another switched endpoint indicated by s or in a DEDICATED MAP indicated by n This field is read only The follow ing characters may display in this field 0 4 This port is available This port is requesting this port for this connection but the port is not yet activated This port is used by this endpoint S This port is used elsewhere in the switched dial plan AT
48. no wildcards DSO ALIGNMENT DSO ALIGNMENT is typically enabled when a user needs the ability to maintain align ment between T1s as if they were in dedicated map mode This scenario requires DSO ALIGNMENT enabled on both interfaces usually on User Term and on Net Term An interface that has DSO ALIGNMENT enabled will only process a call from the switch board on the same DSO that the incoming call was received Example The unit receives an incoming call on DSO 17 The switchboard looks for an interface who has matching accept criteria to the number it received A match is found on inter face Z that has DSO ALIGNMENT enabled This causes interface Z to only process ATLAS 890 System Manual 2001 ADTRAN Inc 61200321L1 1A ATLAS 890 Section 4 User Interface Guide Page 211 of 234 the call if it has DSO 17 available If all matching interfaces have DSO ALIGNMENT enabled and none of those interfaces have DSO 17 available then a busy or fast busy will be returned to the calling party USER TERM NFAS This menu allows the user to define option parameters for ports which emulate an NFAS connection IFCE CONFIG NFAS Write security 3 Read security 5 Specifies the configuration parameters for the endpoint SECONDARY INTERFACES Write security 3 Read security 5 Allows the user to define the slot and port locations of the secondary interfaces in the NFAS group Displays the entry number
49. or SUBSTITUTE ALWAYS Won The Caller ID number must be specific i e no wildcards DIAL PLAN ASYNC 232 OPTION MODULE USER TERM This menu allows the user to define option parameters for ports configured for Async 232 connections FCE CONFIG Write security 3 Read security 5 Specifies the configuration parameters for the endpoint PORTS AVAILABLE Indicates which ports of the selected Async 232 Option Module have been defined in this switched endpoint indicated by or in another switched endpoint indicated by s This field is read only The following characters may display in this field 0 9 This port is available The digit that displays in this field represents the last digit of the port number This port is requesting this port for this connection but the port is not yet activated 2001 ADTRAN Inc ATLAS 890 System Manual 61200321L1 1A ATLAS 890 Section 4 User Interface Guide Page 226 of 234 This port is used by this endpoint S This port is used elsewhere in the switched dial plan S This port is in the switched dial plan and conflicts with this end point NUMBER OF PORTS Specifies the number of Async 232 ports ATLAS 890 uses for this endpoint Source ID Simplifies the creation of a dial plan in applications where the criterion for switching calls to a certain endpoint is a function of which endpoint originated the call Default value 0 Zero is the
50. select ECHO FAR END LOOPBACKS To continuously measure in band delay select IN BAND DELAY MEASUREMENT To turn off continuous diag nostic functions select PASS THROUGH DIAGNOSTIC PACKETS ECHO FAR END LOOPBACKS Generates and transmits a response on this DLCI to the remote equipment if an ADTRAN proprietary diagnostic message is received on this DLCI IN BAND DELAY MEASUREMENT Generates a diagnostic packet to measure delay through the frame relay network This process requires that the equipment at the remote site be ADTRAN IQ compatible PASS THROUGH DIAGNOSTIC PACKETS Used when ATLAS 890 is acting as a frame relay switch Transmits a diagnostic packet out the packet endpoint connected to this DLCI if a diagnostic packet is received on this packet endpoint PRIMARY BACKUP SELECTION Allows you to define a sublink as a primary or a backup sublink PRIMARY defines a normal sublink and includes the menus ENABLE BACKUP SUP PORT BACKUP PACKET ENDPT and BACKUP SUBLINK BACKUP defines a backup sublink and includes the menus PRIMARY PACKET ENDPT and PRI MARY SUBLINK ENABLE BACKUP SUPPORT Visible only if the sublink type is PRIMARY YES displays the backup menus NO hides the backup menus BACKUP PACKET ENDPT Visible only if ENABLE BACKUP SUPPORT is set to YES Selects ATLAS 890 System Manual 2001 ADTRAN Inc 61200321L1 1A ATLAS 890 Section 4 User Interface Guide Page 131 of 234 BACKUP PACKET ENDPT that con
51. this feature SEND LEADS Write security 3 Read security 5 Sends the state of the DTE leads to the remote unit whenever any of the leads change state If any leads on the remote unit are set to track a remote signal this option must be enabled The DTE lead states are conveyed using the Inband control channel which must be enabled SIGNAL RTS V 54 511 TEST SELF TEST NETWORK NODSO NETWORK LOOPBACK ON ACTIVE TEST MAPPED ALARM ACTIVE CTS Follows Off Off Off Off Off Off DCD Off Off Off Off DSR Off Off Off Off Off z Do not care Force On On under all conditions Write security 3 Read security 5 Dials an Nx port that is configured to ignore DTR PRT Read security 5 Displays the port number 2001 ADTRAN Inc ATLAS 890 System Manual 61200321L1 1A ATLAS 890 Section 4 User Interface Guide Page 56 of 234 TEST MODE Write security 3 Read security 5 Configures the dialing mode The following options are available PERSISTENT Redial whenever the call is cleared or if the call fails ONE TIME Attempt the call only once DIAL Write security 0 Read security 0 Src ID Write security 3 Read security 5 Indicates the SOURCE ID of the number to be dialed Configure this field in the Nx INTER FACE CONFIGURATION section of the DIAL PLAN NUMBER Write security 3 Read security 5
52. 000 ccc eee ee 9 Table 7 External Relay Monitor Connector Pinout 0000 cece eee eee 9 Table 8 THAR RIP INOUE 1 cit So secre oe e RARO wa ech SU Terk otto see OR ORC Le Dan 10 Table 9 DB 15 Gonnector PINOUT a isse eR ex a Cd e oe Yo ace Re eR YO do en 10 Table 10 DB 62 Connector Pinout lle RR RR ann 11 Table 11 V 35 Winchester Pinout 0 2 0 0 00 ccc ers 11 Table 12 DB 78 Pinout for the Quad Nx 56 64 Option Module sess 12 Table 13 DB 78 Pinout for the Quad USSI Option Module llle 13 Table 14 EIA 530 Connector Pinout sseeeeee RR RR IRR n 14 Table 15 EIA 530A Connector Pinout isle RR RR n 15 Table 16 RS 449 V 36 Connector Pinout 0 0 0 0 Rhe 15 Table 17 RS 232 Connector Pinout i sec anenee hee 16 Table 18 CCIT X 21 V 11 Connector Pinout 0 0 0 RR e 17 Table9 BRL PIBDOUE iiS aeree er dd doe Med citable ona nates CXCES DEAD ap ae dE 17 Table 20 DB 25 Connector Pinout lee RR RR RR n 18 Table 21 T3 Module Connections sese RR RR IRR n 18 Table 22 T3 Drop and Insert Module Connections 0 0 c eens 19 Table 23 Specifications 3 52 exe Eso ede eel x de eee UNA WR Ee ei 20 ATLAS 890 System Manual 2001 ADTRAN Inc 61200321L1 1A ATLAS 890 Section 2 Engineering Guidelines Page 3 of 22 1 EQUIPMENT DIMENSIONS The ATLAS 890 base unit is 17 08 W 11 67 D and 10 5 H and can be mounted in
53. 2001 ADTRAN Inc ATLAS 890 System Manual 61200321L1 1A ATLAS 890 Section 4 User Interface Guide Page 6 of 234 To do this Press this key Select items Arrows Edit a selected menu item Enter Cancel an edit Escape Close pop up help screen Escape Move between the left and right panes Tab Arrows Move to the top of a screen A Move to the bottom of a screen Z Ascend one menu level Backspace Session Management Keystrokes Display data fields too large for display window To do this Press this key Log out of a session CTRL L Invalidate the password entry and return to the login screen CTRL S Refresh the screen To save time only the portion of the screen that has changed is refreshed This CTRL R option should only be necessary if the display picks up incorrect characters caused by disconnecting and reconnecting the terminal session View Extended Data CTRL V ATLAS 890 System Manual 2001 ADTRAN Inc 61200321L1 1A ATLAS 890 Section 4 User Interface Guide Page 7 of 234 Configuration Keystrokes To do this Press this key Restore factory default settings This setting restores the factory defaults based on the location of the cursor If the F cursor is on a module line in the MODULES menu then only the selected module is updated to factory defaults Copy selected items to the clipboard The amount of information you
54. 22 12 50 ATLAS S90 ADTRAN ICCISCUAIOIR Len 2 OC 14 ocato May 08 13 22 14 172 22 12 50 ATLAS 830JADTRAN ICCISCUAIDIT Len 2 OC 14 May 08 13 22 14 172 22 12 50 ATLAS S90 ADTRANTICCISCUAIOIR Len 2 0C 14 Coca May 08 13 22 14 172 2212 802A ADTRAN AlOITx Len 2 OC 14 14 17222 12 lad E X MOIRs Len 2 DC 14 C LOCAL2 Highlight facilities red on pobe ene S e C LOCAL3 2 0 14 22 22 DC 14 LOCAL4 22 22 X Critical f Warning 0C 14 C LOCALS 2246 17222 Maoi Normal oe C LOCAL E Pet Minor Info C LOCAL May 8 13 22 18 172 22 12 50 ATLAS 8830 amp D TRANTICCIS CUAJOIT x Len May 08 13 22 18 172 22 12 50 ATLAS 890 ADTRAN ICCISCUAIOIRs Len May 08 13 22 19 172 22 12 50 ATLAS 830 ADTRANTICCISCUAIDIT x Len May 08 13 22 19 172 22 12 50 ATLAS 890 AD TRAN ICCISCUAIOIR Len May 08 13 22 19 172 22 12 50 ATLAS 890 ADTRAN ICCISCUAIOIT x Len May 08 13 22 19 172 22 12 50 ATLAS 880 amp DTRANTICCISCUAJOIR Len 2 DC 14 May 08 13 22 20 172 22 12 50 ATLAS 890 ADTRAN ICCISCUAIOITx Len 9 OC 10 04 00 01 02 00 02 01 cS May 08 13 22 20 172 22 12 50 ATLAS 880 amp DTRANTICCISCUAJOIR Len 9 OC 11 0A 00 00 02 00 02 01 4 gt Current Event n cooooooooooooo OoO6onpnonononoouo La l l st a TImGR mde qedeqede 2001 ADTRAN Inc ATLAS 550 System Manual 61200321L1 1A ATLAS 890 Section 5 DLP 013 Page 4 of 4 e The PROPERTIES menu allows the user to specify what typ
55. 890 Section 4 User Interface Guide Page 160 of 234 IP Write Security 2 Read security 2 Defines the IP address of the server that receives the relay packet UDP Ports 1 3 Write Security 2 Read security 2 Specifies the UDP ports to relay These fields are active only when ENABLE is set to SPECI FIED OSPF GLOBAL Write Security 2 Read security 2 Sets global OSPF parameters ROUTER ID Write Security 2 Read security 2 Uniquely identifies the router in the Autonomous System with a 32 bit integer Although this 32 bit integer appears in the form of an IP address it is not an IP address By convention and to ensure uniqueness this value should be one of the router s IP interface addresses By default the Ethernet port s IP address is used AREA Write Security 2 Read security 2 OSPF uses areas to divide large networks into different areas to allow a two level hierarchical routing scheme This scheme helps reduce the size of the router s routing table and the link state database table The link state database table lists each unique AREA ID that was defined in the INTERFACES OSPF submenu see Area ID on page 148 The interface AREA ID must be defined before it can appear in the table areas cannot be inserted into this table If an area entry is deleted here the interface s area ID is changed to 0 0 0 0 which is the backbone area AREA ID Uniquely identifies the router in
56. ADTRAN Inc ATLAS 890 System Manual 61200321L1 1A ATLAS 890 Section 4 User Interface Guide Page 174 of 234 apply to the Quad USSI Option Module depending on the application DSO SELECTION Defines DSOs for an USSI port Use this field to define the DSOs for this connec tion This field only applies to USSI to USSI USSI to Nx or USSI to Pkt Endpt connections DSO RATE Sets the DSO rate to either 56 or 64 kbps gt DEDICATED MAPS OCTAL BRI OPTION MODULE CONNECTS Write security 3 Read security 5 Enters the dedicated map connections Press lt Enter gt to activate the submenus To FROM CONFIG Write security 3 Read security 5 Specifies the configuration for the TO FROM connection The following selections may apply to the Octal BRI Option Module depending on the application DSO SELECTION Defines DSOs for an BRI port Use this field to define the DSOs for this connec tion This field only applies to BRI to BRI BRI to USSI BRI to Nx or BRI to Pkt Endpt connections DSO RATE Sets the DSO rate to either 56 or 64 kbps NT LT Configures the BRI U interface to be network termination or line termination gt DEDICATED MAPS T3 AND T3 WITH DROP AND INSERT OPTION MODULES CONNECTS Write security 3 Read security 5 Enters the dedicated map connections Press lt Enter gt to activate the submenus To FROM CONFIG Write security 3 Read security 5 Specifies the configuration for the
57. ADTRAN Use Only Read security 5 The ADTRAN Data Link Protocol ADLP provides a communications link between ADT RAN equipment over point to point or multidrop connections that can be used for configura tion and monitoring remote ADTRAN devices Choose enable to activate the ADLP over the FDL for the DS1 interface Write security 3 Read security 5 These options initiate different types of tests and display test results PRT Read security 5 Displays the port number Loc LB Write security 4 Read security 5 Causes loopback on near end local port see Figure 10 The following options are available LINE Metallic loopback PAYLD Payload loopback framing and clocking are regenerated a Quad T1 PRI TAN DS1 i Payload Loopback Line Loopback a P Figure 10 Loopback Test Diagram ATLAS 890 System Manual 2001 ADTRAN Inc 61200321L1 1A ATLAS 890 Section 4 User Interface Guide Page 45 of 234 REMOTE LB Write security 4 Read security 5 Sends loopback code to Remote CSU The following options are available AT amp T INBAND LINE Works in ESF and D4 mode ANSI FDL LINE Requires ESF mode ANSI FDL PYLD Requires ESF mode INBAND NIU Works in ESF and D4 mode PATTERN Write security 4 Read security 5 Test pattern to be transmitted out the port The following options are available ALL ONES Framed ones ALL ZEROS Fra
58. ALRN SCB STBY 10 ALRM 11 ALRM 12 ALRM 13 ALRM 14 ALRM 15 ALRM 16 ALRM PS OK A more he ystem Information menu Extended Help Slot Status Navigation Help Tool Tip System Time Figure 1 Top Level Terminal Menu Window p 13 2 89 zl Menu Path The first line of the terminal menu window the menu path shows the session s current position path in the menu structure For example Figure 1 shows the top level menu with the cursor on the SYSTEM INFO submenu therefore the menu path reads ATLAS 890 System Info Window Panes When you first start a terminal menu session the terminal menu window is divided into left and right panes The left pane shows the list of available submenus while the right pane shows the contents of the currently selected submenu You can view the terminal windows in two ways with fields and submenus displaying horizontally across the right pane or with fields and submenus displaying vertically down the right pane Viewing submenus vertically rather than horizontally allows you to see information at a glance rather than scrolling horizon tally across the window To change the view move your cursor to an index number and press Enter 2001 ADTRAN Inc ATLAS 890 System Manual 61200321L1 1A ATLAS 890 Section 4 User Interface Guide Page 4 of 234 Figure 2 shows this alternate view Fields and submenu names may vary slightly in this view Telnet Connection 172 22 12 50 Sessio
59. ANI to route the call The accept number in the dial plan must use the ANI number not the DNIS number B CHANNEL SELECTION Determines how the ATLAS 890 switchboard uses B channels for call routing The CIRCULAR method can be used for call load balancing among the available B channels on this interface NORMAL Always start with the last channel configured i e for a full PRI channel 23 would be used if available CIRCULAR Contiguous channels from last to first ATLAS 890 System Manual 2001 ADTRAN Inc 61200321L1 1A ATLAS 890 Section 4 User Interface Guide Page 219 of 234 gt DIAL PLAN QUAD NX 56 64 OPTION MODULE USER TERM This menu allows the user to define option parameters for ports configured for V 35 connections IFCE CONFIG Write security 3 Read security 5 Specifies the configuration parameters for the endpoint PORTS AVAILABLE Indicates which ports of the selected Quad Nx 56 64 Option Module have been defined in this switched endpoint indicated by in another switched endpoint indicated by s or in a DEDICATED MAP indicated by n This field is read only The following characters may display in this field 0 4 This port is available This port is requesting this port for this connection but the port is not yet activated This port is used by this endpoint S This port is used elsewhere in the switched DIAL PLAN S This port is in the
60. ATLAS 890 in Slot 1 be switched to Port 2 of that same module Assign a unique Source ID e g 7 to Port 1 of the module and then configure Port 2 to only accept calls from that unique Source ID 7 SWAP ANI DNIS Swaps the ANI and DNIS numbers received from the network ANI Automatic Num ber Identification is the billing number of the calling party and DNIS Dialed Num ber Identification Service is the called party number With this swap the ATLAS 890 switchboard uses ANI to route the call The accept number Won in the dial plan must use the ANI number not the DNIS number B CHANNEL SELECTION Determines how the ATLAS 890 switchboard uses B channels for call routing The CIRCULAR method can be used for call load balancing among the available B channels on this interface NORMAL Always start with the last channel configured i e for a full PRI channel 23 would be used if available CIRCULAR Contiguous channels from last to first BUSY OPTION Defines the response propagated to the CPE upon receipt of a DISCONNECT USER BUSY message from the network NORMAL Send a Progress message to the CPE and map busy tones ATLAS 890 System Manual 2001 ADTRAN Inc 61200321L1 1A ATLAS 890 Section 4 User Interface Guide Page 205 of 234 Pass THRU Send a DISCONNECT USER BUSY message to the User Term CPE device USER TERM PRI This menu allows the user to define option parameters for ports which emulat
61. ATLAS 890 will either restart immediately and resume operation or restart at the specified time and day of the week depending on your selection Alternately if the unit is part of a management cluster connected to the local network you may use a PC connected to the network to Telnet into the unit By utilizing the ETHERNET port the ATLAS 890 may be quickly upgraded using TFTP provided there is a TFTP server on the local network The ATLAS 890 ships with ADTRAN Utilities software which includes a TFTP server See DLP 010 Updating the Firmware of an ATLAS 890 using TFTP for more details Follow up Procedures Once this procedure is complete return to the procedure which referred you to this DLP and continue with the tasks indicated there 2001 ADTRAN Inc ATLAS 890 System Manual 61200321L1 1A ATLAS 890 Section 5 DLP 009 Page 4 of 4 ATLAS 890 System Manual 2001 ADTRAN Inc 61200321L1 1A ATLAS 890 Section 5 DLP 010 Page 1 of 4 UPDATING THE FIRMWARE OF AN ATLAS 890 USING TFTP Introduction The ATLAS 890 supports firmware updates via the 10 100 BASET Ethernet port using either TFTP from a network server or the ADMIN or CRAFT interfaces using XMODEM This DLP provides the steps to follow for a successful firmware upgrade using the 10 100 BASET ethernet port and a TFTP Server Tools and Materials Required e APC with a Telnet client software e A TFTP Server accessible on the local network A TFTP server is
62. Alarm ISDN F Frame Alarm packet T TBOP Alarm packet P PPP Alarm packet 2001 ADTRAN Inc ATLAS 890 System Manual 61200321L1 1A ATLAS 890 Section 4 User Interface Guide Page 42 of 234 Sic STATUS Read security 5 Read only field that indicates signaling of all 24 DSOs The A B bits for Rx receive and Tx transmit DSOs are shown Dashes display for those DSOs where robbed bit signaling RBS is not being trans ferred by the ATLAS 890 PERFORMANCE CURRENT Write security 3 Read security 5 The performance fields either current 15 minute total or 24 hour total provide status on key perfor mance measures as specified in ANSI T1 403 and AT amp T TR54016 for the T1 PRI port Excepting CLR these fields are all read only The monitored parameters include the following PRT Displays the port number CLR Clears performance information for the selected port Es Errored Second ES is a second with one or more error events OR one or more Out Of Frame events OR one or more Controlled Slips BES Bursty Errored Second BES is a second with more than one but less than 320 error events SES Severely Errored Second SES is a second with 320 or more error events OR one or more Out Of Frame events SEFS Severely Errored Frame Second is a second that contains four consecutive errored framing patterns LoFC Loss of Frame Count is a count of seconds in which a valid framing pattern could not be obtained
63. Basic Rate ISDN Option Module Quick Start Guide e Eight RJ 45 to RJ 11 cables ADTRAN P N 3125M007 T3 Option Module P N 1200223L 1 Shipping Contents The ADTRAN shipment of the T3 Option Module includes the following items e T3 Option Module T3 Option Module Quick Start Guide e Two 6 ft coaxial BNC cables ADTRAN P N 31251054 T3 Option Module with Drop and Insert Interface P N 1200225L1 Shipping Contents The ADTRAN shipment of the T3 Option Module with Drop and Insert Interface includes the following items e T3 Option Module with Drop and Insert Interface e T3 Option Module with Drop and Insert Interface Quick Start Guide e Four 6 ft coaxial BNC cables ADTRAN P N 31251054 2001 ADTRAN Inc ATLAS 890 System Manual 61200321L1 1A ATLAS 890 Section 3 Network Turnup Procedure Page 8 of 8 8 16 24 32 Channel Voice Compression Resource Modules P N 1200221LX Shipping Contents The ADTRAN shipment of the 8 16 24 32 Channel Voice Compression Resource Modules includes the following items e 8 16 24 32 Channel Voice Compression Resource Modules e 8 16 24 32 Channel Voice Compression Resource Modules Quick Start Guide Nx 56 64 IMUX Resource Module P N 1200262L1 Shipping Contents The ADTRAN shipment of the Nx 56 64 IMUX Resource Module includes the following items e Nx 56 64 IMUX Resource Module e Nx 56 64 IMUX Resource Module Quick Start Guide HDLC Resource Module P N 1200222L 1 Shipping Conten
64. Blue Alarm Cleared T1 Blue Alarm Active MAJOR Blue Alarm Set T1 D Channel Alarm Cleared MAJOR D Channel Alarm Cleared T1 D Channel Alarm Active MAJOR D Channel Alarm Set T1 LOS Cleared MAJOR LOS Alarm Cleared T1 LOS Active MAJOR LOS Alarm Set T1 Red Alarm Cleared MAJOR Red Alarm Cleared T1 Red Alarm Active MAJOR Red Alarm Set T1 Tx Blue Alarm Cleared MAJOR Tx Blue Alarm Cleared T1 Tx Blue Alarm Active MAJOR Tx Blue Alarm Set T1 Tx Yellow Alarm Cleared MAJOR Tx Yellow Alarm Cleared T1 Tx Yellow Alarm Active MAJOR Tx Yellow Alarm Set T1 Yellow Alarm Cleared MAJOR Yellow Alarm Cleared T1 Yellow Alarm Active MAJOR Yellow Alarm Set 2001 ADTRAN Inc ATLAS 890 System Manual 61200321L1 1A ATLAS 890 Section 6 System Event Logging Page 10 of 16 Table 6 Ethernet Events Console Log String Category Event Out of memory CRITICAL Not enough memory for Ethernet driver Table 7 ISDN Events Console Log String Category Event BRI configuration failed NoISDN resources CRITICAL No BRI resources available are available PRI configuration failed No ISDN resources CRITICAL No PRI resources available are available No SPID matches the call profile lt called WARNING No Matching SPID found number gt lt call type gt No SPID with free B channels matches call WARNING No Matching SPID found type lt
65. ER oe a nae uae aie dex s 3 ISDN Switch Type Si inet a ae a ae i a tenet ete hh 3 Dedicated Connection MapS 00 0c cette eee nee 3 Switched Connection Maps 000 c cette eee 3 acumen CUI Te 3 Performance Monitoring ssi serais a eee e e 3 Frame Relay 2 ic tette ee estan reete ev dise Kee ica fe Ra Cx a n 3 PPP Switchlrid x obo Er xD bv xeu ic dete Dt EL DM xe Eg 4 Option Modules 01e4xRidlpeLlimIMieewRIenDivieyeeurdeUeeszri iuesi vae i 4 ATLAS 890 System Controller Module P N 1200322L1 lisse sees 4 Quad T1 PRI Option Module P N 1200185L3 0 0 00 5 Quad E1 PRA Option Module P N 1200264L1 lssslleeseee ee 5 Quad Nx 56 64 Option Module P N 1200184L1 lssssesleeeeee ne 5 Quad USSI Option Module P N 4200261LX lsssssseleeeee ens 5 Octal Basic Rate ISDN Option Module 1200186L2 000 eee 5 T3 Option Module P N 1200223L1 lisse 5 T3 Option Module with Drop and Insert Interface P N 1200225L1 00055 5 8 16 24 32 Channel Voice Compression Resource Modules P N 1200221Lx 5 Nx 56 64 IMUX Resource Module P N 1200262L1 isses 6 HDLC Resource Module P N 1200222L1 0 2 0 ees 6 Modem 16 Resource Module P N 1200181L1 00 0 eee 6 Async 232 Option Module P N 1200182L1 0 0 tees 6 2001 ADTRAN Inc ATLAS 890 System Manual 61200321L1 1A ATLAS 890 Section 1 System Desc
66. If requested provide this information to the telephone company If this equipment causes harm to the telephone network the telephone company may temporarily dis continue service If possible advance notification is given otherwise notification is given as soon as possible The telephone company will advise the customer of the right to file a complaint with the FCC The telephone company may make changes in its facilities equipment operations or procedures that could affect the proper operation of this equipment Advance notification and the opportunity to main tain uninterrupted service are given If experiencing difficulty with this equipment please contact ADTRAN for repair and warranty infor mation The telephone company may require this equipment to be disconnected from the network until the problem is corrected or it is certain the equipment is not malfunctioning This unit contains no user serviceable parts An FCC compliant telephone cord with a modular plug is provided with this equipment This equip ment is designed to be connected to the telephone network or premises wiring using an FCC compati ble modular jack which is Part 68 compliant The following information may be required when applying to the local telephone company for a dial up line for the V 34 modem Service Type REN FIC USOC Loop Start 1 6B 0 8A 02LS2 RJ 11C The REN is useful in determining the quantity of devices you may connect to your telephone line
67. Loopback can be ENABLED or DISABLED for a port with this field When ENABLED all data received from the DTE by the Async 232 Module port is transmitted back to the DTE Loop back state is not saved in the module configuration and if the card is hot swapped or the ATLAS 890 system is restarted loopback is disabled on all ports It is not necessary to have a Dial Plan entry for a port to enable loopback MODULES MENU MODEM 16 OPTION MODULE The ATLAS 890 system controller automatically detects the presence of the Modem 16 Option Module when it is installed in the system listed as M56K 16 To see the menus for the Modem 16 Option Module via the terminal menu use the arrow keys to scroll to the MODULES menu and press Enter to access the module choices Refer to the Modem 16 Option Module Quick Start Guide for a menu tree containing a complete listing of menus INFO Read security 5 Provides information about the module part number serial number and assembly revision PART NUMBER Read security 5 Displays the part number of the module SERIAL NUMBER Read security 5 Displays the serial number of the module ATLAS 890 System Manual 2001 ADTRAN Inc 61200321L1 1A ATLAS 890 Section 4 User Interface Guide Page 87 of 234 BOARD REVISION Read security 5 Displays the board revision of the installed module FIRMWARE REVISION Read security 5 Displays the revision of the coprocessor firmwar
68. MAINIENANCE BY TRAINED SERV IE VERSO NN EL ONLY A e e Figure 1 ATLAS 890 Slot Designation Rear Panel W ARNING Option modules are intended to be serviced by qualified service personnel only Instructions for Installing the ATLAS 890 Controller and Option Modules Instructions for Installing the ATLAS 890 Option Modules Step Action 1 Remove the cover plate from the appropriate option slot of the ATLAS 890 rear panel 2 Slide the Option Module into the option slot until the module is firmly seated against the front of the chassis 3 Secure the thumbscrews at both edges of the module Tighten with a screwdriver 4 Connect the cables to the associated device s 5 Complete installation of remaining modules and Base Unit as specified in the appropriate sections of this Network Turnup Procedure 2001 ADTRAN Inc ATLAS 890 System Manual 61200321L1 1A ATLAS 890 Section 3 Network Turnup Procedure Page 6 of 8 Quad T1 PRI Option Module P N 1200185L3 Shipping Contents The ADTRAN shipment of the Quad T1 PRI Option Module includes the following items Quad TI PRI Option Module Quad TI PRI Option Module Quick Start Guide e Four cables RJ 48C to RJ 48C ADTRAN P N 3125M008 e Two crossover cable RJ 48C to RJ 48C ADTRAN P N 3125M010 e Two DB 15 to RJ 48 Adapters ADTRAN P N 3196027 Quad E1 PRA Option Module P N 1200264L 1 Shipping Contents The ADTRAN shipment o
69. PRA Option Module SERIAL NUMBER Read security 5 Displays the module s serial number BOARD REVISION Read security 5 Displays the board revision of the installed module E1 FRAMER REV Read security 5 Displays the E1 framer hardware revision ALARM STATUS Read security 5 Displays any active alarms as follows PRT Displays the port number The Quad E1 PRA Option Module is a single port device ALARMS Displays the alarm type Each alarm type is described below LOS Loss of Signal No signal detected on port interface LOF Loss of Framing The receiver is unable to synchronize to the FAS framing pattern of the received signal LOMF Loss of Multi frame The receiver is unable to synchronize to the TS15 multi frame pattern of the received signal ATLAS 890 System Manual 2001 ADTRAN Inc 61200321L1 1A ATLAS 890 Section 4 User Interface Guide Page 47 of 234 CRC4 Loss of CRC 4 Framing The receiver is unable to synchronize to the CRC 4 frame pattern of the received signal AIS Alarm Indication Signal An upstream failure has been detected and all ones are being received REM Remote Frame Alarm Loss of frame alarm being received from far end REMMF Remote Multi Frame Alarm Loss of multi frame alarm being received from far end TSO ALARMS Read security 5 Displays per TSO alarm status These alarms usually indicate the failure to receive the protocol that has been configured for the TS
70. Page 7 of 12 LAN Local area network A group of computers and peripheral devices connected by a communications channel limited by distance leased line A telecommunication facility or link reserved for the exclusive use of one customer Also called a dedicated line LEC Local Exchange Carrier Provides local access to public data and phone networks LED Light emitting diode Link Integrity Poll A poll that occurs each T391 seconds to determine the state of the connection to the frame relay switch LLC2 Logical Link Control Type 2 Upper portion of the Data Link layer layer 2 that handles flow control and error control LMI Standard published by the Frame Relay Consortium in 1990 to create a defined interface on the UNI The Consortium was composed of Cisco Systems DEC Nortel and StrataCom and is commonly referred to as the Group of Four LMI has become a generic term to indicate the type of frame relay signaling used and could be used to mean Annex A or Annex D local loop In telephony the wire pair that connects a subscriber to a phone company end office typically con taining two wires Four wire local loops are common however especially with leased voice grade circuits loopback A diagnostic procedure where data is sent to the device being tested and the output of the device is fed directly back to its input looped around and the returning data is checked against that which was sent MAC Address Data link
71. Read security 5 Displays the name of the currently active dedicated map read only CREATE EDIT MAPS Write security 3 Read security 5 Creates new maps and defines settings as well as edits existing maps To add a new map position the cursor in the index column and press lt I gt ATLAS 890 automatically names the maps in the sequence in which they are created You can change the names with MAP NAME Displays the index number of the available maps MAP NAME Write security 3 Read security 5 Displays the name of the dedicated map The name can contain up to 57 alpha numeric charac ters including spaces and special characters To edit the name press Enter and type in the new name SORT TO FROM Write security 3 Read security 5 Specifies sort order based on the end points set in CONNECTS FROM CONFIG and CONNECTS To CONFIG You can also turn OFF this option The sort feature is helpful when you are attempting to find a particular connection in a large connection list CONNECTS Enters the dedicated map connections Press lt Enter gt to activate the submenus Some of the options available in this submenu change depending on the type of modules Win selected in the FROM or TO fields For more information on these submenus refer to the individual module discussions in this section ATLAS 890 System Manual 2001 ADTRAN Inc 61200321L1 1A ATLAS 890 Section 4 User Interface Guide
72. STATUS manually forcing a backup switch and restoring a primary connection Set global ATLAS 890 switch parameters or set individual parameters DIAL PLAN for each port in the ATLAS 890 that handles a switched call Security Levels To edit terminal menu items you must have a password and the appropriate security level Table 1 describes the six security levels Table 1 Password Security Level Security Level Description 5 Read only permission for all menu items minimum rights 4 Read permission for all menu items and permission to use test commands Access to all commands except passwords flash download authentication methods and interface configurations ATLAS 890 System Manual 2001 ADTRAN Inc 61200321L1 1A ATLAS 890 Section 4 User Interface Guide Page 9 of 234 Table 1 Password Security Level Continued Security Level Description 2 Access to all commands except passwords flash download and authentication methods 1 Access to all commands except passwords 0 Permission to edit every menu item including creating and editing passwords maximum rights 3 MENU DESCRIPTIONS The remainder of this section describes ATLAS 890 menu and submenu options To help you follow the terminal menu hierarchy the following notations are used gt MENUS SUBMENUS SUB SUBMENUS gt SYSTEM INFO The SYSTEM INFO menu provides basic infor
73. The connection is up and running 2001 ADTRAN Inc ATLAS 890 System Manual 61200321L1 1A ATLAS 890 Section 4 User Interface Guide Page 180 of 234 DELAY INACTIVE The connection is down due to configuration i e DTR is down DATA ALARM The FROM endpoint is in data alarm NETWORK ALARM The TO endpoint is in network alarm NET DATA ALARM Both the FROM endpoint and the TO endpoint are in alarm DATA UNKNOWN The status of the FROM endpoint is unknown When present this indicates that one ATLAS 890 has detected a change in state and is counting down to delay restoral TEST Write security 1 Read security 5 Contains a test activator and test status displays for dedicated dial backup circuits LAST RUN TIME Read security 5 Displays the date and time of the last test call made through this dedicated dial backup circuit Not seen until circuit 1s tested NEXT RUN TIME Read security 5 Displays the date and time of the next schedule test call to be made through this dedicated dial backup circuit Not seen unless TEST CALL is configured for something other than manual in the INTERFACE CONFIG for the CIRCUIT BACKUP ENDPOINT LAST TEST STATUS Read security 5 Displays the status of the last test call made through this dedicated dial backup circuit The fol lowing status messages may display IDLE No current test call on this dedicated dial backup circuit PASSED Passe
74. User Interface Guide Page 145 of 234 FLAGS Read Security 2 Indicates the properties of this routing table entry composed of the following letters H route is a host route G route is a gateway route DR route learned dynamically from RIP DO intra area route learned dynamically from OSPF DOa inter area route learned dynamically from OSPF DOe external route learned dynamically from OSPF l route learned from an ICMP redirect A route learned from IARP P route is private and is not advertised with RIP T route is to a triggered port updated only when table changes Hops Read Security 2 Displays the number of router hops required to get to the network or host Ranges from 0 to 16 If set to 16 the route is defined as infinite and cannot be used Cost Read security 2 For OSPF routing the cost value represents the current cost associated with getting data to the destination network Normally the cost is based on the available bandwidth TTL Read Security 2 Displays the number of seconds until the address is removed from table A value of 999 means the route is static INTERFACES Write Security 2 Read Security 2 The INTERFACES menu configures and monitors all interfaces connected to the ATLAS router These include the Ethernet and frame relay DLCIs connected in the PACKET MANAGER PACKET CNCTS NETWORK NAME Read Security 2 Displays the name of
75. WARNING Current T1 Severely Errored Framing Seconds Threshold Exceeded T1 Curr SES Thrs Exceeded WARNING Current T1 Severely Errored Seconds Threshold Exceeded T1 Curr UAS Thrs Exceeded WARNING Current T1 Unavailable Seconds Threshold Exceeded T1 Line Loopback Active WARNING Line Loopback Active ATLAS 890 System Manual 2001 ADTRAN Inc 61200321L1 1A ATLAS 890 Section 6 System Event Logging Page 9 of 16 Table 5 T1 Events Continued Console Log String Category Event T1 Loopback Cleared WARNING Loopback Cleared T1 Payload Loopback Active WARNING Payload Loopback Active T1 Total CSS Thrs Exceeded WARNING Total T1 Controlled Slip Seconds Threshold Exceeded T1 Total ES Thrs Exceeded WARNING Total T1 Errored Seconds Threshold Exceeded T1 Total LCV Thrs Exceeded WARNING Total T1 Line Code Violations Threshold Exceeded T1 Total LES Thrs Exceeded WARNING Total T1 Line Errored Seconds Threshold Exceeded T1 Total PCV Thrs Exceeded WARNING Total T1 Path Code Violations Threshold Exceeded T1 Total SEFS Thrs Exceeded WARNING Total T1 Severely Errored Framing Seconds Threshold Exceeded T1 Total SES Thrs Exceeded WARNING Total T1 Severely Errored Seconds Threshold Exceeded T1 Total UAS Thrs Exceeded WARNING Total T1 Unavailable Seconds Threshold Exceeded T1 Blue Alarm Cleared MAJOR
76. WVT 100 compatible terminal or computer with terminal emulation software e Appropriate cable to connect terminal to the ATLAS 890 shipped with unit 2001 ADTRAN Inc ATLAS 890 System Manual 61200321L1 1A ATLAS 890 Section 5 DLP 007 Page 2 of 2 DLP 007 Perform Steps Below in the Order Listed 1 Connect a VT 100 terminal to ATLAS 890 e Set the parameters of the VT 100 terminal to 9600 baud rate 8 data bits No parity 1stop bit No flow control Ifthe terminal has a parallel setting disable it and use serial port e Plug the RJ 45 male end of the data cable into the ATLAS 890 Make the connection to the VT 100 terminal as appropriate for your equipment 2 Connect a PC emulating a VT 100 terminal to ATLAS 890 Most personal computers or laptops can run communications software that will emulate a VT 100 terminal Windows programs such as Terminal or Hyperterminal are two such examples in the Windows format However there are many other adequate commercially available software pack ages which will allow your PC or laptop to emulate a VT 100 terminal Certain configuration items must be set on a PC or laptop to act as a VT 100 terminal for the ATLAS 890 e Set the parameters of the communications software to 9600 baud rate 8 data bits No parity 1 stop bit No flow control Set the PC for direct connect on the appropriate com port instead of dial up connect
77. a 14 15 16 17 18 19 21 23 24 25 20 DTR Data terminal ready from DTE 22 RI Ring indicator to DTE T3 Option Module P N 1200223L 1 Each T3 Option Module provides BNC connectors for transmit and receive connections define in Table 21 Using provided RG 59 75 ohm cables Table 21 T3 Module Connections NAME DESCRIPTION RX IN Receive data from the network 75 ohms 596 unbalanced TX OUT Transmit data to the network 75 ohms 5 unbalanced ATLAS 890 System Manual 2001 ADTRAN Inc 61200321L1 1A ATLAS 890 Section 2 Engineering Guidelines Page 19 of 22 T3 Drop and Insert Option Module P N 1200225L1 Each T3 Drop and Insert Option Module provides BNC connectors for both primary and secondary trans mit and receive connections as defined in Table 22 using provided RG 59 75 ohm cables Table 22 T3 Drop and Insert Module Connections NAME DESCRIPTION Primary RX IN Primary receive data from the network 75 ohms 5 unbalanced Primary TX OUT Primary transmit data to the network 75 ohms 5 unbalanced Secondary RX IN Secondary receive data from the network 75 ohms 5 unbalanced Secondary TX OUT Secondary transmit data to the network 75 ohms 5 unbalanced 2001 ADTRAN Inc ATLAS 890 System Manual 61200321L1 1A ATLAS 890 Section 2 Engineering Guidelines Page 20 of 22 6 AT A GLANCE SPECIFICATIONS Tab
78. a 19 inch or 23 inch rack mounting brackets included in shipment All other equipment option modules fit inside the base unit 2 POWER REQUIREMENTS AC System The ATLAS 890 has a maximum power consumption of 400W and a maximum current draw of 7A regard less of the configuration of option modules installed in the base unit DC System The ATLAS 890 has a maximum power consumption of 325W and a maximum current draw of 8 amps at 48VDC regardless of the configuration of option modules installed in the base unit 3 REVIEWING THE FRONT PANEL DESIGN The front panel contains the Alarm Cut off ACO switch the CRAFT port and the controller and option module status LEDs The LEDs provide visual information about the ATLAS 890 Base Unit and any option module that may be installed Figure 1 identifies the ACO switch the CRAFT port and the LEDs STATUS oe CRAFT B ee ONLINE gt Port ses TEST gt os e LINK ACO Switch OPTION MODULES L J Controller LEDs Option Module LEDs Figure 1 ATLAS 890 Front Panel Layout 2001 ADTRAN Inc ATLAS 890 System Manual 61200321L1 1A ATLAS 890 Section 2 Engineering Guidelines Page 4 of 22 ACO Switch The ACO switch deactivates clears the Alarm Relay located on the rear panel of the ATLAS 890 after an alarm condition has occurred If an alarm condition is corrected and then reoccurs the Alarm Relay will a
79. a swimming pool 2 Avoid using a telephone other than a cordless type during an electrical storm There is aremote risk of shock from lightning 3 Do not use the telephone to report a gas leak in the vicinity of the leak 4 Use only the power cord power supply and or batteries indicated in the manual Do not dispose of batteries in a fire They may explode Check with local codes for spe cial disposal instructions Save These Important Safety Instructions ATLAS 890 System Manual 2001 ADTRAN Inc Affidavit Requirements for Connection to Digital Services e An affidavit is required to be given to the telephone company whenever digital terminal equipment without encoded analog content and billing protection is used to transmit digital signals containing encoded analog content which are intended for eventual conversion into voiceband analog signals and transmitted on the network e The affidavit shall affirm that either no encoded analog content or billing information is being trans mitted or that the output of the device meets Part 68 encoded analog content or billing protection spec ifications e End user customer will be responsible for filing an affidavit with the local exchange carrier when con necting unprotected customer premise equipment CPE to 1 544 Mbps or subrate digital services e Until such time as subrate digital terminal equipment is registered for voice applications the affidavit requirement for subrate se
80. all calls beginning with 9 9 and then with STRIP MSD set to 1 all digits would be sent toward the network except the leading 9 te STRIP MSD does not affect CALL ACCEPT criteria All of the digits including the MSDs that are subsequently stripped are used as accept criterion NETWORK SPECIFIC FACILITY VOICE AND DATA Enables the sending of appropriate information to the PSTN The default for this option is NORMAL and in this case no Network Specific Facility Information Element is sent Unless one of the services listed below is subscribed to the selection should remain set to NORMAL The list below indicates services that may be subscribed to from the PSTN These ser vices require that specific information such as a Network Specific Facility Informa tion Element be sent to the network during call setup e AT amp T SDN e National ISDN INWATS e AT amp T Megacom 800 e Nortel Private Network e AT amp T Megacom e Nortel InWats e AT amp T Accunet e Nortel OutWats e AT amp T Long Distance e Nortel Foreign Exchange e AT amp T International 800 e Nortel Tie Trunk e AT amp T Dial It 900 Multiquest CALLED DIGITS TRANSFERRED Some PRI switches may be provisioned to send only a portion of the called number like DID This menu item allows the ATLAS 890 to know how many digits to ATLAS 890 System Manual 2001 ADTRAN Inc 61200321L1 1A ATLAS 890 Section 4 User Interface Guide Page 213 of 234 expec
81. allows you to configure the calling part number used to select this packet endpoint UsiNG DBU HANDSHAKE Selection based on a proprietary protocol This option is only available to packet endpoints with backup sublinks DBU HANDSHAKE is required to interoperate with ADTRAN IQ and Express family products It enables the association of incoming calls with packet endpoints in cases where there is a single call in num 2001 ADTRAN Inc ATLAS 890 System Manual 61200321L1 1A ATLAS 890 Section 4 User Interface Guide Page 228 of 234 ber hunt group and no Caller ID information available SUPPORT DBU HANDSHAKE This option is only available when the packet endpoint selected in the PORT PEP field has backup sublinks SUPPORT DBU HANDSHAKE enables disables the genera tion and acceptance of ADTRAN frame relay handshake upon connection If the end point is configured to route incoming calls based on the handshake information this option is automatically enabled If another call routing method is in effect however this option can be enabled to support the use of handshake information at the far end of the link DLCI TRANSLATION Controls contents of the ADTRAN frame relay handshake upon connection of a backup PVC Normally this field should be set to AUTO The FORCED mode is present for compatibility with older IQ units Min DSO s Set this to 1 for typical single call connections A value greater than 1 will restrict co
82. and Inspect the SYSTEM 0c e cece eee nn n n n n n nnn 2 Contents of ADTRAN Shipments 0 0000 cece hr 2 Grounding Instructions 200 e ee ee 3 Supplying Power to the Unit 0 cee eee 3 AC Powered SystemS 1 2 0 0 tent eee eee 3 DG Powered Systems cui pada wpa Pee id eae ex bene ie das Pea lee RUNE 4 Mounting Options fess e ele SLE let cited aca ee A a oe Mk Ee Les 4 Installing Network and Option Modules seesseseeeeee eee 5 Instructions for Installing the ATLAS 890 Controller and Option Modules 5 Quad T1 PRI Option Module P N 1200185L3 0 0 02 eee eee 6 Quad E1 PRA Option Module P N 1200264L1 0 000 cece eee 6 Quad Nx 56 64 Option Module P N 1200311L1 lille 6 Quad USSI Option Module System P N 4200261LX 0 0c ccna 7 Octal Basic Rate ISDN Option Module P N 1200186L2 2 00 0c eee eee 7 T3 Option Module P N 1200223L1 lisse 7 T3 Option Module with Drop and Insert Interface P N 1200225L1 issues 7 8 16 24 32 Channel Voice Compression Resource Modules P N 1200221LX 8 Nx 56 64 IMUX Resource Module P N 1200262L1 ee ee 8 HDLC Resource Module P N 1200222L1 0 0 0 0 ct eee 8 Modem 16 Resource Module P N 1200181L1 0 0 ee eee 8 Async 232 Option Module P N 1200182L1 0 00 eee 8 FIGURES Figure 1 ATLAS 890 Slot Designation Rear Panel
83. as a part of the number specification Any single digit Any single digit 2 through 9 X N Any number of digits of any value 9 This specific number 1 2 3 A single digit in this group Punctuation characters are ignored and a comma is interpreted as a 5 second pause in the dial string Example The ORIGINAL field contains and the SUBSTITUTED field contains 256 All calls routed out this connection will be delayed 5 seconds and contain a 256 prefix Wir Wildcards used in the SUBSTITUTED field are only valid when used in the same position relative to the end of the digit string as the ORIGINAL field USER TERM Write security 3 Read security 5 This menu allows you to define option parameters for ports which terminate a connection from user equipment In this case ATLAS 890 is acting as the network In applications where two ATLAS 890 units are used in a point to point configuration a port in the ATLAS 890 at one end would act as the network user termination while the Win ATLAS 890 at the opposite end would be terminating a network connection network ter mination SLOT SvC Write security 3 Read security 5 Selects the ATLAS 890 slot or service that terminates a user connection ATLAS 890 System Manual 2001 ADTRAN Inc 61200321L1 1A ATLAS 890 Section 4 User Interface Guide Page 187 of 234 PORT PEP Write security 3 Read security
84. at least one bit error CLR Write security 3 Read security 5 Clears error counters on test pattern results menu INJ Write security 3 Read security 5 Injects errors into transmitted test pattern ATLAS 890 System Manual 2001 ADTRAN Inc 61200321L1 1A ATLAS 890 Section 4 User Interface Guide Page 119 of 234 gt PACKET MANAGER The PACKET MANAGER submenus define and configure all layer 2 connections including frame relay endpoints see Figure 13 These submenus include PACKET ENDPNTS PACKET CNCTS CNCTS SORT and FRAME RELAY IQ Telnet Connection 172 22 12 50 Session Edit Options Capture Help FTE ite nfo Packet Endpnts ndptsi System Status Packet Cncts 1 connections System Config Cncts Sort From Pkt Endpt Sublink System Utility Frame Relay IQ Modules Packet Manager Router Dedicated Maps Circuit Status Dial Plan ALR A UNLN BL RII EE EE EIE ALRM i i SCB STBY 10 ALRM 11 ALRM 12 ALRM 13 ALRM 14 ALRM 15 M 16 RLRH Figure 13 Packet Manager Menu PACKET ENDPNTS Write security 3 Read security 5 Defines monitors and tests a packet endpoint Submenus include STATUS PERFORMANCE CONFIG TEST ENDPNT COUNT and ENDPNTS SORT STATUS Write security 3 Read security 5 Displays the status of each packet endpoint including the packet endpoint name the protocol type the signaling role the signaling type the signaling activ
85. be correct If less than ALL digits are sent then the PREFIX is defined as follows PREFIX Displays only if CALLED DIGITS TRANSFERRED is not set to ALL Enter the pre fix for the digits received Example If the number of digits is four and the number called is 963 8615 the telco s PRI switch sends only 8615 and the prefix is set to 963 This entire number is then used to determine which ATLAS 890 user port endpoint should receive the call OUTGOING CALLER ID Defines the number to use to provide Caller ID to the network for outgoing calls sent through this endpoint Choose from SEND AS PROVIDED SUBSTITUTE IF NOT PRESENT or SUBSTITUTE ALWAYS Won The Caller ID number must be specific i e no wildcards 2001 ADTRAN Inc ATLAS 890 System Manual 61200321L1 1A ATLAS 890 Section 4 User Interface Guide Page 204 of 234 SOURCE ID Simplifies the creation of a dial plan in applications where the criterion for switching calls to a certain endpoint is a function of which endpoint originated the call Default value 0 Zero is the default ID for all endpoints and all accept numbers With default values all calls are routed based only on the dialed number Multiple endpoints can have the same SOURCE ID When creating the CALL ACCEPT list specify a SOURCE ID s as well as a dialed number or range of dialed numbers to accept Example An application requires that all calls that originate from Port 1 of the
86. can copy depends on the cursor location when you press lt C gt If the cursor is over an editable field only that item is copied C If the cursor is over the index number of a list then all of the items in the row of the list are copied For example if the cursor is over the SLOT field in the MODULES screen all of the information associated with the slot is copied Paste the item stored in the clipboard if the information is compatible P You must confirm all pastes except those to a single editable field Increment the value of certain types of fields by one when you paste information into those fields Decrement the value of certain types of fields by one when you paste information into those fields Insert a new list item For example add a new item to the DEDICATED MAP connection list by pressing I I while the cursor is over the index number Delete a list item For example delete an item from the DEDICATED MAP connection list by pressing D D while the index number is active Getting Help The bottom line of the terminal menu window contains context sensitive help information When the cur sor is positioned over a set of configuration items a help message displays when available providing a description of the item When more detailed help is available for a particular item A displays at the bot tom of the window At this point if you press lt CTRL A gt a pop up help screen
87. clock present Displays the data rate at which each Nx port is currently operating A port s data rate is determined by the number of DSOs assigned to it and the rate per DSO associated with the active maps INBAND STATS Read security 5 Provides information on the following inband channel statistics PORT Operating port number Rx FRAMES The number of frames received on the operating port since system startup TX FRAMES The number of frames transmitted from the operating port since system startup Rx BYTES The number of bytes received from the operating port since system startup TX BYTES The number of bytes transmitted to the operating port since system startup RESET STATS Clears inband statistic results PLL FIFO Read security 5 Displays the Phase Lock PORT Loop PLL and FIFO status Indicates the operating port PLL FIFO Displays the state of the PLL and FIFO systems LOCK PLL is locked This is required to transfer data RXE Receive data FIFO empty 2001 ADTRAN Inc ATLAS 890 System Manual 61200321L1 1A ATLAS 890 Section 4 User Interface Guide Page 54 of 234 RXF Receive data FIFO full TXE Transmit data FIFO empty TXF Transmit data FIFO full CONFIGURATION Write security 3 Read security 5 All of the following configurable parameters apply to the individual V 35 ports PRT Read security 5 Displays the port number NAME
88. connected to a Primary Rate ISDN circuit or a channelized T1 circuit PRT Read security 5 Displays the T1 number PORT NAME Write security 3 Read security 5 Accepts any alpha numeric name up to 16 characters long to uniquely identify each T1 in the T3 circuit FRAME Write security 2 Read security 5 This field must be set to match the frame format of the circuit to which it is connected avail able from the network supplier Choose either D4 or ESF CODE Write security 2 Read security 5 Set this field to match the line code of the circuit to which it is connected this information is available from the network supplier Choose either AMI or B8ZS ATLAS 890 System Manual 2001 ADTRAN Inc 61200321L1 1A ATLAS 890 Section 4 User Interface Guide Page 117 of 234 TX YEL Write security 3 Read security 5 Controls the transmitting of yellow alarms Choose either ON or OFF Tx PRM Write security 3 Read security 5 Controls the sending of performance report messaging PRM data on the facility data link FDL The PRM data continues to be collected even if XMIT PRM is turned off possible only with ESF format Choose either ON or OFF LB ACCEPT Write security 3 Read security 5 Sets unit to accept or reject the in band loop up and loop down codes as defined in ANSI T1 403 This is a line loopback Choose either ACCEPT or IGNORE DS1 TEST Write securi
89. containing a complete listing of menus INFO Read security 5 Provides information about the module part number serial number and assembly revision PART NUMBER Read security 5 Displays the part number of the module SERIAL NUMBER Read security 5 Displays the serial number of the module BOARD REVISION Read security 5 Displays the board revision of the installed module 2001 ADTRAN Inc ATLAS 890 System Manual 61200321L1 1A ATLAS 890 Section 4 User Interface Guide Page 100 of 234 DS1 FRAMER REV Read security 5 Displays the revision of the DS1 framer on the installed module M13 REV Read security 5 Displays the revision of the M13 mux on the installed module DS3 ALARM STATUS Read security 5 Indicates the current alarm status of the T3 interface PRT Read security 5 Indicates the port number ALARMS Read security 5 Displays the alarm status for the T3 circuit An asterisk indicates the presence of an alarm and a dash indicates no alarm The following alarms are monitored LOS Loss of Signal There is no T3 signal detected on the port interface RED Loss of Frame or Red Alarm Received T3 cannot be frame synchronized A Red Alarm is indicated when the T3 has been out of frame for 2 5 seconds BLUE Alarm Indication Signal or Blue Alarm Receiving alarm indication signal in the T3 payload from f
90. cost savings of not requiring an external router To view the menu options for the Router see Figure 14 All routing functions within the ATLAS are configured and monitored from the ROUTER menu z ALR s z z i TIBI s SCB STBY 10 ALRM 11 ALRM 12 ALRM 13 ALRM 14 ALRM 15 ALRM 16 ALRM Telnet Connection 172 22 12 50 E ni xj Session Edit Options Capture Help AS 83U Router IP IP tatic Routes ARP Cache Routes Interfaces Global Ping Telnet Client Statistics UDP Rela Disable OSPF Global HDLC Tunnel Disabled p PS OK he Figure 14 Router Menu IP Selected STATIC ROUTES Write Security 2 Read Security 2 The STATIC ROUTES menu manages static IP routes You can create modify and delete routes using this menu IP ADDRESS Write Security 2 Read Security 2 Defines the IP address of the host or network device being routed to NETMASK Write Security 2 Read Security 2 Determines the number of bits used in the above defined IP address for routing If a host address is desired for the IP address this field must be set to 255 255 255 255 GATEWAY Write Security 2 Read Security 2 Defines the IP address of the router to receive the forwarded IP packet ATLAS 890 System Manual 2001 ADTRAN Inc 61200321L1 1A ATLAS 890 Section 4 User Interface Guide Page 143 of 234 INTERFA
91. default ID for all endpoints and all accept numbers With default values all calls are routed based only on the dialed number Multiple endpoints can have the same SOURCE ID When creating the CALL ACCEPT list specify a SOURCE ID s as well as a dialed number or range of dialed numbers to accept Example An application requires that all calls that originate from Port 1 of the ATLAS 890 in Slot 1 be switched to Port 2 of that same module Assign a unique Source ID e g 7 to Port 1 of the module and then configure Port 2 to only accept calls from that unique Source ID 7 Busy OUT Number of milliseconds that passes before this Async 232 endpoint is set to perma nently busy and will no longer be available for use IDLE TIME Number of seconds that passes before this Async 232 endpoint is set to idle status gt DIAL PLAN PKT ENDPT CONNECTIONS USER TERM This menu allows the user to define option parameters for ports configured as packet endpoints IFCE CONFIG Write security 3 Read security 5 Specifies the configuration parameters for the endpoint OUTDIAL NUMBER Defines the number dialed to originate a call OUTGOING CALL TYPE Selects the terminating resource type either DIGITAL 64K or DIGITAL 56K ATLAS 890 System Manual 2001 ADTRAN Inc 61200321L1 1A ATLAS 890 Section 4 User Interface Guide Page 227 of 234 REDIAL TIMER Selects the time delay in seconds between redial attempts R
92. digits including the MSDs that are subsequently stripped are used as accept criterion Source ID Simplifies the creation of a dial plan in applications where the criterion for switching calls to a certain endpoint is a function of which endpoint originated the call Default value 0 Zero is the default ID for all endpoints and all accept numbers ATLAS 890 System Manual 2001 ADTRAN Inc 61200321L1 1A ATLAS 890 Section 4 User Interface Guide Page 225 of 234 With default values all calls are routed based only on the dialed number Multiple endpoints can have the same SOURCE ID When creating the CALL ACCEPT list specify a SOURCE ID s as well as a dialed number or range of dialed numbers to accept Example An application requires that all calls that originate from Port 1 of the ATLAS 890 in Slot 1 be switched to Port 2 of that same module Assign a unique Source ID e g 7 to Port 1 of the module and then configure Port 2 to only accept calls from that unique Source ID 7 Swap ANI DNIS Swaps the ANI and DNIS numbers received from the network ANI Automatic Num ber Identification is the billing number of the calling party and DNIS Dialed Num ber Identification Service is the called party number OUTGOING CALLER ID Defines the number for the ATLAS 890 to use to provide Caller ID to the Network for outgoing calls sent through this endpoint Choose from SEND AS PROVIDED SUBSTI TUTE IF NOT PRESENT
93. disables Get Request capabilities for remote units When enabled this feature allows SNMP requests to be sent from the Network Management Station through the ATLAS 890 to the selected remote unit Remote units must be ADTRAN TSU 100 Series or ISU 512 products 2001 ADTRAN Inc ATLAS 890 System Manual 61200321L1 1A ATLAS 890 Section 4 User Interface Guide Page 24 of 234 SNMP ASP PoLLING Write security 0 Read security 0 Enables or disables trap polling through the ATLAS 890 to remote ADTRAN TSU 100 Series or ISU 512 units When enabled this feature allows the ATLAS 890 to forward any traps received from remote units to the Network Management Station The remote unit must be listed in the ASP Endpoint Communities for the traps to be forwarded EVENT LoGGING Write security 3 Read security 5 Sets the system event severity level threshold for each of the ATLAS 890 system event types When ever a system event occurs that event is logged if the event s severity level is equal to or more severe than the event type s current threshold setting See Section 7 System Event Logging for detailed infor mation on the system events SYSLOG SETUP Write security 3 Read security 3 Configures the ATLAS 890 Syslog client for use with a Syslog server supplied with ADTRAN Utili ties or available on most UNIX platforms TRANSMISSION Write security 3 Read security 3 Enables or d
94. feature SIGNALING METHOD Selects the type of signaling that the remote port is configured to expect Available options include the following E amp M IMMEDIATE E amp M WINK and LOOP START 2001 ADTRAN Inc ATLAS 890 System Manual 61200321L1 1A ATLAS 890 Section 4 User Interface Guide Page 234 of 234 DIRECT INWARD DIALING Defines whether or not Direct Inward Dialing DID is used by the remote equipment If DID is enabled then the following options must be configured CALLER ID Defines the number ATLAS uses to provide Caller ID to the network for outgoing calls sent through this endpoint Setting this menu item is optional SOURCE ID Defines the Source ID Setting this menu item is optional DID DIGITS TRANSFERRED Defines the number of digits ATLAS 890 send to the user equipment This field only displays if DIRECT INWARD DIALING is enabled CALLER ID NUMBER Defines the number ATLAS uses to provide Caller ID to the network for outgoing calls sent through this endpoint This field only displays if DIRECT INWARD DIALING is set to DISABLED and USER TERM is selected Setting this menu item is optional STRIP MSD Strips a selected quantity choose from NONE 1 2 and 3 of the most significant dig its MSD of a dialed number prior to being forwarded out of the port Example A network port could be set to accept all calls beginning with 9 9 and then with STRIP MSD set to 1 all digits would be sent towa
95. following options are available NONE No remote loopbacks are activated DS3 LINE T3line loopback active DS1 1 Remote individual T1 line loopback is activated DS1 28 DS1 ALL Remote TI line loopbacks for all 28 T1s is activated REMOTE STATUS Write security 3 Read security 5 This field indicates the progress of remote loopbacks The following options will display LINE LOOPBACK ACTIVE Remote line loopback is active No LooPs ACTIVE Remote line loopbacks are inactive DS1 ALARM STATUS Write security 3 Read security 5 Indicates T1 alarm status PRT Read security 5 Indicates the number of the T1 circuit 1 28 ALARMS Read security 5 Displays the alarm status for each of the 28 T1 circuits An asterisk indicates the presence 2001 ADTRAN Inc ATLAS 890 System Manual 61200321L1 1A ATLAS 890 Section 4 User Interface Guide Page 104 of 234 of an alarm and a dash indicates no alarm The following alarms are monitored RED Loss of Frame or Red Alarm Received T1 cannot be frame synchronized A Red Alarm is indicated when the T1 has been out of frame for 2 5 seconds YELLOW Remote Alarm Indication or Yellow Alarm Receiving RAI signal from far end equip ment indicating that the far end equipment is in red alarm BLUE Alarm Indication Signal or Blue Alarm Receiving alarm indication signal in the T1 payload from far end equipment indicating a problem upstream D CHAN
96. for the peer s acknowledgement CLOSED The packet endpoint has received the peer s acknowledgement to the sent termi nate request this is followed by the initial state STOPPING The packet endpoint has received a terminate request from the peer STOPPED The packet endpoint has acknowledged the peer s terminate request NOT CONNECTED The packet endpoint is not connected to the router in the PACKET CNCTS menu 2001 ADTRAN Inc ATLAS 890 System Manual 61200321L1 1A ATLAS 890 Section 4 User Interface Guide Page 122 of 234 CURRENT PORT Read security 5 Displays the connections for the packet endpoint The letter U in this field indicates that this packet endpoint is used in the PACKET CNCTS map The remainder of the field indicates the physical port this packet endpoint is connected to in the DEDICATED MAP If the port is a channelized interface such as a T1 the DSO assign ment is also provided PERFORMANCE Write security 3 Read security 5 Displays performance information for each packet endpoint including the endpoint name the protocol used link stats and sublink stats ENDPNT NAME Write security 3 Read security 5 Displays the packet endpoint name as defined in the PACKET ENDPNTS CONFIG menu see also Config ENDPNT NAME on page 125 PROT Read security 5 Displays the layer 2 protocol for this packet endpoint FR indicates this packet end point is configured for frame relay T
97. from the far end equipment ATLAS 890 System Manual 2001 ADTRAN Inc 61200321L1 1A ATLAS 890 Section 4 User Interface Guide Page 111 of 234 C BIT Read security 5 Indicates whether C Bit framing is being used on the T3 circuit An asterisk indicates the presence of C Bit framing and a dash indicates no C Bit framing present DS3 PERF CURRENT Write security 3 Read security 5 The performance fields either current 15 minute total or 24 hour total provide status on key per formance measures as specified in ANSI T1 231 1993 for DS3 interfaces PRT Displays the port number CLR Clears performance information for the selected port Es L Errored Seconds Line Count of seconds containing excessive zeros LOS or BPVs not due to line code substitutions SES L Severely Errored Seconds Line Count of seconds containing excessive zeros LOS or BPVs not due to line code substitutions above a predetermined threshold LoSS L Loss of Signal Second Line Count of seconds of LOS condition CV P Code Violation Path For the M13 applications an accumulation of P bit parity errors For the C bit parity application an accumulation of CP bit parity errors ES P Errored Second Path An accumulation of seconds during which any one of the following conditions exist parity errors severely errored frame or AIS signal received SAS P SEF AIS Second An accumulation of seconds during whi
98. gt 0 TO AUTOANSWER The ATSO gt 0 TO AUTOANSWER field allows you to define the value for the auto answer ATSO command The default value is 1 A value of 1 enables auto answer A value of 0 disables auto answer ATS2 ESCAPE CODE CHARACTER The ATS2 ESCAPE CODE CHARACTER field allows you to enter the character to be used for an escape sequence The default value is 43 ATS12 ESCAPE GUARD TIME The ATS12 ESCAPE GUARD TIME field allows you to set the escape time in 0 2 second increments to escape to command mode The default value is 50 which equals one second DATA COMPRESSION Write security 3 Read security 5 Error correction must be enabled to use data compression data compression is auto matically disabled if error correction is disabled The following data compression options are available 2001 ADTRAN Inc ATLAS 890 System Manual 61200321L1 1A ATLAS 890 Section 4 User Interface Guide Page 86 of 234 DISABLED Both MNP5 and V 42bis data compression methods are disabled MNP5 MNPS5 data compression is enabled V 42BIS V 42bis data compression is enabled V 42BIS AND MNP5 Both MNP5 and V 42 bis data compression are enabled This is the default set ting TEST Write security 4 Read security 5 These options initiate different types of tests and display test results PORT Read security 5 Displays the port number DTE LOCAL LOOPBACK Write security 4 Read security 5
99. have been trained to perform these functions by successfully having completed one of the following check appropriate blocks A A training course provided by the manufacturer grantee of the equipment used to encode analog signals or B A training course provided by the customer or authorized representative using training materials and instructions provided by the manufacturer grantee of the equipment used to encode analog signals or C An independent training course e g trade school or technical institution recognized by the manufacturer grantee of the equipment used to encode analog signals or D In lieu of the preceding training requirements the operator s maintainer s is are under the control of a supervisor trained in accordance with circle one above ATLAS 890 System Manual 2001 ADTRAN Inc I agree to provide telco s name with proper documentation to demonstrate compliance with the information as provided in the preceding paragraph if so requested Signature Title Date Transcribed and sworn to before me This day of Notary Public My commission expires 2001 ADTRAN Inc ATLAS 890 System Manual FCC regulations require that the following information be provided in this manual 1 This equipment complies with Part 68 of FCC rules On the back of the equipment housing is a label showing the FCC registration number and ringer equivalence number REN
100. if no network module is installed Status Indicates the operational condition of the controller installed in the controller slot Online Indicates whether the module is available for use or is currently in use Test Indicates that the module is in test Link Indicates there is an active 10 100 Ethernet connection on the installed controller module OPTION MODULE LEDS Displays by row the operational condition of each module installed in the option slots See Table 3 All LEDs will be off if no option module is installed Status Indicates the operational condition of modules installed in the option slots Online Indicates whether the module is available for use or is currently in use If the module is manually taken offline this LED is turned off Test Indicates that one or more ports within a module are in test ACO SWITCH Clears the Alarm Relay connection located on the rear panel of the ATLAS 890 CRAFT PORT Allows the ATLAS 890 to connect to a computer or modem using the CRAFT port an EIA 232 port Table 3 ATLAS 890 LEDs FOR THESE LEDS THIS COLOR INDICATES THAT LIGHT FANS Red solid Fan speed is too low or fan is disconnected Amber solid Fan speed is too high Green solid All fans are functioning properly ALARM Red solid A fan external input or power supply error has occurred LED will remain red until the ACO button is pressed
101. not secure No passwords are required for client access Anyone can access W ANNE files through the IP port on the server machine if they know the target filename Follow up Procedures Once this procedure is complete return to the procedure which referred you to this DLP and continue with the tasks indicated there 2001 ADTRAN Inc ATLAS 890 System Manual 61200321L1 1A ATLAS 890 Section 5 DLP 011 Page 4 of 4 ATLAS 890 System Manual 2001 ADTRAN Inc 61200321L1 1A ATLAS 890 Section 5 DLP 012 Page 1 of 4 LOADING THE CURRENT CONFIGURATION OF AN ATLAS 890 USING TFTP Introduction The ATLAS 890 supports configuration uploads from a unit via the 10 100 BASET Ethernet port to a TFTP server located on the network This DLP provides the steps to follow for a successful configuration upload using the 10 100 BASET Ethernet port and a TFTP Server Tools and Materials Required e A PC with a Telnet client software e A TFTP Server accessible on the local network A TFTP server is provided with the unit as part of the ADTRAN Utilities software To prevent electrical shock do not install equipment in a wet location or during a N ARNING lightning storm Electronic modules can be damaged by static electrical discharge Before handling modules wear an antistatic discharge wrist strap to prevent damage to electronic di components Place modules in antistatic packing material when transporting or storing
102. not supported by the current system configuration REV Read security 5 Displays the hardware revision of the ATLAS 890 and other installed modules gt MODULES MENU QUAD T1 PRI OPTION MODULE This section provides detailed information on the MODULES menu and submenus for the Quad T1 PRI Option Module The ATLAS 890 system controller automatically detects the presence of the Quad T1 PRI Option Module when it is installed in the system listed as T1 PRI To see the menus for the Quad T1 PRI Option Module via the terminal menu use the arrow keys to scroll to the MODULES menu and press lt Enter gt to access the module choices Refer to the Quad TI PRI Option Module Quick Start Guide P N 61200185L3 13A for a menu tree containing a complete listing of menus 2001 ADTRAN Inc ATLAS 890 System Manual 61200321L1 1A ATLAS 890 Section 4 User Interface Guide Page 40 of 234 INFO Read security 5 Displays general information about the Quad T1 PRI Option Module as follows PART NUMBER Read security 5 Displays the part number of the Quad T1 PRI Option Module SERIAL NUMBER Read security 5 Displays the module s serial number BOARD REVISION Read security 5 Displays the board revision of the module PLL STATUS Read security 5 Indicates whether the module phase lock loop is locked to its specific source ALARM STATUS Read security 5 Displays the current T1 alarm status
103. option For detailed information on submenus for a particular module type please refer to the dial plan interface configuration menu discussion for the appropriate network option or resource module Some of the options available in this submenu change depending on the type of modules Win selected in the SLT SVC or PRT PEP fields For more information on these submenus refer to the individual module interface configuration discussions in this section SUBST TEMPL The substitution template allows the ATLAS 890 to select calls based on telephone number and substitute a user defined number for the received digits after the call has been processed by the switchboard Substitution templates are created for each entry in the Dial Plan ORIGINAL Designates the number s to be the search criteria for the substitution template The pattern can be a specific number or wildcards can be used as part of the number spec ification X Any single digit N Any single digit 2 through 9 Any number of digits of any value 9 This specific number 1 2 3 A single digit in this group Example 963 812 012 would be 963 8120 to 963 8122 2001 ADTRAN Inc ATLAS 890 System Manual 61200321L1 1A ATLAS 890 Section 4 User Interface Guide Page 186 of 234 SUBSTITUTED Designates the number to be substituted for the number s defined in the ORIGINAL field The pattern can be a specific number or wildcards can be used
104. out Telnet access If you enter zero in this field you will not be able to use Telnet Only enter zero if you want diti ETHERNET PORT Write security 2 Read security 5 Provides a way to configure various settings for the Ethernet port The following options are available for review and editing PORT NAME Defines the name of the Ethernet port You can leave this field blank IP ADDRESS Lists the address assigned to the base Ethernet port This address is composed of four decimal numbers each in the range of 0 to 255 separated by periods This value is set to 0 0 0 0 by default The IP address is used for the 10 100BaseT Ethernet interface Obtain the correct IP address from your LAN administrator DEFAULT GATEWAY Defines or changes the default gateway Enter the default gateway address by entering a decimal number into the appropriate field and then pressing Enter to move to the next field You will need a default gateway if the LAN contains multiple segments This address is composed of four decimal numbers each in the range of 0 to 255 separated by periods This value is set to 0 0 0 0 by default Contact your LAN administrator for the appropriate address ATLAS 890 System Manual 2001 ADTRAN Inc 61200321L1 1A ATLAS 890 Section 4 User Interface Guide Page 19 of 234 SUBNET MASK MAC ADDRESS ETHERNET SPEED ADMIN PORT Defines which part of a destination
105. provider Backup D CHANNEL Disables or enables backup D channel on the interface Win Only one backup D channel can be configured per NFAS interface group SWITCH TYPE Defines the type of PRI switch to which the port is connected If connected to another ATLAS 890 both need to be set to the same switch type The following options are available Lucent 5E Northern DMS 100 National ISDN AT amp T 4ESS First DSO Defines the first DSO for this endpoint The ATLAS 890 uses DSOs starting with this selection to send and receive calls to and from the network The outgoing calls which are allowed or restricted over these DSOs are set by OUTHACCEPT see page 182 and OUT REJECT see page 184 NUMBER OF DSOS Specifies the number of DSOs ATLAS 890 uses for this endpoint OUTGOING NUMBER CONVERSION Converts outgoing towards the network numbers to the selected numbering plan and type option AS DIALED Sends the digits provided as an unknown number type 2001 ADTRAN Inc ATLAS 890 System Manual 61200321L1 1A ATLAS 890 Section 4 User Interface Guide Page 202 of 234 ISDN NATIONAL PREFERRED Regardless of what type of number is received the outgoing number is substituted with ISDN National as the number plan and type Ten digits are always sent to the network Leading ones if present are stripped out and the area code provisioned under DIAL PLAN GLOBAL PARAMETERS is added if only seven digits are su
106. remote unit s RTS signal Note that this feature requires the Inband control chan nel to be ENABLED DSR Write security 3 Read security 5 Determines the behavior of the Data Set Ready DSR signal If set to NORMAL DSR will generally be asserted when the interface is capable of passing data If set to FORCED ON DSR will always be asserted If set to REMOTE DTR the value of DSR will track the value of the remote unit s DTR signal This remote feature requires the Inband control channel to be Enabled DTR Write security 3 Read security 5 Determines whether the ATLAS 890 treats a connection as permanent IGNORE or connects only when Data Terminal Ready DTR is active CONNECT ON DTR Select either IGNORE or CONNECT ON DTR 0 INH Write security 3 Read security 5 When the port detects an uninterrupted string of Os being transmitted for more than one sec ond setting this parameter to ON will cause the ATLAS 890 to send 1s toward the network INBAND Write security 3 Read security 5 Creates an inband management channel by robbing 8 kbps bandwidth from the port s allocated bandwidth This channel can be used for management for ADTRAN products that are not 2001 ADTRAN Inc ATLAS 890 System Manual 61200321L1 1A ATLAS 890 Section 4 User Interface Guide Page 62 of 234 DIAL co located with the ATLAS Consult the manual for ADTRAN T1 equipment for details on using this feature SEND LEAD
107. security 5 Activates the reset of all accumulated availability statistics for the selected resource CONFIG Write security 3 Read security 5 Configures the statistics displayed under data tables DisPLAY FORMAT Read security 5 Sets the display format for all RESOURCE USAGE statistics to either raw data or percentages RESET MODE Write security 3 Read security 5 Sets the reset mode for the RESOURCE USAGE statistics to one of the following DAILY performs reset daily at 12 00 AM WEEKLY performs reset on Saturday night 12 00 AM MANUAL disables automatic reset of the resource usage statistics TRUNK USAGE Write security 5 Read security 5 Indicates trunk use NET TERM PRI NET TERM RBS USER TERM PRI USER TERM RBS DATA TABLES Read security 5 Display for collected resource usage data TRUNK TYPE Displays types of trunks in the system CURRENT Shows the number of resources available not in use and the total number of resources If a resource is taken offline it is not included in the total AVERAGE Shows the average number of resources available since the statistics were last reset MIN Shows the fewest number of resources available since the last reset 0 ZERO AVAIL Provides a count of the number of times the quantity of available resources reached 0 2001 ADTRAN Inc ATLAS 890 System Manual 61200321L1 1A ATLAS 890 Section 4 User Interface Guide Page 16 of 234
108. session 1 SEC Wait approximately 1 second between the call dialing of a BONDING session 2 SEC Wait approximately 2 seconds between the call dialing of a BONDING session ALARM RELAY RESET Write security 3 Read security 5 Clears the Alarm Relay located on the rear panel of the ATLAS 890 Activating the software Alarm Relay Reset functions the same as manually pressing the ACO Switch located on the ATLAS 890 front panel ALARM RELAY THRESHOLD Write security 3 Read security 5 Defines which threshold sets the Alarm Relay These thresholds include CRITICAL MAJOR MINOR WARNING and NORMAL If an alarm occurs that is greater than or equal to the threshold selected the Alarm Relay will set For example if the threshold is set for MAJOR then ALL Major alarms and ALL critical alarms will set the Alarm Relay There is one exception setting the threshold to NORMAL will not set the Alarm Relay for Normal events No Normal events set the Alarm Relay EXTERNAL INPUT THRESHOLD Write security 3 Read security 5 Defines the alarm level and text for external switch contacts If the external switch contact is closed the alarm is thrown and the event text is sent to the event log ATLAS 890 System Manual 2001 ADTRAN Inc 61200321L1 1A ATLAS 890 Section 4 User Interface Guide Page 27 of 234 NAME Read security 5 Displays the name External Input to identify the entry for the external input alarm DE
109. software consult your documentation for the information on how to do this For TFTP updates you can cancel the process by selecting CANCEL UPDATE from this field 2001 ADTRAN Inc ATLAS 890 System Manual 61200321L1 1A ATLAS 890 Section 4 User Interface Guide Page 30 of 234 UPDATE STATUS Read security 5 Displays the status of the current firmware update These fields are identical to those defined above in CURRENT UPDATE STATUS CONFIG TRANSFER Write security 3 Read security 5 Used only with TFTP transfers Sends a file containing the ATLAS 890 configuration to a file on a TFTP server using the TFTP protocol through the 10 100BaseT Ethernet port CONFIG TRANSFER also lets you save the ATLAS 890 configuration as a backup file so you can use the same configura tion with multiple ATLAS 890 units In addition CONFIG TRANSFER can retrieve a configuration file from a TFTP server To support these transfers ADTRAN delivers a TFTP program with ATLAS 890 called TFTP Server You can configure any PC running Microsoft Windows with this software and store a configuration file Only one configuration transfer session upload or download can be active at a time The TCP IP parameters are not saved or overwritten as part of an ATLAS 890 unit s transferred configuration therefore identical configurations can be sent to multiple units For complete details on configuration transfers to from the ATLAS 890 please ref
110. the Autonomous System with a 32 bit integer Although this 32 bit integer appears in the form of an IP address it is not an IP address For example an Area ID of 0 0 0 0 identifies the OSPF backbone RANGES Describes those Address Range Summaries that are configured to propagate from an area to reduce the amount of information about it which is known beyond its borders Up to 10 ranges per area may be defined STATUS Displays subnets subsumed by ranges that either trigger the advertisement of the indicated summary or result in the subnet not being advertised at all outside the area ADVERTISE Advertises the summary or result DON T ADVERTISE Does not advertise the summary or result DISABLED Removes the range completely ATLAS 890 System Manual 2001 ADTRAN Inc 61200321L1 1A ATLAS 890 Section 4 User Interface Guide Page 161 of 234 NETWORK Identifies the IP Address of the Net or Subnet indicated by the range SUBNET MASK Identifies the Netmask that pertains to the Net or Subnet STUB Defines stub areas to conserve router memory Autonomous Systems external Link State Advertisements LSAs are not flooded into a stub area The only way out of a stub area is through the Area Border Router ABR See External LSA Overflow on page 164 for a definition of LSA Win Backbone areas areas with ID 0 0 0 0 cannot be defined as a stub ACTIVE Defines the area as a stub when set to ON NSSA A Not So St
111. the previous 24 hour window Refer to DSI Perf Current on page 105 for a detailed description DS1 CONFIGURATION Write security 3 Read security 5 All of the following configurable parameters apply to whether the port is connected to a Primary Rate ISDN circuit or a channelized T1 circuit PRT Read security 5 Displays the T1 number PoRT NAME Write security 3 Read security 5 Accepts any alpha numeric name up to 16 characters long to uniquely identify each T1 in the T3 circuit FRAME Write security 2 Read security 5 This field must be set to match the frame format of the circuit to which it is connected avail able from the network supplier Choose either D4 or ESF CODE Write security 2 Read security 5 Set this field to match the line code of the circuit to which it is connected this information is available from the network supplier Choose either AMI or B8ZS TX YEL Write security 3 Read security 5 Controls the transmitting of yellow alarms Choose either ON or OFF ATLAS 890 System Manual 2001 ADTRAN Inc 61200321L1 1A ATLAS 890 Section 4 User Interface Guide Page 107 of 234 TX PRM Write security 3 Read security 5 Controls the sending of performance report messaging PRM data on the facility data link FDL The PRM data continues to be collected even if XMIT PRM is turned off possible only with ESF format Choose either ON or OFF
112. to indicate progress The following table describes these messages Message Meaning Contacting Indicates communication with the TFTP network server is trying to be Server established with the specified server address in the TFTP SERVER IP ADDRESS field Beginning Indicates communication with the TFTP network server has been TFTP Transfer established and the update file is being transferred between the ATLAS 890 and the TFTP network server Completed Indicates the ATLAS 890 successfully received the update file Error Indicates the TFTP network server was unable to locate the specified file File Not Found name or path in the TFTP SERVER FILENAME field Error Indicates the TFTP network server denied the ATLAS 890 access to the Access Violation given update filename and path Please verify appropriate user rights are selected for the specified path 11 When the update process has successfully completed IDLE displays in the CURRENT UPDATE STATUS field and MODULE UPDATE COMPLETE displays in the PREVIOUS UPDATE STATUS field The ATLAS 890 will either restart immediately and resume operation or will restart at the speci fied time and day of the week depending on your selection Follow up Procedures Once this procedure is complete return to the procedure which referred you to this DLP and continue with the tasks indicated there 2001 ADTRAN Inc ATLAS 890 System Manual 61200321L1 1A AT
113. which this endpoint accepts calls This field simpli fies the creation of a dial plan in applications where the criterion for switching calls to a certain endpoint is a function of which endpoint originated the call SRC ID may be entered with the usual wild card entries except X Any digit 0 through 9 1 3 5 Any of these digits ATLAS 890 System Manual 2001 ADTRAN Inc 61200321L1 1A ATLAS 890 Section 4 User Interface Guide Page 183 of 234 0 Default value The default ID for all source endpoints all accept numbers is 0 This results in all calls being routed based on the dialed number ACCEPT NUMBER Write security 3 Read security 5 Designates which numbers this endpoint passes on toward the network The accept list may consist of multiple entries The numbers are defined using the following wild cards X Any single digit N Any single digit 2 through 9 Any number of digits of any value 9 This specific number 1 2 3 A single digit in this group Example 1 800 only permits toll free long distance calls to 1 800 If this were used then a second accept number would need to be specified NXX XXXX permitting local numbers to be dialed Any specific entry takes precedence over a wild card For example if endpoint A was Win designated as while endpoint B accepted 963 800X then an incoming call to 963 800X would only be accepted by endpoint B SEARCH Instructs ATLAS 890
114. with STRIP MSD set to 1 all digits would be sent toward the network except the leading 9 that are subsequently stripped are used as accept criterion e STRIP MSD does not affect CALL ACCEPT criteria All of the digits including the MSDs 2001 ADTRAN Inc ATLAS 890 System Manual 61200321L1 1A ATLAS 890 Section 4 User Interface Guide Page 200 of 234 Source ID Simplifies the creation of a DIAL PLAN in applications where the criterion for switch ing calls to a certain endpoint is a function of which endpoint originated the call Default value 0 Zero is the default ID for all endpoints and all accept numbers With default values all calls are routed based only on the dialed number Multiple endpoints can have the same SOURCE ID When creating the CALL ACCEPT list specify a SOURCE ID s as well as a dialed number or range of dialed numbers to accept Example An application requires that all calls that originate from Port 1 of the ATLAS 890 in Slot 1 be switched to Port 2 of that same module Assign a unique Source ID e g 7 to Port 1 of the module and then configure Port 2 to only accept calls from that unique Source ID 7 DSO ALIGNMENT DSO Alignment is typically enabled when a user needs the ability to maintain align ment between T1s as if they were in dedicated map mode This scenario requires DSO ALIGNMENT enabled on both interfaces usually on User Term and on Net Term An interface that has D
115. without powering down the main unit IAD Integrated Access Device A network access device that provides many services from a single plat form The ATLAS is an IAD IARP Inverse Address Resolution Protocol Used for resolving the protocol address when the hardware address is known ICMP Internet Control Message Protocol Specified in RFC 292 to provide diagnostic functions Integrated Access System A chassis based product that supports a number of end user applications on the subscriber side and a number of carrier interfaces on the trunk side The ATLAS is an Integrated Access System designed to provide significant wide area cost savings through the consolidation of voice data fax and video IP Internet Protocol A protocol which provides for transmitting blocks of data between hosts identified by fixed length addresses ISDN Integrated Services Digital Network A network architecture that enables end to end digital connec tions The network supports diverse services through integrated access arrangements and defines a limited set of standard multipurpose interfaces for equipment vendors network providers and cus tomers Interworking with a public switched telephone network is retained ITU T Q 933 A Annex A See Annex A IXC Interexchange Carrier Phone companies that connect LECs kbps Kilobits per second 1 000 bits per second ATLAS 890 System Manual 2001 ADTRAN Inc 61200321L1 1A ATLAS 890 Glossary
116. 0 Section 2 Engineering Guidelines Page 12 of 22 Table 11 V 35 Winchester Pinout Continued Pin CCITT DESCRIPTION R 104 Received data RD A to DTE T 104 Received data RD B to DTE V 115 RX clock RC A to DTE X 115 RX clock RC B to DTE P 103 Transmitted data TD A from DTE S 103 Transmitted data TD B from DTE Y 114 TX clock TC A to DTE AA 114 TX clock TC B to DTE U 113 External TX clock ETC A from DTE W 113 External TX clock ETC B from DTE NN Test mode TM to DTE Table 12 DB 78 Pinout for the Quad Nx 56 64 Option Module PIN SIGNAL DESCRIPTION PIN SIGNAL DESCRIPTION 1 RXD A 2 4 41 RTS B 2 4 2 RXD B 2 4 42 GND 3 RXC A 2 4 43 48 Not used 4 RXC B 2 4 49 MOD2 5 TXD A 2 4 50 MODO 6 TXD B 2 4 51 EXT TXC A 1 3 7 TXC A 2 4 52 DTR B 1 3 8 TXC B 2 4 53 DTR A 1 3 9 EXT TXC A 2 4 54 DCD B 1 3 10 EXT TXC A 2 4 55 DCD A 1 3 11 17 Not used 56 DSR B RI 1 3 18 GND 57 DSR A 1 3 19 GND 58 CTS B 1 3 20 CHASIS GND 59 CTS A 1 3 21 CTS A 2 4 60 CHASIS GND 22 CST B 2 4 61 GND Note 1 3 or 2 4 indicates the port on the Nx 56 64 Module ATLAS 890 System Manual 2001 ADTRAN Inc 61200321L1 1A ATLAS 890 Section 2 Engineering Guidelines Page 13 of 22 Table 12 DB 78 Pinout for the Quad Nx 56 64 Option Module Continued
117. 01 ADTRAN Inc ATLAS 890 System Manual 61200321L1 1A ATLAS 890 Section 4 User Interface Guide Page 22 of 234 CURRENT The DS1 performance monitor Threshold Value for the Current UAS THRSH 15 minute Unavailable Seconds UAS parameter The default value is 10 for an approximate BER level of 10E 5 CURRENT The DS1 performance monitor Threshold Value for the Current CSS THRSH 15 minute Controlled Slip Seconds CSS parameter The default value is 1 for an approximate BER level of 10E 5 CURRENT The DS1 performance monitor Threshold Value for the Current PCV THRSH 15 minute Path Code Violations PCV parameter when the Line D4 Type is Super Frame AT amp T D4 format DS1 The default value is 72 framing errors for an approximate BER level of 10E 5 CURRENT The DS1 performance monitor Threshold Value for the Current PCV THRSH 15 minute Path Code Violations PCV parameter when the Line ESF Type is Extended Super Frame DS1 The default value is 13 296 CRC errors for an approximate BER level of 10E 5 CURRENT The DS1 performance monitor Threshold Value for the Current LES THRSH 15 minute Line Errored Seconds LES parameter The default value is 65 for an approximate BER level of 10E 5 CURRENT The DS1 performance monitor Threshold Value for the Current LCV THRSH 15 minute Line Code Violations LCV parameter The default value is 13 340 for an approximate BER level of 10E 5 DS1 TOTAL CURRENT PERF THRESHOLDS
118. 20 CHASIS GND 59 CTS A 1 3 21 CTS A 2 4 60 CHASIS GND 22 CST B 2 4 61 GND 23 DSR A 2 4 62 68 Not used 24 DSSR B RI 2 4 69 MOD1 25 DCD A 2 4 70 EXT TXC B 1 3 26 DCD B 2 4 71 TXC B 1 3 27 DTR A 2 4 72 TXC A 1 3 28 DTR B 2 4 73 TXD B 1 3 29 37 Not used 74 TXD A 1 3 38 RTS A 1 3 75 RXC B 1 3 39 RTS B 1 3 76 RXC A 1 3 40 RTS A 2 4 77 RXD B 1 3 78 RXD A 1 3 Note 1 3 or 2 4 indicates the port on the USSI Module CONNECTOR TYPE EIA 530 SYSTEM PART NUMBER X 4200261L2 Table 14 EIA 530 Connector Pinout PIN SIGNAL DESCRIPTION PIN SIGNAL DESCRIPTION 1 Shield Ground 13 Clear to Send B 2 Transmit Data A 14 Transmit Data B 3 Received Data A 15 Transmit Clock A 4 Request to Send A 16 Received Data B 5 Clear to Send A 17 Receive Clock A 6 DCE Ready A 18 Local Loopback 7 Signal Ground 19 Request to Send B 8 Carrier Detect A 20 DTE Ready A ATLAS 890 System Manual 2001 ADTRAN Inc 61200321L1 1A ATLAS 890 Section 2 Engineering Guidelines Page 15 of 22 Table 14 EIA 530 Connector Pinout Continued PIN SIGNAL DESCRIPTION PIN SIGNAL DESCRIPTION 9 Received Clock B 21 Remote Loopback 10 Carrier Detect B 22 DCE Ready B 11 Ext Transmit Clock B 23 DTE Ready B 12 Transmit Clock B 24 Ext Transmit Clock A 25 Test Mode CONNECTOR TYPE EIA 530A SYSTEM PART NUMBER 4200261L2 Table 15 EIA 530A Connecto
119. 21L1 1A ATLAS 890 Section 4 User Interface Guide Page 98 of 234 gt MODULES MENU HDLC OPTION MODULE The ATLAS 890 system controller automatically detects the presence of the HDLC Option Module when it is installed in the system listed as HDLC 128 To see the menus for the HDLC Option Module via the terminal menu use the arrow keys to scroll to the MODULES menu and press lt Enter gt to access the module choices Refer to the HDLC Option Module Quick Start Guide for a menu tree containing a complete list ing of menus INFO Read security 5 Provides information about the module part number serial number and assembly revision PART NUMBER Read security 5 Displays the part number of the module SERIAL NUMBER Read security 5 Displays the serial number of the module BOARD REVISION Read security 5 Displays the board revision of the installed module STATUS Read security 5 Displays the submenus for available resources on the HDLC Option Module DSOs AVAILABLE Read security 5 Displays the total number of DSOs currently available for allocation on the HDLC Option Module The maximum value is 128 CHANNELS Write security 4 Read security 5 Displays status information about the resources that have been allocated on the HDLC Option Module CHANNEL ID Read security 5 Indicates the resource number of the allocated resource listed If a number does not appear in the list that reso
120. 3 Read security 5 TS16 in CAS frame 0 contains 3 spare bits 0000XY XX where X marks a spare bit and Y marks an alarm indications to the remote end Enter a decimal number whose masked 4 LSB are inserted into TSO in CAS frame 0 Refer to CCITT G 704 for more information INTL BIT Write security 3 Read security 5 Bit 0 in all non CRC4 frames are reserved for international use They may be used nationally if the path does not cross an international border If not specifically used the bits should be set to 1 on paths crossing a border Enter the international bit value of 0 or 1 Refer to CCITT G 704 for more information Write security 5 Read security 5 These options initiate different types of tests and display test results The test menu contains the fol lowing menu options PRT Write security 4 Read security 5 Displays the port number Loc LB Write security 4 Read security 5 Initiates a local loopback on the near end port see Figure 11 The following options are avail able a E1 PRA ES NI CSU s gt if d M Port Loopback Line Loopback Figure 11 E1 PRA Network Loopback Tests ATLAS 890 System Manual 2001 ADTRAN Inc 61200321L1 1A ATLAS 890 Section 4 User Interface Guide Page 51 of 234 PATTERN Write security 4 Read security 5 Test pattern to be transmitted out the port The following options are available ALL
121. 4 User Interface Guide Page 73 of 234 FRAME TYPE Read security 5 Displays the kind of frame the ATLAS 890 receives from the frame relay endpoint connected to the VCOM channel allowing users to monitor the kind of data being carried on the network and processed by the ATLAS 890 The ATLAS 890 interprets the most recently received frame from the endpoint During a voice connection the frame type displays as VOICE For a FAX connection a variety of frame types display Initially VOICE displays indicating that although the call has com pleted the answering FAX machine has not yet announced its 2100 HZ tone After completing the 2100 Hz both FAX endpoints repeat a V 21 cycle for each page of the FAX document Each packet the ATLAS 890 receives from its connected frame relay endpoint is classified into one of the following groups BLANK No frame has yet been received from the endpoint or a FAX connection is between protocol states DTMF Dual tone multi frequency DTMF digit received VOICE Receiving voice frames A connection to a FAX endpoint shows a VOICE status until the FAX protocol is established 2100 HZ TONE FAX single frequency tone detected indicating the beginning of a FAX session V 21 FAX single frequency tone detected indicating the beginning of a FAX page V 27TER 2400 BPS FAX data reception of 2400 bps using protocol V 27ter V 27TER 4800 BPS FAX data reception of 4800 bps using protocol V 27t
122. 5 Selects the ATLAS 890 port or packet endpoint that terminates a network connection There may be more than one endpoint associated with a particular port If a TI is con Won nected to the PSTN some DSOs may be used for long distance while others are used for local calls These would constitute two endpoints trunks over a single physical port SIG Write security 3 Read security 5 Defines the type of signaling being used for this connection endpoint Select RBS for a T1 using robbed bit signaling or PRI for a Primary Rate ISDN interface Select NFAS for a non facility associated signalling interface or NONE for OSC when bonding DSOs This selection is only necessary if a T1 PRI is selected as the SLOT PORT type Win One HDLC resource is used by each PRI or each Packet Endpoint IN ACCEPT Write security 3 Read security 5 Defines the parameters for the incoming calls that ATLAS 890 accepts from the network Src ID Identifies the call source ID from which this endpoint accepts calls This field simpli fies the creation of a dial plan in applications where the criterion for switching calls to a certain endpoint is a function of which endpoint originated the call SRC ID may be entered with the usual wild card entries except X Any digit 0 through 9 1 3 5 Any of these digits 0 Default value The default ID for all source endpoints all accept numbers is 0 This results in all calls bein
123. 61200321L1 1A May 2001 ADRAN ATLAS 890 System Manual 1200321L1 1200322L1 1200344L1 1200345L1 ATLAS 890 Chassis System Controller Module AC Power Supply DC Power Supply Trademarks Any brand names and product names included in this manual are trademarks registered trademarks or trade names of their respective holders To the Holder of the Manual The contents of this manual are current as of the date of publication ADTRAN reserves the right to change the contents without prior notice In no event will ADTRAN be liable for any special incidental or consequential damages or for commercial losses even if ADTRAN has been advised thereof as a result of issue of this publication ADRAN 901 Explorer Boulevard P O Box 140000 Huntsville AL 35814 4000 Phone 256 963 8000 2001 ADTRAN Inc All Rights Reserved Printed in U S A ATLAS 890 System Manual 2001 ADTRAN Inc About this Manual Section 1 Section 2 Section 3 Section 4 Section 5 Section 6 Glossary This manual provides a complete description of the ATLAS 890 system and system software The purpose of this manual is to provide the technician system administrator and manager with general and specific information related to the planning installation operation and maintenance of the ATLAS 890 This manual is arranged so that needed information can be quickly and easily found The following is an overview of the contents System Desc
124. 7 172 22 12 50 ATLAS 880 ADTRAN I May 08 13 22 17 172 22 12 50 ATLAS 880 ADTRAN I May 08 13 22 17 172 22 12 50 ATLAS 830 ADTRAN I May 08 13 22 17 172 22 12 50 ATLAS 830 ADTRAN I May 08 13 22 18 172 22 12 50 ATLAS 830 ADTRAN I May 08 13 22 18 172 22 12 50 ATLAS 830 ADTRAN I May 08 13 22 18 172 22 12 50 ATLAS 830 ADTRAN I May 08 13 22 18 172 22 12 50 ATLAS 830 ADTRAN I May 08 13 22 19 172 22 12 50 ATLAS 830 ADTRAN I May 08 13 22 19 172 22 12 50 ATLAS 830 ADTRAN I May 08 13 22 19 172 22 12 50 ATLAS 8830 ADTRAN I May 08 13 22 19 172 22 12 50 ATLAS 830 ADTRAN I May 08 13 22 20 172 22 12 50 ATLAS 890 AD TRAN CCISCUAIOIRx Len 2 CCISCUAIOITx Len 2 0C 14 CCISCUAIOIR Len 2 0C 14 CCISCUAIONTx Len 2 OC 14 CCISCUAIOIRx Len 2 OC 14 CCISCUAIOTx Len 2 0C 14 CCISCUAIOIR Len 2 0C 14 CCISCUAIOITx Len 2 0C 14 CCISCUAIOIR Len 2 OC 14 CCISCLIAIDIT Lens 2 OC 14 CCISCUAJDIRx Lens 2 0C 14 CCISCUAIOITx Len 2 OC 14 CCISCUAIOIRx Len 2 OC 14 CCISCUAIOITx Len 2 OC 14 CCISCUAIDIRxLens 2 OC 14 CCISCUAIOITx Len 2 0C 14 CCISCUAIOIRx Len 2 0C 14 CCISCUAJDIT Lens 2 0C 14 CCISCUAIDIRx Lens 2 OC 14 CCISCUAJDIT Lens 2 0C 14 CCISCUAJDIRxLen 2 0C 14 CCISCUAIJDIT Lens 2 0C 14 CCISCUAIDIRx Lens 2 OC 14 CCISCUAJDIT Lens 2 0C 14 CCISCUAIOIRx Len 2 0C 14 CCISCUAJOIT Len 9 OC 10 0A 00 01 02 00 02 01 c May 08 13 22 20 172 22 12 50 ATLAS 890 ADTRAN ICCISCUAIOIR Len 9 OC 11 04 00 00 02 00 02 01 n
125. 90 Section 4 User Interface Guide Page 198 of 234 SIGNALING METHOD Defines to the ATLAS 890 the type of signaling to be used across this trunk The sig naling selected needs to match the signaling being provided by the network PSTN The following choices are available e E amp M Immediate e E amp M Wink e Loop Start e Ground Start e Feature Group D Win The ATLAS 890 converts signaling types between network and user terminations FGD TX SEQUENCE Displayed only if SIGNALING METHOD is configured for FEATURE GROUP D Defines to the ATLAS 890 the format in which to present the outgoing digits Choices NORMAL if no digits are to be sent ANI DNIS to send both ANI and DNIS DNIS to send DNIS only ANI to send ANI only FGD Rx SEQUENCE Displayed only if SIGNALING METHOD is configured for FEATURE GROUP D Defines to the ATLAS 890 the format in which to receive the incoming digits Choices NORMAL if no digits are to be received ANI DNIS to receive both ANI and DNIS DNIS to receive DNIS only ANI to receive ANI only WINK AFTER ANI DNIS Displayed only if SIGNALING METHOD is configured for FEATURE GROUP D When enabled the ATLAS 890 will transmit a wink after ANI DNIS digits are transmitted DIGIT SUPPRESSION When enabled no digits will be sent toward the network PBX after going off hook on an outgoing call DIRECT INWARD DIALING Defines to the ATLAS 890 whether Direct Inward Dialing DID is being used by the network If D
126. 90 Section 6 System Event Logging Page 12 of 16 Table 8 Circuit Backup Events Continued Console Log String Category Event Circuit Backup Deactivated Primary MINOR Port was in backup but primary data Restored function was restored Circuit Backup Data Alarm Active MINOR Inband keep alive messages were disrupted or corrupted Circuit Backup Data Alarm Cleared MINOR Inband keep alive messages are functioning properly Circuit Backup Test Call Originated INFO Circuit Backup test call was attempted by the unit Circuit Backup Test Call Connected INFO Circuit Backup test call was successfully connected to backup site Circuit Backup Test Call Passed INFO Circuit Backup test call was successfully maintained for test period Table 9 DP Outgoing Signaling Events Console Log String Category Event TX Set Rx ABCD lt gt Tx ABCD lt gt INFO ATLAS changed signal bits on port RX Change Rx ABCD lt gt Tx ABCD lt gt INFO Equipment connected to port changed signal bits a The ATLAS 890 uses only AB signaling bits The CD signaling bits are a copy of the AB values These values are shown in hexadecimal notation For example if AB signal bits are 01 then the total signal bits would be 01 01 Putting that in hexadecimal notation results in an event of Tx set Rx ABCD Ox 05 ATLAS 890 System Manual 2001 ADTRAN Inc 61200321L1 1A ATLAS 890 Section 6 Syste
127. 90 System Manual 2001 ADTRAN Inc 61200321L1 1A ATLAS 890 Glossary Page 11 of 12 T392 Defines the time in seconds the frame relay switch will wait for a poll from the user before declaring the poll bad TBOP Transparent Bit Oriented Protocol ADTRAN proprietary method for transmitting HDLC traffic across a frame relay network TCP Transmission Control Protocol Connection oriented protocol that provides error control of IP traffic TCP IP Transmission Control Protocol Internet Protocol A set of communications protocols that encom passes media access packet transport session communications file transfer electronic mail and ter minal emulation TDM Time Division Multiplexing A method for sending two or more signals over a common transmission path by assignment the path sequentially to each signal each assignment being for a discrete time interval Telco Telephone company Telnet A terminal emulation protocol part of the TCP IP suite of protocols that provides remote terminal connection services See also VT 100 TFTP Trivial File Transfer Protocol A simplified version of the TCP IP file transfer protocol that does not include password protection or user directory capability TIA 464A Telecommunication Industry Association s standard for DTMF detection and generation Transparent voice compression Similar to G 711 with echo cancellation for voice disabled This algorithm is primarily used for vide
128. 90 System Manual 61200321L1 1A ATLAS 890 Section 4 User Interface Guide Page 224 of 234 SPID List The port acting as the network must use a Service Profile Identifier SPID and phone number s in order to satisfy the ISDN connection protocol expected by the user s terminal adapter TA PHONE NUMBER The phone number s assigned to this BRI phone line SPID NUMBER Defines the SPID number s used for this BRI line Although the value of the SPID is not significant a SPID must be entered for each phone number For con venience the SPID can be set to be identical to the phone number adapters offer Ld The ATLAS 890 does not support autoSPID detection software which some terminal CALLS For user termination the number of calls which can be received or sent on this number SPID is fixed at 2 D64 D56 AUDIO SPEECH These options reflect the network provisions for this SPID If the BRI was pur chased with different services provisioned for the SPIDs then the call must match the services supported STRIP MSD Strips a selected quantity choose from NONE 1 2 and 3 of the most significant dig its MSD of a dialed number prior to being forwarded out of the port Example A network port could be set to accept all calls beginning with 9 9 and then with STRIP MSD set to 1 all digits would be sent toward the network except the leading 9 te STRIP MSD does not affect CALL ACCEPT criteria All of the
129. 90 options which apply to all switched operations both incoming and outgoing calls END OF NUMBER TIMEOUT Write security 3 Read security 5 Sets the length of time ATLAS 890 waits before assuming the outgoing dialed number is com plete The default value is six seconds This timeout will only be invoked if the dialed number does not match one of the patterns set in the NUMBER COMPLETE TEMPLATE menu see Nbr Complete Templates below COUNTRY CODE Write security 3 Read security 5 The country code Enter your international country code using only digits For the United States enter 1 AREA OR CITY CODE Write security 3 Read security 5 The local area code Use for sending caller ID to the network NBR COMPLETE TEMPLATES Write security 3 Read security 5 Sets completed number patterns for outgoing calls so that ATLAS 890 recognizes when the phone number is complete Fields include the index number and PATTERN For example a local number will be 7 digits long while a long distance 1 area code number will be 11 digits long The ATLAS 890 defaults cover almost any installation and these templates should not require any additional user input except for unusual circumstances The template allows the use of the following wildcard inputs to define numbers X Any single digit N Any single digit 2 through 9 911 This specific number 1 2 3 A single digit in this group NUMBER TYPE TEMP
130. ACO Amber ACO button is being pressed 2001 ADTRAN Inc ATLAS 890 System Manual 61200321L1 1A ATLAS 890 Section 2 Engineering Guidelines Page 6 of 22 Table 3 ATLAS 890 LEDs Continued FOR THESE LEDS THIS COLOR INDICATES THAT LIGHT STAND BY CONTROLLER Status Green slow blink Stand by controller is present Online Green solid Stand by controller operational for redundancy Red astblink controller while the current active contol is installed Test N A N A Link Green solid Ethernet link detected ACTIVE CONTROLLER Status Green slow blink Card is not ready Green fast blink Card is not supported Green solid Active controller present Online Amber solid Controller is in test mode Amber fast blink Card is upgrading firmware Red fast blink Flash parameters are not compatible Green fast blink Card is unresponsive or not supported Red fast blink Card is not ready Test Amber solid Controller is in test mode Link Green solid Ethernet link detected MODULE STATUS Green solid Module is present Green fast blink Module has been manually taken offline by the user Red solid Module failed self test Red fast blink d no response has been removed or is not Red slow blink Module is not ready None No module occupies the slot ATLAS 890 System Manual 2001 ADTRAN Inc
131. ALR D Channel alarm is only meaningful if T1 is defined as a PRI PRI configuration of a T1 circuit in a T3 bundle requires using one of the HDLC resources provided on the system controller module or an HDLC Option Module DS1 DSO STATUS Read security 5 Indicates usage on a DSO basis for each T1 in the T3 circuit These options are read only Unallocated Inactive Signaling mismatch Active B Channel Active D Channel Maintenance Dedicated nailed Off hook originate RBS Ringing RBS Restart ISDN U O Zz go D Waiting dial tone ATLAS 890 System Manual 2001 ADTRAN Inc 61200321L1 1A ATLAS 890 Section 4 User Interface Guide Page 105 of 234 DS1 DSO ALARMS Read security 5 Displays per DSO alarm status for each T1 in the T3 circuit These alarms usually indicate the failure to receive the protocol that has been configured for the DSO No Alarm DSO D D Channel Alarm ISDN F Frame Alarm packet T TBOP Alarm packet P PPP Alarm packet DS1 Sic STATUS Read security 5 Read only field that indicates signaling of all 24 DSOs for each T1 in the T3 circuit The A B bits for Rx receive and Tx transmit DSOs are shown when the T1s are configured for D4 framing When the T1s are configured for ESF framing ABCD bits are shown for each DSO Dashes display for those DSOs where robbed bit signaling RBS is not being transferred by the ATLAS 890 DS1 PERF CURRENT Write sec
132. AME Write security 3 Read security 5 Configures the framing format for the T3 circuit Selections are M13 or C BIT TX CLOCK Write security 3 Read security 5 Selects the source of the T3 transmit clock The following options are available RECOVERED The ATLAS 890 will derive transmit T3 timing from the receive T3 INTERNAL The ATLAS 890 will derive transmit T3 timing from the internal 20 PPM crystal source Failure to configure this will result in T3 clock slips Won Every T3 connection should have one RECOVERED and one INTERNAL transmit clock LBO Write security 3 Read security 5 Selects the line build out for the T3 transmitter The following options are available SHORT 0 to 100 feet of cable LONG 100 to 450 feet of cable DS3 TEST Write security 3 Read security 5 Executes loops and indicates test status PRT Read security 5 Indicates the T3 port under test ATLAS 890 System Manual 2001 ADTRAN Inc 61200321L1 1A ATLAS 890 Section 4 User Interface Guide Page 103 of 234 LOOPBACK Write security 3 Read security 5 This field indicates the present loopback selected The following options will display NONE No loopback in effect LINE T3 line loopback active REMOTE LB Write security 3 Read security 5 This field indicates if loopbacks initiated from remote sources are in effect and may be used to execute remote loopbacks on the far end T3 equipment The
133. ANDOMIZE TIMER Enables disables random delay added to the redial timer to avoid glare RETRY COUNT Defines the number of redials to attempt OUTGOING CALLER ID Defines the presentation of the calling party number for this endpoint Source ID Simplifies the creation of a DIAL PLAN in applications where the criterion for switch ing calls to a certain endpoint is a function of which endpoint originated the call Default value 0 Zero is the default value for all endpoints and all accept num bers With default values all calls are routed based only on the dialed number Multiple endpoints can have the same SOURCE ID When creating the CALL ACCEPT list specify a SOURCE ID s as well as a dialed number or range of dialed numbers to accept Example An application requires that all calls that originate from Port 1 of the ATLAS 890 in Slot 1 be switched to Port 2 of that same module Assign a unique Source ID e g 7 to Port 1 of the module and then configure Port 2 to only accept calls from that unique Source ID 7 ROUTE INCOMING CALL Used to define the method which incoming calls are associated to the packet end points This item has three options USING INCOMING NUM Endpoint selection based on the incoming number USING CALLING PARTY NUM Selection based on the Caller ID as presented by the calling party If this option is selected the CALL PARTY NUMBER field is made available to the interface con figuration This number
134. AS 890 Section 4 User Interface Guide Page 11 of 234 SERIAL NUMBER Read security 5 Displays the serial number for the unit The serial number of the ATLAS 890 will automatically dis play in this field Boor ROM REV Read security 5 Displays the boot ROM revision gt SYSTEM STATUS The SYSTEM STATUS menu provides the user with status information about the ATLAS 890 operational parameters including logged system events and timing Figure 4 displays the submenus and data fields that are available when you select this menu item Telnet Connection 172 22 12 50 Session Edit Options Capture Help S 0g Susten Status Clear System Event Log lt gt ystem Config Ethernet Port System Utility Admin Port Modules Craft Port Packet Manager System Alarms Router System Timing Source PRIMARY Locked Dedicated Maps Resource Usage Circuit Status Trunk Usage Dial Plan Redundancy AT ET ALRH Figure 4 System Status Menu EVENT LOG Read security 5 Displays the last 349 warning or failure messages sent including the day date and priority of the mes sage The most recent messages display at the top of the list The following read only fields are avail able to review TIME Displays the date mm dd and the time hh mm ss that the event occurred 2001 ADTRAN Inc ATLAS 890 System Manual 61200321L1 1A ATLAS 890 Section 4 User Interface Guid
135. BOARD REVISION Read security 5 Displays the board revision of the installed module ALARMS Read security 5 Displays the alarm status for the selected Octal BRI Option Module PRT Read security 5 Indicates the port number ALARMS Read security 5 Displays the current alarm status of each U BRI interface LAYER 1 A layer one alarm is indicated by an asterisk when the U BRI physical layer is not active An L1 alarm is present when problems are detected with the endpoint or a cabling problem CHANNEL Read security 5 Displays the alarm status of each 2B D channel A hyphen indicates no active channel alarm and D indicates an active D channel alarm ATLAS 890 System Manual 2001 ADTRAN Inc 61200321L1 1A ATLAS 890 Section 4 User Interface Guide Page 69 of 234 CHANNEL USAGE Read security 5 Displays the status of each of the U BRI interfaces PRT Read security 5 Indicates the port number CHA Read security 5 Channel Displays the status of individual channels The following symbols may display Unallocated channel Inactive channel A Active B channel D Active D channel PERFORMANCE CURRENT Write security 3 Read security 5 The performance field provides status on key performance measures for each of the four U BRI ports These fields are all read only The monitored parameters include the following PRT Displays the port number RESET Resets the NEBE a
136. BOP indicates this packet endpoint is configured for Transparent Bit Oriented Protocol TBOP PPP indicates this packet endpoint is configured for the Point to Point Protocol LINK STATS FRAME RELAY Write security 3 Read security 5 Displays layer 2 performance statistics The statistics fields for frame relay reflect the total count since last cleared The available statistic information is discussed below TX PACKETS Total number of frame relay packets transmitted through this packet endpoint including both user data on all PVCs and signaling RX PACKETS Total number of frame relay packets received through this packet endpoint on all PVCs STATE CHANGES Total number of times that frame relay signaling has gone active or inactive SIGNALING ERRORS Total number of signaling frames received with PVC signaling protocol viola tions ATLAS 890 System Manual 2001 ADTRAN Inc 61200321L1 1A ATLAS 890 Section 4 User Interface Guide Page 123 of 234 SIGNALING TIMEOUTS Number of times signaling polls were not received in the time specified in T391 in the PACKET ENDPTS CONFIG menu ASYNC STATUS TX Full status not transmitted during the normal full status cycle An asynchronous status message is used to quickly activate a link ASYNC STATUS RX Full status not received during the normal full status cycle An asynchronous sta tus message is used to quickly activate a link FULL STATUS TX Number of full status po
137. CE Write Security 2 Read Security 2 Defines the interface to which IP packets with this address will be routed These are either Ethernet or frame relay DLCIs Hops Write Security 2 Read Security 2 Defines the number of router hops required to get to the network or host Maximum distance is 15 hops COST Write Security 2 Read Security 2 Defines the total cost of getting to the network For OSPF routing this value represents the cost associated with getting to the destination network Normally the cost is based on the available bandwidth ENABLED Write Security 2 Read Security 2 Adds a static route to the router ADVERTISE Write Security 2 Read Security 2 When set to YES this static route is advertised over all interfaces on which a route advertise ment protocol e g RIP is enabled When set to NO this is a private route ARP CACHE Write Security 2 Read Security 2 The ARP CACHE menu displays the contents of the ATLAS Address Resolution Protocol ARP cache All resolved cache entries time out after 20 minutes Unresolved entries time out in 3 minutes IP ADDRESS Read Security 2 Displays the IP address used for resolving MAC address MAC ADDRESS Read Security 2 Resolves Ethernet address If set to all zeros there is no resolution for that address TIME Read Security 2 Displays the minutes since the entry was last referenced TYPE Read Security 2 Defines
138. Console Log String Category Event number rejected Busy NORMAL Call rejected number accepted slot port NORMAL Call successfully routed d No such number in dial plan b Number is on outgoing reject list c All endpoints busy Table 3 ICC Events Console Log String Category Event Unable to Allocate Memory for Flash CRITICAL Not enough memory available to flash the Download controller ICC is up MINOR Communication link between redundant controllers is active ICC is down MINOR Communication link between redundant controllers is down SCUA B incompatible hardware MINOR Redundant controllers do not have the same version of hardware SCUA B incompatible software MINOR Redundant controllers do not have the same version of software Table 4 Nx 56 64 Events Console Log String Category Event Nx 56 64 511 Test Pattern Active WARNING 511 Test Pattern Activated Nx 56 64 511 Test Pattern Cleared WARNING 511 Test Pattern Deactivated Nx 56 64 Bilateral Loopback Active WARNING Bilateral Loopback Activated Nx 56 64 Bilateral Loopback Cleared WARNING Bilateral Loopback Deactivated Nx 56 64 Excessive Zeros Alarm WARNING Excessive Zeros from DTE Nx 56 64 Excessive Zeros Alarm Cleared WARNING Excessive Zeros condition cleared Nx 56 64 Clock Slip Alarm Active MAJOR Clock Slip Alarm Active Nx 56 64 Clock Slip A
139. Css Controlled Slip Second UAS Unavailable Second Lcv Line Code Violation Pcv Path Code Violation LES Line Errored Second PERFORMANCE 15MIN Write security 3 Read security 5 Stores the performance data for the previous 15 minute window Refer to Performance Current above for a detailed description of these fields ATLAS 890 System Manual 2001 ADTRAN Inc 61200321L1 1A ATLAS 890 Section 4 User Interface Guide Page 43 of 234 PERFORMANCE 24HR Write security 3 Read security 5 Stores the performance data for the previous 24 hour window Refer to Performance Current for a detailed description CONFIGURATION Write security 3 Read security 5 All of the following configurable parameters apply to whether the port is connected to a Primary Rate ISDN circuit or a channelized T1 circuit PRT Read security 5 Displays the port number PoRT NAME Write security 3 Read security 5 Accepts any alpha numeric name up to 16 characters long to uniquely identify each port on the ATLAS 890 FRAME Write security 2 Read security 5 This field must be set to match the frame format of the circuit to which it is connected avail able from the network supplier Choose either D4 or ESF CODE Write security 2 Read security 5 Set this field to match the line code of the circuit to which it is connected this information is available from the network suppl
140. DTRAN Inc ATLAS 890 System Manual 61200321L1 1A ATLAS 890 Section 4 User Interface Guide Page 82 of 234 DIALOUT Write security 5 Read security 5 Includes all options that affect dialing outgoing calls The record field indicates the values of the key dialout subfields AT MDM Indicates that AT dialing of a modem is selected DTR MDM Indicates that DTR dialing of a modem is selected AT ISDN Indicates that AT dialing of an ISDN resource is selected DTR ISDN Indicates that DTR dialing of an ISDN resource is selected DIALOUT METHOD Write security 3 Read security 5 Selects the method by which outgoing calls may be initiated by the DTE DTR DiAL When DTR is enabled by the DTE and a number has been entered in the DTR DiAL NUMBER field an outgoing call attempt is made The call is hung up when DTR is dropped If the call does not connect the call will continue to be retried as long as DTR remains active AT DIAL When enabled AT commands may be used to dial outgoing calls Port an allo cated modem or ISDN resource configuration is also supported via AT com mands The DTR signal must be active from the DTE to dial out The call is hung up when DTR is dropped or when the escape to command mode sequent and ATH are issued When the call is connected the Async 232 port enables DCD DTR DIAL NUMBER This field is only active when outgoing calls are enabled and DIALOUT METHOD is set to DTR DIAL If a phone nu
141. DTRAN Inc ATLAS 890 System Manual 61200321L1 1A ATLAS 890 Section 5 DLP 004 Page 2 of 4 DLP 004 Perform Steps Below in the Order Listed 1 Ascertain the ATLAS 890 IP address If you do not already have the IP Address for the ATLAS 890 either obtain it from the Network Administrator or manually check for the address in the SYSTEM CONFIG ETHERNET PORT IP ADDRESS menu of the Network Management interface Win You must login with maximum rights to modify the IP parameters on the ATLAS 890 2 Ping the ATLAS 890 unit from a remote computer on the network Using a remote computer system connected to the LAN perform an ICMP Ping on the IP Address of the ATLAS 890 Verify that the unit responds properly If the ATLAS 890 fails to respond try the following e Verify that the proper IP Address Subnet Mask and Default Gateway are provisioned in the unit see DLP 003 for details e Verify that the ATLAS 890 is properly cabled into the LAN and that the ethernet cable is prop erly seated in the RJ 45 jack on the rear of the unit e If the ATLAS 890 is connected to a hub or other network device that provides a carrier sense light for each port verify that the carrier sense light for the port to which the ATLAS 890 is connected is lit If this light is not lit check the cabling between the hub and the shelf e Verify the IP Address Subnet Mask and Default Gateway on the remote computer system If none of these ste
142. E DCD Data carrier detect to DTE RI Ring indicate to DTE W O STATUS Write security 5 Read security 5 Displays the input output statistics for the Async 232 ports PORT Read security 5 Displays the port number Tx BYTES Read security 5 Displays the number of bytes transmitted by the DTE Rx BYTES Read security 5 Displays the number of bytes sent to the DTE OVERRUNS Read security 5 Displays the received overrun errors from the DTE A receiver overrun occurs when the DTE performs data transmission too fast for the Async 232 port to keep up therefore causing data to be lost An overrun may indicate the need to turn on hardware flow control ATLAS 890 System Manual 2001 ADTRAN Inc 61200321L1 1A ATLAS 890 Section 4 User Interface Guide Page 79 of 234 PRTYERRS Read security 5 Displays the number of bytes received from the DTE that contained parity errors FRMERRS Read security 5 Displays the number of bytes received from the DTE that contained framing errors RST STATS Write security 5 Read security 5 Clears the current stored I O statistics for each port SESSION STATUS Read security 5 Shows the status of key DTE interface signals An asterisk indicates the presence of a signal and a hyphen indicates no signal present PRT Read security 5 Displays the port number MODE Read security 5 Indicates th
143. ESCRIPTION 1 P4 TT Port 4 Transmit Tip 42 GND Ground 2 P4TR Port 4 Transmit Ring 43 P4 RT Port 4 Receive Tip 3 GND Ground 44 P4 RR Port 4 Receive Ring 6 GND Ground 45 GND Ground 7 P3 TT Port 3 Transmit Tip 48 GND Ground 8 P3 TR Port 3 Transmit Ring 49 P3 RT Port 3 Receive Tip 9 GND Ground 50 P3 RR Port 3 Receive Ring 12 GND Ground 51 GND Ground 13 P2 TT Port 2 Transmit Tip 54 GND Ground 14 P2TR Port 2 Transmit Ring 55 P2 RT Port 2 Receive Tip 15 GND Ground 56 P2 RR Port 2 Receive Ring 18 GND Ground 57 GND Ground 19 P1 TT Port 1 Transmit Tip 60 GND Ground 20 P1 TR Port 1 Transmit Ring 61 P1 RT Port 1 Receive Tip 21 GND Ground 62 P1 RR Port 1 Receive Ring Note Pins that are not identified are not used P 1 4 indicates the Port Quad Nx 56 64 Option Module P N 1200184L1 Each DB 78 port of the Quad Nx 56 64 Option Module supplies a V 35 Winchester style connection as defined in Table 11 using provided adapter cables The DB 78 interface pinout is shown in Table 12 Table 11 V 35 Winchester Pinout Pin CCITT DESCRIPTION A 101 Protective ground PG B 102 Signal ground SG C 105 Request to send RTS from DTE D 106 Clear to send CTS to DTE E 107 Data set ready DSR to DTE F 109 Received line signal detector DCD to DTE H m Data terminal ready DTR from DTE J Ring indicator RI 2001 ADTRAN Inc ATLAS 890 System Manual 61200321L1 1A ATLAS 89
144. Each port is looped back and a data pattern is sent and tested The result of the self test on each installed port is listed with Pass Fail results Figure 7 depicts a typical test log The fields included in the log are described below the figure Telnet Connection 172 22 12 50 BE Lini xi Session Edit Options Capture Help l View Card Tst 0 TCOZ2 oc Seo dccrrrr Ze l 00000 uu me Bootrom Tst Passed Flash Tst Passed Test Start COS COND CONO OO IOS CDL ES COND A i ii Figure 7 View Selftest Log The self test log includes the following fields IDX Index number of the log TIME Time and date of the log entry SL ATLAS 890 slot number PT ATLAS 890 port number EVENT Event description RESULT Show PASS FAIL results The tests associated with the system controller are shown in Figure 8 on page 33 ATLAS 890 System Manual 2001 ADTRAN Inc 61200321L1 1A ATLAS 890 Section 4 User Interface Guide Page 33 of 234 This event Logs this result Flash Flash memory checksum verified BootRom Boot ROM checksum verified DSP RAM Memory associated with the Digital Signal Processor RTC RAM Memory associated with the real time clock NV Batt Tests the battery for non volatile memory TDM RAM Memory associated with mapping TDM bandwidth DRAM Dynamic RAM used for program execution Redundancy The gate array that con
145. FRAME The average frame size the PVC received for the interval or day MIN TX FRAME The minimum frame size the PVC transmitted for the interval or day MAX TX FRAME The maximum frame size the PVC transmitted for the interval or day AVG TX FRAME The average frame size the PVC transmitted for the interval or day MIN FRAME DLY The minimum delay in milliseconds on the PVC IN BAND DELAY MEASURE MENT is ENABLED see n Band Delay Measurement on page 130 for the PVC or if PVC diagnostics are being performed MAX FRAME DLY The maximum delay in milliseconds on the PVC for the interval or day Applies only if IN BAND DELAY MEASUREMENT is ENABLED see n Band Delay Mea surement on page 130 for the PVC or if PVC diagnostics are being performed AVG FRAME DLY The average delay in milliseconds on the PVC for the interval or day Applies only if IN BAND DELAY MEASUREMENT is ENABLED see n Band Delay Mea surement on page 130 for the PVC or if PVC diagnostics are being performed PVC STATE CHANGE The number of state changes for this PVC for the interval or day 2001 ADTRAN Inc ATLAS 890 System Manual 61200321L1 1A ATLAS 890 Section 4 User Interface Guide Page 142 of 234 gt ROUTER The ATLAS 890 router uses the integral 10BaseT Ethernet port to transmit local area network LAN traf fic over the wide area network WAN to a remote LAN By integrating the router into the network access device you benefit from the
146. Far End Address FAR END ADDRESS Write Security 2 Read Security 2 This menu is only present for frame relay network interfaces and it is only selectable when IARP is disabled Use this menu to specify the IP address of the device on the other end of the virtual circuit If that IP address is non zero a static route to the far end network will be added using the interface Subnet Mask If 0 0 0 0 has been specified for the Subnet Mask a default subnet mask is used based on the class of the Far End Address MTU Write Security 2 Read Security 2 Defines maximum number of bytes in a datagram transmitted over this interface Maximum Transmit Unit RIP Write Security 2 Read Security 2 Configures routing information protocol RIP on this interface MODE Allows RIP to be enabled or disabled on a per interface basis TX ONLY RIP advertisements are periodically transmitted but are not listened to on this vir tual circuit ATLAS 890 System Manual 2001 ADTRAN Inc 61200321L1 1A ATLAS 890 Section 4 User Interface Guide Page 147 of 234 Rx ONLY RIP advertisements are not transmitted on this virtual circuit but they are listened to TX AND RX RIP advertisements are periodically transmitted and are listened to on this virtual circuit Win If RIP MODE is off PROTOCOL METHOD and UPDATE will not be visible PROTOCOL Sets the version of RIP being used on this interface The options are RIP V1 and RIP
147. Firmware update failed CRITICAL Flash download failed Fan 1 is Disconnected CRITICAL Fan 1 is disconnected Fan 2 is Disconnected CRITICAL Fan 2 is disconnected Fan 3 is Disconnected CRITICAL Fan 3 is disconnected Fan 1 is Connected CRITICAL Fan 1 is connected Fan 2 is Connected CRITICAL Fan 2 is connected Fan 3 is Connected CRITICAL Fan 3 is connected Fan 1 is Below Speed Threshold CRITICAL Fan 1 is rotating too slowly Fan 2 is Below Speed Threshold CRITICAL Fan 2 is rotating too slowly Fan 3 is Below Speed Threshold CRITICAL Fan 3 is rotating too slowly Fan 1 is Above Speed Threshold CRITICAL Fan 1 is rotating too fast Fan 2 is Above Speed Threshold CRITICAL Fan 2 is rotating too fast Fan 3 is Above Speed Threshold CRITICAL Fan 3 is rotating too fast 2001 ADTRAN Inc ATLAS 890 System Manual 61200321L1 1A ATLAS 890 Section 6 System Event Logging Page 6 of 16 Table 1 System Controller Events Continued Console Log String Category Event Fan 1 Speed is Normal CRITICAL Fan 1 has returned to an acceptable speed Fan 2 Speed is Normal CRITICAL Fan 2 has returned to an acceptable speed Fan 3 Speed is Normal CRITICAL Fan 3 has returned to an acceptable speed System Configuration Uploaded CRITICAL ATLAS configuration file loaded into the system and activated Module Not Responding WARNING Module removed or not respon
148. Guide Page 52 of 234 ALARM STATUS Read security 5 Displays the current alarm status PRT Read security 5 Indicates the port number ALARMS Read security 5 Displays an alarm condition on the ATLAS 890 unit DTE STATUS SLIP A rate mismatch exists between the DTE clock and the network side clock as set by DSO assignment PLL The Nx port is not able to lock onto the clock provided by the network interface ZERO The DTE is sending an excessive number of consecutive zeroes to the network inter face No ExT CLK The DTE is not providing an external transmit clock This alarm displays only if the Nx port is configured to get its transmit clock from the DTE PKT EP ALM A packet endpoint has detected missing or incorrect framing Read security 5 Shows the status of key DTE interface signals An asterisk indicates the presence of a signal and a hyphen indicates no signal present PRT Operating port number The following signals are monitored these options are read only RTS Request to send from DTE CTS Clear to send to DTE DTR Data terminal ready from DTE DSR Data set ready to DTE ATLAS 890 System Manual 2001 ADTRAN Inc 61200321L1 1A ATLAS 890 Section 4 User Interface Guide Page 53 of 234 DCD RI TD RD EC DATA RATE Read security 5 Data carrier detect to DTE Ring indicate to DTE Transmit data from the DTE Receive data toward the DTE External
149. ID is ENABLED then the following information must be defined DID DIGITS TRANSFERRED Defines the number of digits sent to ATLAS 890 from the network if DID is used This option only displays if DID is set to ENABLED ATLAS 890 System Manual 2001 ADTRAN Inc 61200321L1 1A ATLAS 890 Section 4 User Interface Guide Page 199 of 234 DID PREFIX Defines to the ATLAS 890 the prefix digits which are not received as a part of the DID number The ATLAS 890 uses the combination of prefix and DID number to determine the user endpoint that should receive the incoming call This option only displays if DID is set to ENABLED If DID is DISABLED then you must define the trunk number Win If FEATURE GROUP D is used DID only refers to DNIS digits TRUNK NUMBER When the network connection does not provide DID digits the ATLAS 890 must be given a number to use to determine which user endpoint should receive the incoming call TRUNK NUMBER displays only when DID is set to DISABLED Win The trunk number must be specific i e no wildcards Example To connect an incoming DSO trunk to an endpoint with the accept number of 963 8615 set the trunk number to 963 8615 STRIP MSD Strips a selected quantity choose from NONE 1 2 and 3 of the most significant dig its MSD of a dialed number prior to being forwarded out of the port Example A network port could be set to accept all calls beginning with 9 9 and then
150. ION Write security 1 Read security 5 When enabled AUTOMATIC ROUTEBACK REJECTION prevents calls entering through network termination interfaces from being forwarded out another network interface Such an event could happen if an incoming call specifies a number that has no endpoint configured to accept it and another network interface has a call acceptance entry which could accept it such as Without automatic rejection such a call would be forwarded back to the network The network would in turn resend the call to the unit until all incoming resources are consumed W ARNING Use extreme caution when disabling AUTOMATIC ROUTEBACK REJECTION COLLISION RESPONSE Write security 0 Read security 0 When forced the COLLISION RESPONSE will enable the ATLAS to perform AUTOMATIC retransmission of SETUP messages when faced with a collision situation Forcing this ATLAS 890 System Manual 2001 ADTRAN Inc 61200321L1 1A ATLAS 890 Section 4 User Interface Guide Page 193 of 234 response is not advised W ARNING Use extreme caution when forcing COLLISION RESPONSE GLOBAL TONE TYPE Write security 1 Read security 5 Specifies the dialing digit tone encoding to be used throughout the entire system DTMF dual tone multi frequency and MF multi frequency are the available options gt DIAL PLAN QUAD T1 PRI T3 AND T3 DROP AND INSERT OPTION MODULES NETWORK TERM PRI This menu allows the user to
151. IP address contains the network number This address is composed of four decimal numbers each in the range of 0 to 255 separated by periods This value is set to 0 0 0 0 by default This part of the destination IP address is used along with the ATLAS 890 IP address to determine which nodes must be reached through the default IP gateway Displays the system Ethernet Media Access Control MAC address This field is read only Defines the rate at which the ethernet port operates Choose from 10 MBPS or AUTO 10 100 When the unit is set for AUTO 10 100 the ATLAS 890 auto detects the data rate of the LAN and sets itself to that rate either 10 or 100 Mbps Write security 2 Read security 5 Accepts input for configuring the Admin port PORT NAME PORT TYPE PORT SPEED MODEM INITIALIZATION STRING INITIALIZE MODEM FLOW CONTROL Defines the name of the Admin port You can leave this field blank Specifies whether you use DIRECT or DIAL mode DIRECT mode is used when connecting to a VT 100 terminal and DIAL mode is used for modem access Specifies the baud rate of the port Select either 2400 9600 19200 or 38400 If you are using DIAL for PORT TYPE ensure that the PORT SPEED setting matches the modem baud rate Specifies the initialization string for a modem Refer to your modem documentation for acceptable initialization strings The default value will set most modems to the appropriate con
152. ISDN PPP this field determines what type of ISDN call will be made when a call is attempted The value must match the network services provisioned for the PRI or BRI interface that the call will be carried on This field is not present and ignored when the CALLOUT PROTOCOL is ANALOG MODEM DATA 64K Directs the call control software to request an unrestricted 64 kbps circuit The default call type for ISDN service is Data 64 kbps DATA 56K Directs the call control software to request a 64 kbps data circuit that is rate adapted to 56 kbps It is intended for use in circumstances where interoperability with Switched 56 service is desired AUDIO Directs the call control software to request a 3 1 kHz audio circuit as the bearer capability for outgoing calls The Audio option is used with an ISDN line config ured for voice service Selecting an Audio call type guarantees a digital end to end ISDN connection SPEECH Speech direct the call control software to request a Law speech circuit as the bearer capability for outgoing calls The Speech option is used with an ISDN line configured for voice service A Speech call type does not guarantee and end to end digital connection with some local and long distance providers 2001 ADTRAN Inc ATLAS 890 System Manual 61200321L1 1A ATLAS 890 Section 4 User Interface Guide Page 84 of 234 MODEM Write security 3 Read security 5 Configures an allocated modem for incomi
153. LAS 890 Section 5 DLP 010 Page 4 of 4 ATLAS 890 System Manual 2001 ADTRAN Inc 61200321L1 1A ATLAS 890 Section 5 DLP 011 Page 1 of 4 SAVING THE CURRENT CONFIGURATION OF AN ATLAS 890 USING TFTP Introduction The ATLAS 890 supports configuration transfers from the unit via the 10 100 BASET Ethernet port to a TFTP server located on the network This DLP provides the steps to follow for a successful configuration transfer using the 10 100 BASET Ethernet port and a TFTP Server Tools and Materials Required e APC with a Telnet client software A TFTP Server accessible on the local network A TFTP server is provided with the unit as part of the ADTRAN Utilities software To prevent electrical shock do not install equipment in a wet location or during a N ARNING lightning storm Electronic modules can be damaged by static electrical discharge Before handling modules wear an antistatic discharge wrist strap to prevent damage to electronic d components Place modules in antistatic packing material when transporting or storing When working on modules always place them on an approved antistatic mat that is electrically grounded 2001 ADTRAN Inc ATLAS 890 System Manual 61200321L1 1A ATLAS 890 Section 5 DLP 011 Page 2 of 4 DLP 011 Perform Steps Below in the Order Listed 1 Connect to the ATLAS 890 using the 10 100 BASET interface If you are not already connected to the
154. LAS 890 System Manual 2001 ADTRAN Inc 61200321L1 1A ATLAS 890 Section 4 User Interface Guide Page 221 of 234 S This port is in the switched dial plan and conflicts with this end point n This port is used in one or more dedicated maps This port is in one or more dedicated maps and conflicts with this endpoint NUMBER OF PORTS Specifies the number of USSI interface ports ATLAS 890 uses for this endpoint NUMBER TO DiAL Specifies the number to dial on an outgoing call CALL TYPE Configures the call type either 56K or 64K used for outgoing calls from this end point DiAL CALL AS Allows the outgoing call to be treated as the selected call type Options include DIGI TAL for 56K or 64K data calls VOICE for speech calls and AUDIO for 3 1kHz audio calls SOURCE ID Simplifies the creation of a dial plan in applications where the criterion for switching calls to a certain endpoint is a function of which endpoint originated the call Default value 0 Zero is the default ID for all endpoints and all accept numbers With default values all calls are routed based only on the dialed number Multiple endpoints can have the same SOURCE ID When creating the CALL ACCEPT list specify a SOURCE ID s as well as a dialed number or range of dialed numbers to accept Example An application requires that all calls that originate from Port 1 of the ATLAS 890 in Slot 1 be switched to Port 2 of that same module As
155. LATES Sets call type patterns ISDN interfaces require that a number type be sent over the D channel when a call is sent or received A normal RBS trunk does not send a type designator but uses prefixes instead For example 1 prefix is a national long distance call type while a O11 prefix is an international long distance call type These templates form a table to permit ATLAS 890 to translate the RBS prefix into a call type for ISDN and vice versa 2001 ADTRAN Inc ATLAS 890 System Manual 61200321L1 1A ATLAS 890 Section 4 User Interface Guide Page 192 of 234 Ld The ATLAS 890 default templates should cover all applications and should not need to be added to by the user except for very rare circumstances Denotes an entry number The maximum number of entries is 50 Press lt I gt to insert a new entry and lt D gt to delete any entry PREFIX Sets the prefix for the number type Only digits 0 and 1 are allowed maximum of six characters PATTERN Modifies an entry when you press lt Enter gt maximum of 40 characters A pattern for a normal long distance call for example would be 1 NXX NXX XXXX Note that the symbols and space are not required and are only used to improve the readability of this example NUMBER TYPE Lists valid selections when you press lt Enter gt Selections include LOCAL NATIONAL INTERNATIONAL PRIVATE and UNKNOWN AUTOMATIC ROUTEBACK REJECT
156. Meaning N A Card is not able to determine the status of the digital call resource AVAILABLE Indicates this resource is available for use as a digital call IN USE Indicates this resource is currently being used in a digital call TESTING Indicates this resource is in a test mode and may be unavailable for use DISABLED Indicates this resource has been disabled for use as a digital call resource System resource usage for analog and digital call resources can be viewed under the SYSTEM STATUS menu of the ATLAS This menu provides detailed resource availability Win information for each resource type including hourly average available minimum avail able and number of times there were no available resources of a particular type OPERATION Write security 3 Read security 5 Selects the mode of operation for the particular digital call resource The following selections are permissible Operation Mode Meaning ENABLED Indicates the selected digital resource is available for use as an analog call resource in the system DISABLED Indicates this resource is not available for use as a digital call resource in the system If a call is active on this resource when changing the operation to DISABLED it will be immediately terminated AUTO DISABLED Indicates this resource will not be available for use as a digital call resource once the current call has been completed 2001 ADTRAN Inc ATLAS 890 System Manual 612003
157. NG session 2001 ADTRAN Inc ATLAS 890 System Manual 61200321L1 1A ATLAS 890 Section 4 User Interface Guide Page 66 of 234 BONDING The remaining channels were brought up successfully and the BONDING session is now ready to pass data TERMINATED The BONDING session has been terminated for some reason and is in the process of freeing BONDING resources NUMBCHANNELS Read security 5 Displays the number of bearer channels used in this BONDING session When the number is displayed in the format X Y Y is the number of BONDING resources reserved for this ses sion and X is the number of calls belonging to this session that are up If just a number is dis played then all calls are up and the number displayed is the number of BONDING resources in use for this session DATA RATE Read security 5 Displays the data rate for this BONDING session The number in the parenthesis is the data rate of the individual bearer channels BONDED EP Read security 5 Displays the slot and port of the terminating endpoint that is using this BONDING session CONFIGURATION Write security 3 Read security 5 All of the following configurable parameters apply to the IMUX 56 64 Resource Module In most applications the default values will be correct TXINIT TIMER Specifies the length of time the originating endpoint attempts to detect the BONDING negotiation pattern from the answering endpoint before
158. O No alarm DSO D D channel alarm ISDN F Frame alarm packet T TBOP alarm packet P PPP alarm packet TSO STATUS Read security 5 Indicates usage on a TSO basis for each port as follows Idle Inactive Active call on this TSO Active D channel TSO Framing TSO Maintenance TSO Dedicated TSO Off hook detected Ringing detected Doz z noD Signaling 2001 ADTRAN Inc ATLAS 890 System Manual 61200321L1 1A ATLAS 890 Section 4 User Interface Guide Page 48 of 234 SIG STATUS PORT 1 THROUGH 4 Read security 5 Displays the state of the A B C D signaling bits for the Quad E1 PRA Option Module Dashes indicate TSOs where signaling is not being transferred by the ATLAS 890 PERFORMANCE CURR Write security 5 Read security 5 The performance fields either current 15 minute total or 24 hour total provide status on key per formance measures as specified in G 821 and RFC 1406 for the EI PRA port as follows PRT Displays the port number CLR Clears performance information for the selected port Es Errored Second ES is a second with one or more error events OR one or more Out Of Frame events OR one or more Controlled Slips BES Bursty Errored Second BES is a second with more than one but less than 320 error events SES Severely Errored Second SES is a second with 320 or more error events OR one or more Out Of Frame events UAS Unavailable Second Css Controlled Slip Second
159. ONES Framed Ones ALL ZEROS Framed Zeros QRSS Pseudorandom pattern with suppression of excess zeros QRSS RESULTS Write security 4 Read security 5 Test pattern results that indicate sync and errors of received data pattern CLR Write security 4 Read security 5 Clears test results contained in the QRSS RESULTS field INJ Write security 4 Read security 5 Injects errors into the transmitted test pattern Return receipt of the errors is displayed in the QRSS RESULTS field MODULES MENU QUAD Nx 56 64 OPTION MODULE The ATLAS 890 system controller automatically detects the presence of the Quad Nx 56 64 Option Mod ule when it is installed in the system listed as V35NX To see the menus for the Quad Nx 56 64 Option Module via the terminal menu use the arrow keys to scroll to the MODULES menu and press Enter to access the module choices Refer to the Quad Nx 56 64 Option Module Quick Start Guide for a menu tree containing a complete listing of menus INFO Read security 5 Provides information about the module part number serial number and assembly revision PART NUMBER Read security 5 Displays the part number of the module SERIAL NUMBER Read security 5 Displays the serial number of the module BOARD REVISION Read security 5 Displays the board revision of the installed module 2001 ADTRAN Inc ATLAS 890 System Manual 61200321L1 1A ATLAS 890 Section 4 User Interface
160. P messages which the ATLAS 890 received but deter mined as having errors bad ICMP checksums bad length etc INDESTUNREACHS The number of ICMP Destination Unreachable messages received INTIMEEXCDS The number of ICMP Time Exceeded messages received INPARMPROBS The number of ICMP Parameter Problem messages received INSRCQUENCHS The number of ICMP Source Quench messages received INREDIRECTS The number of ICMP Redirect messages received INECHOS The number of ICMP Echo request messages received INECHOREPS The number of ICMP Echo Reply messages received INTIMESTAMPS The number of ICMP Timestamp request messages received INTIMESTAMPREPS The number of ICMP Timestamp Reply messages received INADDRMASKS The number of ICMP Address Mask Request messages received INADDRMASKREPS The number of ICMP Address Mask Reply messages received OuTMsGs The total number of ICMP messages which this ATLAS 890 attempted to send Note that this counter includes all those counted by ICMPOUTERRORS OUTERRORS The number of ICMP messages which this ATLAS 890 did not send due to problems discovered within ICMP such as a lack of buffers This value should not include errors discovered outside the ICMP layer such as the inability of IP to route the resultant datagram In some implementations there may be no types of error which contribute to this counter s value OUTDESTUNREACHS The number of ICMP Destination Unreachable messages sent OuTTIMEEXCDS The numbe
161. Page 169 of 234 Win You must return to DEDICATED MAPS in the MAIN MENU for changes to take effect FROM SLT Write security 3 Read security 5 Specifies the slot to use for the FROM connection When you select this option a list of all of the slots and the modules installed in the slots displays Select the appropriate slot and press Enter PORT Write security 3 Read security 5 Specifies the port to use for the FROM connection When you select this option a list of ports and module types appears Select the appropriate port and module type and press Enter To SLOT SERVICE Write security 3 Read security 5 Specifies the slot to use for the second end of a connection Select this option and a list of all of the slots and the modules installed in the slots displays Pick the appropri ate slot and press Enter A PKTENDPT or PKTVOICE endpoint may also be selected as the service for the connection PORT Write security 3 Read security 5 Specifies the port to use for the second end of a connection When you select this option a list of ports and module types appears Select the appropriate port and mod ule type and press Enter If a PKTENDPT or PKTVOICE endpoint is selected for the To SLOT SERVICE field the available packet endpoints or packet voice endpoints will display in the drop down menu after pressing Enter FROM CONFIG Write security 3 Read security 5 Specifies the configuration fo
162. Page 4 of 4 ATLAS 890 System Manual 2001 ADTRAN Inc 61200321L1 1A ATLAS 890 Section 5 DLP 009 Page 1 of 4 UPDATING THE FIRMWARE OF AN ATLAS 890 USING XMODEM Introduction The ATLAS 890 supports firmware updates via the ETHERNET port using either TFTP from a network server or the ADMIN or CRAFT interfaces using XMODEM This procedure outlines the steps for a success ful firmware upgrade using the ADMIN or CRAFT interfaces and XMODEM software Tools and Materials Required e VT 100 terminal or PC with VT 100 terminal emulation software e XMODEM software To prevent electrical shock do not install equipment in a wet location or during a W ARNING lightning storm Electronic modules can be damaged by static electrical discharge Before handling modules wear an antistatic discharge wrist strap to prevent damage to electronic di components Place modules in antistatic packing material when transporting or storing When working on modules always place them on an approved antistatic mat that is electrically grounded 2001 ADTRAN Inc ATLAS 890 System Manual 61200321L1 1A ATLAS 890 Section 5 DLP 009 Page 2 of 4 DLP 009 Perform Steps Below in the Order Listed 1 Connect to the ATLAS 890 using the RJ 45 ADMIN or CRAFT interface If you are not already connected to the shelf s ADMIN or CRAFT interface either with a VT 100 compatible terminal or with a PC running VT 100 emulation so
163. Port 1 of the ATLAS 890 in Slot 1 be switched to Port 2 of that same module Assign a unique Source ID e g 7 to Port 1 of the module and then configure Port 2 to only accept calls from that unique Source ID 7 Swap ANI DNIS Swaps the ANI and DNIS numbers received from the network ANI Automatic Num ber Identification is the billing number of the calling party and DNIS Dialed Num ber Identification Service is the called party number Won With this swap the ATLAS 890 switchboard uses ANI to route the call The accept number in the dial plan must use the ANI number not the DNIS number B CHANNEL SELECTION Determines how the ATLAS 890 switchboard uses B channels for call routing The CIRCULAR method can be used for call load balancing among the available B channels on this interface NORMAL Always start with the last channel configured i e for a full PRI channel 23 would be used if available CIRCULAR Contiguous channels from last to first USER TERM PRA This menu allows the user to define option parameters for ports which emulate a PRA connection IFCE CONFIG PRA Write security 3 Read security 5 Specifies the configuration parameters for the endpoint SwiTCH TYPE Defines the type of PRA switch that the ATLAS 890 emulates If connected to another ATLAS 890 both need to be set to the same switch type ATLAS 890 System Manual 2001 ADTRAN Inc 61200321L1 1A ATLAS 890 Section 4 Use
164. RAN Inc 61200321L1 1A ATLAS 890 Section 4 User Interface Guide Page 231 of 234 ring test calls The following selections are available for the TEST CALL menu item PERIOD How often test calls are to be made NEXT TEST TIME The date of the next scheduled test call Min Num DSOs This option will specify the number of DSOs to use for this switched call If this num ber is 1 all calls will be directed to the endpoint and not use a BONDING resource Any number other than 1 will use BONDING resources to inverse multiplex the mul tiple switched channels together MAX NuM DSOS This option will specify the number of DSOs to use for this switched call If this num ber is 1 all calls will be directed to the endpoint and not use a BONDING resource Any number other than 1 will use BONDING resources to inverse multiplex the mul tiple switched channels together DIAL PLAN PACKET VOICE CONNECTIONS NETWORK TERM This menu allows the user to define option parameters for ports configured as network packet voice endpoints IFCE CONFIG Write security 3 Read security 5 Specifies the configuration parameters for the endpoint DLCI Selects the appropriate DLCI for this dial plan entry VoicE PORT Identifies the voice port address of the remote unit FSU 5622s support ports 1 and 2 A remote ATLAS supports ports 1 through 255 CoNrLICT REPORT Describes existing conflicts Potential problems include DLCI unavailab
165. RAN frame relay device to the ATLAS RMT PKT DROPPED Displays the total number of packets lost in the transmit direction traveling from the ATLAS to the remote ADTRAN frame relay device MIN DELAY Displays the minimum round trip delay for the current test period MAX DELAY Displays the maximum round trip delay for the current test period 2001 ADTRAN Inc ATLAS 890 System Manual 61200321L1 1A ATLAS 890 Section 4 User Interface Guide Page 134 of 234 Ava DELAY Displays the average round trip delay for the current test RESET COUNTERS Resets the counters ENDPT COUNT Read security 5 Displays the total number of packet endpoints configured ENDPTS SORT Write security 3 Read security 5 Provides sorting options for the packet endpoints SORTING BY NAME sorts packet endpoints alphabetically by name If you do not want to sort packet endpoints set this option to OFF PACKET CNCTS Write security 3 Read security 5 After packet endpoints are defined they are connected in the packet connects PACKET CNCTS map PACKET CNCTS connects upper layer protocols from packet endpoint to packet endpoint You can think of it as a dedicated map for virtual ports rather than physical ports FROM PEP Write Security 3 Read Security 5 Selects one packet endpoint for the packet connection Packet endpoints created in the packet endpoint configuration are visible o
166. Read security 5 Compares the configuration of controller A and controller B and displays any discrepancies in the comparison and indicates when the controllers are synchronized ATLAS 890 System Manual 2001 ADTRAN Inc 61200321L1 1A ATLAS 890 Section 4 User Interface Guide Page 17 of 234 STANDBY STARTUP MODE Read security 5 Displays the manner in which the standby controller booted INTERCONTROLLER COMMUNICATIONS Read security 5 Displays the status of the Intercontroller Communications Channel ICC gt SYSTEM CONFIG The SYSTEM CONFIG menu allows you to set up the ATLAS 890 operational configuration Figure 5 shows the items included in this menu Telnet Connection 172 22 12 50 Session Edit Options Captura Help y iming Source Sustem Status Backup T Timing Source IN Susten Config JE dress 99 ystem Utility Session Timeout 0 Modules Max Telnet Sessions 12 Packet Manager Ethernet Port Router Admin Port Dedicated Maps Craft Port Circuit Status SNMP Dial Plan Event Logging Rosleg Setu Real Time Clock Access Passwords BONDING Config Alarm Relay Reset lt gt Alarm Relay Threshold Major Ext Input Threshold Enable DACS Alarms DACS Alarms Off A UN A A z i z G A A RCB STAY 10 ALRH 11 ALR 12 ALRM 13 ALRH 14 ALRM 15 AL Rit 16 Ait PS ak ystem Configuration menu Figure 5 System Configuration Menu
167. S Write security 3 Read security 5 Sends the state of the DTE leads to the remote unit whenever any of the leads change state If any leads on the remote unit are set to track a remote signal this option must be enabled The DTE lead states are conveyed using the Inband control channel which must be enabled SIGNAL RTS V 54 511 TEST SELF TEST NETWORK NO DSO NETWORK LOOPBACK ON ACTIVE TEST MAPPED ALARM ACTIVE CTS Follows Off Off Off Off Off Off DCD Off Off Off Off DSR Off Off Off Off Off z Do not care Force On On under all conditions Write security 3 Read security 5 Dials an USSI port that is configured to ignore DTR PRT Read security 5 Displays the port number MODE Write security 3 Read security 5 Configures the dialing mode The following options are available PERSISTENT Redial whenever the call is cleared or if the call fails ONE TIME Attempt the call only once DIAL Write security 0 Read security 0 SRc ID Write security 3 Read security 5 Indicates the SOURCE ID of the number to be dialed Configure this field in the USSI INTER FACE CONFIGURATION section of the DIAL PLAN NUMBER Write security 3 Read security 5 Indicates the number to be dialed Configure this field in the USSI INTERFACE CONFIGURA TION section of the DIAL PLAN ATLAS 890 System Manual 2001 ADTRAN Inc
168. SCRIPTION Write security 3 Read security 5 Contains the user defined text that will be sent to the ATLAS 890 event log when the alarm is triggered LEVEL Write security 3 Read security 5 Defines the event log category for the message associated with the alarm For more details on event log categories refer to Section 7 System Event Logging gt SYSTEM UTILITY Use the SYSTEM UTILITY menu to view and set the system parameters shown in Figure 6 Telnet Connection 172 22 12 50 Serii Edit Capture Help ate Firmware Update Status Config Transfer System Utilization Sus tem Status System Selftest P Sustem Tue Tut Manager Router Dedicated Maps Circuit Status Dial Plan in ATEL Client Telnet Client Client Status Ctrl Switch Schedule Controller Switch Immediate Force Controller Switch lt gt Reboot System lt gt rac tory te ae DURUM lt Alarm Relay Hili B zA BLRM 6 ALRE ALH SCB STBY 10 ALR 11 ALRH 12 ALR 13 ALRH 14 ALRM_15 ALRM 16 RLRH PS Ok p Figure 6 System Utility Menu UPDATE FIRMWARE Write security 1 Read security 5 Updates firmware when ATLAS 890 enhancements are released Two transfer methods are available for use in updating any modules that contain Flash memory including the ATLAS 890 system con troller The first transfer method uses the ATLAS 890 serial Admin port of the system controller and
169. SCRIPTION PIN SIGNAL DESCRIPTION 1 Shield Ground 8 Signal Ground 2 Transmit Data A 9 Transmit Data B 3 Request to Send A 10 Request to Send B 4 Received Data A 11 Received Data B 5 Carrier Detect A 12 Carrier Detect B 6 Transmit Receive Clock A 13 Transmit Received Clock B 7 Ext Transmit Clock A 14 Ext Transmit Clock B 15 Not Used Octal BRI Option Module P N 1200186L2 Each port of the Octal BRI Option Module uses a single RJ 45 jack to connect to a standard BRI U inter face circuit Table 19 shows the network pinout connection The required wiring connection follows CONNECTOR TYPE USOC RJ 45 Table 19 BRI Pinout PIN NAME DESCRIPTION 1 2 3 6 7 8 Unused 4 Ring Ring to and from the Network Interface 5 Tip Tip to and from the Network Interface 2001 ADTRAN Inc ATLAS 890 System Manual 61200321L1 1A ATLAS 890 Section 2 Engineering Guidelines Page 18 of 22 Async 232 Option Module P N 1200182L1 Each Async 232 Interface provides a DB 25 connection as defined in Table 20 using provided adapter cables Table 20 DB 25 Connector Pinout PIN NAME DESCRIPTION 1 Shield Shielded ground connection 2 TXD Transmit data from DTE 3 RXD Receive data to DTE 4 RTS Request to send from DTE 5 CTS Clear to send to DTE 6 DSR Data set ready to DTE 7 GND Ground 8 DCD Data carrier detect to DTE 9 10 11 12 13 Unused n
170. SO ALIGNMENT enabled will only process a call from the switch board on the same DSO that the incoming call was received Example The unit receives an incoming call on DSO 17 The switchboard looks for an interface who has matching accept criteria to the number it received A match is found on inter face Z that has DSO ALIGNMENT enabled This causes interface Z to only process the call if it has DSO 17 available If all matching interfaces have DSO ALIGNMENT enabled and none of those interfaces have DSO 17 available then a busy or fast busy will be returned to the calling party NETWORK TERM NFAS This menu allows the user to define option parameters for ports which terminate a PRI connection from the network IFCE CONFIG NFAS Write security 3 Read security 5 Specifies the configuration parameters for the endpoint SECONDARY INTERFACES Write security 3 Read security 5 Allows the user to define the slot and port locations of the secondary interfaces in the NFAS group ATLAS 890 System Manual 2001 ADTRAN Inc 61200321L1 1A ATLAS 890 Section 4 User Interface Guide Page 201 of 234 Displays the entry number SLOT Configures the slot that the interface is physically connected to PORT Configures the port that the interface is physically connected to INTERFACE NUMBER Configures the NFAS Interface ID associated with the interface The configure ID must match the ID configured by the
171. SPARENT is automatically set as the PROTOCOL CONFIG Write Security 3 Read Security 5 Determines data source and destination The available options depend on the protocol selected CONFLICT Indicates DLCI mismatch FROM Indicates data source To Indicates data destination CNCTS SORT Write Security 3 Read Security 5 Determines the order in which connections are displayed within PACKET CNCTS Options include FROM PKT ENDPT SUBLINK To PKT ENDPT SUBLINK CONNECTION PROTOCOL and OFF FRAME RELAY IQ Write Security 2 Read Security 5 Gathers and stores statistical information in the submenus ENABLE IQ STATS PORT ENABLES CON FIG and VIEW IQ STATISTICS ENABLE IQ STATS Write Security 2 Read Security 5 Globally enables and disables IQ statistics gathering IQ statistics are only gathered when this option is enabled This field defaults to the original setting of 15 MIN 7 DAYS 96 INTS when re enabled 2001 ADTRAN Inc ATLAS 890 System Manual 61200321L1 1A ATLAS 890 Section 4 User Interface Guide Page 136 of 234 PORT ENABLES Write Security 2 Read Security 5 Enables and disables IQ statistics gathering for each port Use the submenus NAME ENABLE ALL SUBLINKS and SUBLINKS to configure the individual ports NAME Displays the port number and name ENABLE Enables and disables IQ statistics gathering for the port identified in NAME ALL SUBLINKS Provides an eas
172. ST MODE The displayed time is in sec onds ATLAS 890 System Manual 2001 ADTRAN Inc 61200321L1 1A ATLAS 890 Section 4 User Interface Guide Page 37 of 234 gt MODULES Write security 3 Read security 5 The MODULES menu provides status information and menu options that allow you to configure and control the installed option modules as well as the network ports see Figure 9 Telnet Connection 172 22 12 50 t Online nfo System Status u SCA Sys Ctr ONLINE On System Config SCB Sys Ctrl Standby Sami d 1 acket Manager Router Dedicated Maps U35Nx L No Response ASYNC232 Response Response Response Response Response Response Response Response Response Response Response Response Response Response Response ONL TNE Online ALRM 16 Circuit Status Dial Plan ocooooooescoe SZZZZZIZ mpm ll ed ed pet peed ed ed pd md Pe ape ape er er ar er ar ar at PP ROO FON CANO OO AU E COND mh z _ z m Y eh eh Figure 9 Modules Menu Ed If you install a module in a slot then want to install a different type of module in the slot you must set this field to EMPTY before selecting another module type If a module is installed the module type automatically shows the name of the installed module and it cannot be set to any other option SLT Read security 5 The ATLAS 890 has four types of slots system controller slots option module slots option mo
173. STRIP MSD set to 1 all digits would be sent toward the network except the leading 9 STRIP MSD does not affect CALL ACCEPT criteria All of the digits including the MSDs that are subsequently stripped are used as accept criterion ATLAS 890 System Manual 2001 ADTRAN Inc 61200321L1 1A ATLAS 890 Section 4 User Interface Guide Page 195 of 234 NETWORK SPECIFIC FACILITY VOICE AND DATA Enables the sending of appropriate information to the PSTN The default for this option is NORMAL and in this case no Network Specific Facility Information Element is sent Unless one of the services listed below is subscribed to the selection should remain set to NORMAL The list below indicates services that may be subscribed to from the PSTN These ser vices require that specific information such as a Network Specific Facility Informa tion Element be sent to the network during call setup e AT amp T SDN e National ISDN INWATS e AT amp T Megacom 800 e Nortel Private Network e AT amp T Megacom e Nortel InWats e AT amp T Accunet e Nortel OutWats e AT amp T Long Distance e Nortel Foreign Exchange e AT amp T International 800 e Nortel Tie Trunk e AT amp T Dial It 900 Multiquest CALLED DIGITS TRANSFERRED Some PRI switches may be provisioned to send only a portion of the called number like DID This menu item allows the ATLAS 890 to know how many digits to expect choose from NONE THREE FOUR SEVEN and ALL The defaul
174. T1s is activated REMOTE STATUS Write security 3 Read security 5 This field indicates the progress of remote loopbacks The following options will display LINE LOOPBACK ACTIVE Remote line loopback is active No Loops ACTIVE Remote line loopbacks are inactive DS1 ALARM STATUS Write security 3 Read security 5 Indicates T1 alarm status 2001 ADTRAN Inc ATLAS 890 System Manual 61200321L1 1A ATLAS 890 Section 4 User Interface Guide Page 114 of 234 PRT Read security 5 Indicates the number of the T1 circuit 1 28 ALARMS Read security 5 Displays the alarm status for each of the 28 T1 circuits An asterisk indicates the presence of an alarm and a dash indicates no alarm The following alarms are monitored RED Loss of Frame or Red Alarm Received T1 cannot be frame synchronized A Red Alarm is indicated when the T1 has been out of frame for 2 5 seconds YELLOW Remote Alarm Indication or Yellow Alarm Receiving RAI signal from far end equip ment indicating that the far end equipment is in red alarm BLUE Alarm Indication Signal or Blue Alarm Receiving alarm indication signal in the T1 payload from far end equipment indicating a problem upstream D CHAN ALR D Channel alarm is only meaningful if T1 is defined as a PRI PRI configuration of a T1 circuit in a T3 bundle requires using one of the HDLC resources provided on the system controller module or an HDLC Option Module
175. TLAS 890 Section 4 User Interface Guide Page 39 of 234 STATE Read security 5 Displays whether the ATLAS 890 controller or selected module is online or offline Even though a module is physically installed it must be marked ONLINE for it to be considered an available resource This parameter allows an installed module to be marked OFFLINE which may be useful in system trou bleshooting If you choose OFFLINE the module will not be in alarm condition but will display OFFLINE While in OFFLINE the STATUS LED will flash green A module will automatically change to the ONLINE state when installed STATUS Read security 5 Displays status information on the installed modules as follows ONLINE The module is enabled and is responding to the system controller s status polls This is the normal response of the system No RESPONSE The module is enabled but is not responding to the system controller s status polls This response indicates a problem in the system or that the module is not properly installed EMPTY The system controller has not detected the presence of a module in the system nor has a module been manually enabled for this option slot OFFLINE The module is installed but has been taken offline by a user The module is still responding to controller polls OFFLINE NO The module is installed but has been taken offline by a user The module RESPONSE is not responding to controller polls Nor SUPPORTED The module is
176. TLAS 890 during communica tion with the ATLAS 890 system controller about a packet voice device The exchange proto col is designed so that no frames should be discarded during this operation A consistent pattern of dropped frames by a given packet voice device may indicate a faulty packet voice device or an overloaded ATLAS 890 system The discarded frame indicated by this value does not reflect network level performance management but indicates an anomalous condition within the ATLAS 890 unit Persis tently dropped frames may indicate a problem with the ATLAS 890 unit or the VCOM module ATLAS 890 System Manual 2001 ADTRAN Inc 61200321L1 1A ATLAS 890 Section 4 User Interface Guide Page 77 of 234 CLEAR Write security 4 Read security 5 Resets the elapsed usage time and frame counters for this packet voice device Ordinarily users won t reset these performance measurements However this feature can be useful when testing that a suspected problem has been resolved and when zeroing the various counters would make observing future events easier Ld Resetting these performance counters has no effect on the performance values accessible via the SNMP network management interface RELOADS Write security 4 Read security 5 Number of times since module reboot that this device has been reloaded due to a failure MODULES MENU ASYNC 232 OPTION MODULE The ATLAS 890 system controller automatical
177. TO FROM connection The following selections may apply to the T3 or T3 with Drop and Insert Option Module depending on the application ATLAS 890 System Manual 2001 ADTRAN Inc 61200321L1 1A ATLAS 890 Section 4 User Interface Guide Page 175 of 234 DSO SELECTION Defines DSOs for a specific T1 in the T3 circuit Use this field to define the DSOs for this connection You can enter the DSOs in several ways For example to enter DSOs one through five enter 1 5 For DSOs one and five enter 1 5 DSO AVAILABLE Indicates which DSOs of the T1 are assigned DSO assignment is based on the fol lowing items DIGIT 0 9 This DSO is available The digit that displays in this field represents the last digit of the DSO number This DSO has been requested for this connection but the DSO is not yet acti vated for this port This DSO is used by this port in this connection and is currently activated S This DSO is used in the switched DIAL PLAN S This DSO is used in the switched DIAL PLAN and conflicts with this connec tion n This DSO is already used in this DEDICATED MAP N This DSO is already used in this DEDICATED MAP and conflicts with this con nection DSO RATE Sets the DSO rate to either 56 or 64 kbps This field is only valid for T1s mapped to a PKT ENDPNT T1 TRUNK CONDITIONING SERVICE Sets known values in the signaling bits and the data field for outgoing DSOs which are cross connected to a T1 p
178. The average utilization the PVC transmitted for the interval or day PVC IA TIME Time in seconds the PVC has been in the inactive state for the interval or day Rx FECN The number of FECNs the PVC has received for the interval or day Tx FECN The number of FECNs the PVC has transmitted for the interval or day Rx BECN The number of BECNs the PVC has received for the interval or day Tx BECN The number of BECNs the PVC has transmitted for the interval or day Rx DE The number of DEs the PVC has received for the interval or day Tx DE The number of DEs the PVC has transmitted for the interval or day Rx CR The number of CRs the PVC has received for the interval or day Tx CR The number of CRs the PVC has transmitted for the interval or day LOST FRAMES The number of lost frames on the PVC for the interval or day Rut Lost FRMS The number of remote lost frames on the PVC for the interval Applies only if IN BAND SEQUENCE NUMBER is ENABLED on the PVC Rx BURST SEC The number of bursty seconds the PVC received for the interval or day Tx BURST SEC The number of bursty seconds the PVC transmitted for the interval or day MIN RX FRAME The minimum frame size the PVC received for the interval or day MAX RX FRAME The maximum frame size the PVC received for the interval or day ATLAS 890 System Manual 2001 ADTRAN Inc 61200321L1 1A ATLAS 890 Section 4 User Interface Guide Page 141 of 234 AvG RX
179. Write security 3 Read Security 5 Defines performance threshold values for DS1 Line and Path statistics If a statistic value exceeds its threshold value then the corresponding Alert Trap will be sent if the alert event is armed and Alert Traps are enabled These thresholds apply to all DS1 interfaces in the system TOTAL The DS1 performance monitor Threshold Value for the Total ES THRSH Errored Seconds ES parameter The default value is 648 for an approximate BER level of 10E 5 TOTAL The DS1 performance monitor Threshold Value for the Total SES THRSH Severely Errored Seconds SES parameter The default value is 100 for an approximate BER level of 10E 5 TOTAL The DS1 performance monitor Threshold Value for the Total SEFS Severely Errored Framing Seconds SEFS parameter The THRSH default value is 17 for an approximate BER level of 10E 5 ATLAS 890 System Manual 2001 ADTRAN Inc 61200321L1 1A ATLAS 890 Section 4 User Interface Guide Page 23 of 234 TOTAL The DS1 performance monitor Threshold Value for the Total UAS THRSH Unavailable Seconds UAS parameter The default value is 10 for an approximate BER level of 10E 5 TOTAL The DS1 performance monitor Threshold Value for the Total CSS THRSH Controlled Slip Seconds CSS parameter The default value is 4 for an approximate BER level of 10E 5 TOTAL The DS1 performance monitor Threshold Value for the Total Path PCV THRSH Code Violations PCV parameter when the L
180. a locked door service personnel only area Power to the ATLAS 890 DC system must be from a reliably grounded 48 VDC source UT which is electrically isolated from the AC source The branch circuit overcurrent protection shall be a fuse or circuit breaker rated min imum 60 VDC maximum 10A e Maximum recommended ambient operating temperature is 45 C 6 MOUNTING OPTIONS The ATLAS 890 Base Unit may be installed for tabletop or 19 inch or 23 inch rackmount The rackmount brackets included with the Base Unit can be used in 19 inch or 23 inch applications For a rackmount installation the ATLAS 890 Base Unit allows flush face mount face forward mount center mount and rear mount product Be careful not to upset the stability of the equipment mounting rack when installing this UT ATLAS 890 System Manual 2001 ADTRAN Inc 61200321L1 1A ATLAS 890 Section 3 Network Turnup Procedure Page 5 of 8 7 INSTALLING NETWORK AND OPTION MODULES Figure 1 shows the option slot numbering designation as viewed from the rear of the ATLAS 890 The functionally identical option slots only accept ATLAS 800 Series option modules and the controller slots only accept ATLAS 890 controller modules Modules or Modules Power Supply Controllers io wile or so a O a Hp Power Supply pino onus ea cor ONLY ALLEM ETY SIOTS MUST BE COVERED W TH BIANK PANEIS ISTAULIOR ERIERBETNOO SiO Te CAUTDN
181. a PKT ENDPNT E1 TROUBLE CODE SERVICE Sets known values in the signaling bits and the data field for outgoing TSOs which are cross connected to a El port experiencing alarms The trunk conditioning process consists of a 2 5 second transmission indicating call termination followed by a continuous transmission signaling the final condi tion as chosen by the user Set the E1 TROUBLE CODE SERVICE field to OFF or VOICE T1 TROUBLE CODE VALUE Displays the Hex value of the 2 5 second pre alarm transmission gt DEDICATED MAPS QUAD Nx 56 64 OPTION MODULE CONNECTS Write security 3 Read security 5 Enters the dedicated map connections Press lt Enter gt to activate the submenus To FROM CONFIG Write security 3 Read security 5 Specifies the configuration for the FROM connection The following selections may apply to the Quad Nx 56 64 Option Module depending on the application DSO SELECTION Defines DSOs for an Nx port Use this field to define the DSOs for this connection This field only applies to Nx to Nx or Nx to Pkt Endpt connections DSO RATE Sets the DSO rate to either 56 or 64 kbps gt DEDICATED MAPS QUAD USSI OPTION MODULE CONNECTS Write security 3 Read security 5 Enters the dedicated map connections Press lt Enter gt to activate the submenus To FROM CONFIG Write security 3 Read security 5 Specifies the configuration for the FROM connection The following selections may 2001
182. ably transfer data Review the current setting for system timing source in the SYSTEM CONFIG menu See Primary Timing Source and Backup Timing Source on page 17 for details RESOURCE USAGE Write security 5 Read security 5 Provides resource usage tracking for dynamic resources throughout the system This includes current average and minimum availability for both analog and digital resources DATA TABLES Read security 5 Displays resource usage for dynamic resources throughout the system in a table format RESOURCE TYPE Displays types of dynamically allocated resources being tracked throughout the system Examples are ANALOG analog modem resource DIGITAL digital call resource and PKT VOICE packet voice compression resource CURRENT Shows the number of resources available not in use and the total number of resources If a resource is taken offline it is not included in the total AVERAGE Shows the average number of resources available since the statistics were last reset MIN Shows the fewest number of resources available since the last reset ATLAS 890 System Manual 2001 ADTRAN Inc 61200321L1 1A ATLAS 890 Section 4 User Interface Guide Page 15 of 234 0 ZERO AVAIL Provides a count of the number of times the quantity of available resources reached 0 HR DATA Displays the AVERAGE MINIMUM and 0 AVAILABLE data broken down in hour increments for a 24 hour period RESET Write security 4 Read
183. address that is unique for every device that gets connected to a LAN Devices on the LAN use these addresses to update routing tables Mbps Mega bits per second A measure of the amount of information travelling across a network or com munications link 2001 ADTRAN Inc ATLAS 890 System Manual 61200321L1 1A ATLAS 890 Glossary Page 8 of 12 MIB Management information base The MIB is an index to the organized data stored within a network device Law A companding standard for converting between analog and digital in a PCM system u Law is mainly used in North America A Law is the European equivalent multiplexer A device mux that takes several low speed channels and merges them into one high speed channel at one end of a link Another multiplexer at the other end of the link reverses this process N391 Defines how many link integrity polls occur before a full status poll One out of the number defined in N391 is a full status poll Default is 6 N392 Defines how many bad polls can occur within an N393 window before the link is declared down N393 Defines the number of polls that make up the window used by N392 to determine if a link is opera tional NNI A standard interface between two frame relay switches nonvolatile memory Any form of memory that retains its contents when power is removed for example ROM EPROM etc NTI Network termination 1 A unit that provides physical and electromagnetic termina
184. ailable due to physical or frame relay outage SiG DOWN TIME Time in seconds the signaling state has been down SIGNAL ERROR The number of PVC signaling frames received with protocol violations SIGNAL T O The number of PVC signal time outs Either T391 seconds elapsed without receiving a response to a poll or T392 seconds elapsed without receiving a poll SIG STATE CHG The number of state changes for the PVC signaling protocol This number includes transitions from down state to up state and vice versa RX FULL STAT The number of PVC signaling full status frames received TX FULL STAT The number of PVC signaling full status frames transmitted RX LI ONLY The number of PVC signaling link integrity only frames received TX LI ONLY The number of PVC signaling link integrity only frames transmitted ASYNC STATUS The number of single PVC status frames received DISCARD FRAME The number of frames discarded by the IQ unit ABORTS The number of frames received without proper flag termination CRC ERROR The number of frames received with CRC errors OCTET ALIGN The number of frames received with a bit count not divisible by eight LENGTH ERROR The number of frames received that are less than 5 bytes or greater than 4500 bytes ATLAS 890 System Manual 2001 ADTRAN Inc 61200321L1 1A ATLAS 890 Section 4 User Interface Guide Page 139 of 234 EA VIOLATION The number of frames received with errors
185. aling state on this packet endpoint The possible states are defined below UP Indicates that there is active frame relay signaling on this endpoint The packet endpoint must be defined by the frame relay configuration settings to show active frame relay signaling ATLAS 890 System Manual 2001 ADTRAN Inc 61200321L1 1A ATLAS 890 Section 4 User Interface Guide Page 121 of 234 DOWN The packet endpoint stays in this state only when the physical line is down SIG STATE PPP Read security 5 Indicates the status of the PPP negotiation The possible states are defined below INITIAL This is the first state of LCP negotiation If the packet endpoint is connected to a physical port in the DEDICATED MAP this state will usually transition to the STARTING state to begin the PPP negotiation STARTING The packet endpoint stays in this state only when the physical line is down REQ SENT The packet endpoint has sent an LCP configuration request to the peer and is wait ing for an acknowledge ACK RECVD The packet endpoint has received an acknowledge from the peer for the sent configuration request ACK SENT The packet endpoint has acknowledged the peer s configuration request but the peer has not acknowledged us OPENED LCP negotiation on the packet endpoint has finished authentication if enabled occurs now CLOSING The packet endpoint has sent the peer a terminate request and is waiting
186. an in applications where the criterion for switching calls to a certain endpoint is a function of which endpoint originated the call DEFAULT VALUE 0 Zero is the default ID for all endpoints and all accept num bers With default values all calls are routed based only on the dialed number Multiple endpoints can have the same SOURCE ID When creating the CALL ACCEPT list specify a SOURCE ID s as well as a dialed number or range of dialed numbers to accept Example An application requires that all calls that originate from Port 1 of the ATLAS 890 in ATLAS 890 System Manual 2001 ADTRAN Inc 61200321L1 1A ATLAS 890 Section 4 User Interface Guide Page 207 of 234 Slot 1 be switched to Port 2 of that same module Assign a unique Source ID e g 7 to Port 1 of the module and then configure Port 2 to only accept calls from that unique Source ID 7 Swap ANI DNIS Swaps the ANI and DNIS numbers received from the network ANI Automatic Num ber Identification is the billing number of the calling party and DNIS Dialed Num ber Identification Service is the called party number Ld With this swap the ATLAS 890 switchboard uses ANI to route the call The accept number in the dial plan must use the ANI number not the DNIS number B CHANNEL SELECTION Determines how the ATLAS 890 switchboard uses B channels for call routing The CIRCULAR method can be used for call load balancing among the available B channels
187. and still have all of those devices ring when your number is called In most areas the sum of the RENs of all devices should not exceed five To be certain of the number of devices you may connect to your line as determined by the REN call your telephone company to determine the maximum REN for your calling area This equipment may not be used on coin service provided by the telephone company Connection to party lines is subject to state tariffs Contact your state public utility commission or corporation com mission for information ATLAS 890 System Manual 2001 ADTRAN Inc Federal Communications Commission Radio Frequency Interference Statement This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment This equipment generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and if not installed and used in accordance with the instruc tion manual may cause harmful interference to radio frequencies Operation of this equipment in a resi dential area is likely to cause harmful interference in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at his own expense Win Shielded cables must be used with this unit to ensure compliance with Class A FCC limits Changes or modifications to this unit n
188. ar end equipment indicating a problem upstream YELLOW Remote Alarm Indication or Yellow Alarm Receiving RAI signal from far end equip ment indicating that the far end equipment is in red alarm FE ALARMS Read security 5 Displays received alarms from the far end equipment C BIT Read security 5 Indicates whether C Bit framing is being used on the T3 circuit An asterisk indicates the presence of C Bit framing and a dash indicates no C Bit framing present ATLAS 890 System Manual 2001 ADTRAN Inc 61200321L1 1A ATLAS 890 Section 4 User Interface Guide Page 101 of 234 DS3 PERF CURRENT Write security 3 Read security 5 The performance fields either current 15 minute total or 24 hour total provide status on key per formance measures as specified in ANSI T1 231 1993 for DS3 interfaces PRT Displays the port number CLR Clears performance information for the selected port Es L Errored Seconds Line Count of seconds containing excessive zeros LOS or BPVs not due to line code substitutions SES L Severely Errored Seconds Line Count of seconds containing excessive zeros LOS or BPVs not due to line code substitutions above a predetermined threshold LosS L Loss of Signal Second Line Count of seconds of LOS condition CV P Code Violation Path For the M13 applications an accumulation of P bit parity errors For the C bit parity application an accumulation of CP bit pa
189. are available for use in the ATLAS 890 system DS1S PASSED THRU Read security 5 This field shows the number of T1s from the T3 circuit in the primary interface that are being passed out the drop and insert secondary interface to other equipment T1 PAIR 1 2 THROUGH T1 PAIR 27 28 Write security 3 Read security 5 These fields indicate which pairs of T1s of the T3 circuit connected to the primary interface are selected to be dropped or passed through to the secondary interface DS3 ALARM STATUS Read security 5 Indicates the current alarm status of the primary and secondary T3 interfaces PRT Read security 5 Indicates the port number ALARMS Read security 5 Displays the alarm status for the T3 circuit An asterisk indicates the presence of an alarm and a dash indicates no alarm The following alarms are monitored LOS Loss of Signal There is no T3 signal detected on the port interface RED Loss of Frame or Red Alarm Received T3 cannot be frame synchronized A Red Alarm is indicated when the T3 has been out of frame for 2 5 seconds BLUE Alarm Indication Signal or Blue Alarm Receiving alarm indication signal in the T3 payload from far end equipment indicating a problem upstream YELLOW Remote Alarm Indication or Yellow Alarm Receiving RAI signal from far end equip ment indicating that the far end equipment is in red alarm FE ALARMS Read security 5 Displays received alarms
190. average available minimum avail able and number of times there were no available resources of a particular type ATLAS 890 System Manual 2001 ADTRAN Inc 61200321L1 1A ATLAS 890 Section 4 User Interface Guide Page 93 of 234 Bit RATE Read security 5 Displays the bit rate of the digital resource for a currently active call If the digital resource is not in use this field displays N A DIGITAL RSRC CONNECTION STATS Write security 5 Read security 5 Displays the connection statistics for the digital resources available on the Modem 16 Option Module RSRC Read security 5 Indicates the resource number of the digital call resource On the Modem 16 Option Module analog resources are numbered 1 16 and digital ISDN resources are num bered 17 32 ATTEMPTS Read security 5 Displays the number of connections attempted for this digital resource since the last reset COMPLETED Read security 5 Displays the number of successful connections for this digital resource FAILURES Read security 5 Displays the number of unsuccessful connections for this digital resource It is defined as the number of connection attempts minus the number of successful connections 56K CONNECTS Read security 5 Displays the number of successful connections at 56 kbps for this digital resource 64K CONNECTS Read security 5 Displays the number of successful connections at 64 kbps for this digital resource RESET STATS
191. aying test pattern status the display string is composed of pattern sync status and errored seconds NONE No sync LOS Sync has been lost SYNC Pattern is synchronized ES Number of seconds with at least one bit error CLR Write security 3 Read security 5 Clears error counters on test pattern results menu INJ Write security 3 Read security 5 Injects errors into transmitted test pattern T3 Module pai 1 Payload Loopback N ale Framer 1 ob T3 Line Loopback iy gt M3 T3 l Mux Front T3 Line p Uu End T1 Framer 28 Figure 12 Network Loopback Tests ATLAS 890 System Manual 2001 ADTRAN Inc 61200321L1 1A ATLAS 890 Section 4 User Interface Guide Page 109 of 234 gt MODULES MENU T3 WITH DROP AND INSERT OPTION MODULE The ATLAS 890 system controller automatically detects the presence of the T3 with Drop and Insert Option Module when it is installed in the system listed as DS3 D amp l To see the menus for the T3 with Drop and Insert Option Module via the terminal menu use the arrow keys to scroll to the MODULES menu and press Enter to access the module choices Refer to the T3 with Drop and Insert Option Module Quick Start Guide for a menu tree containing a complete listing of menus INFO Read security 5 Provides information about the module part number ser
192. below gives a brief description of each level Select level If you want the user to Have read only permission for all menu items minimum rights 4 Have read permission for all menu items and permission to use test commands 3 Have access to all commands except passwords flash download authentication methods and interface configurations 2 Have access to all commands except passwords flash download and authentication methods 1 Have access to all commands except passwords 0 Have permission to edit every menu item including creating and editing passwords maximum rights ATLAS 890 System Manual 2001 ADTRAN Inc 61200321L1 1A ATLAS 890 Section 5 DLP 008 Page 3 of 4 T Assign the password level to the appropriate label by selecting the Access RIGHTS field and choosing the level decided upon in step 6 8 Personalize the password for the appropriate label by selecting the PAsswoRD field press ing Enters then typing the desired password Passwords for the ATLAS 890 system are case sensitive The default password for a new user pro file is password The current password displays as a series of asterisks Follow up Procedures Once this procedure is complete return to the procedure which referred you to this DLP and continue with the tasks indicated there 2001 ADTRAN Inc ATLAS 890 System Manual 61200321L1 1A ATLAS 890 Section 5 DLP 008
193. bor INTERFACE Shows the interface to which the neighbor is connected gt DEDICATED MAPS The DEDICATED MAPS menu assigns dedicated connections between any two ports in the ATLAS 890 Base Unit This section describes the DEDICATED MAPS menu items see Figure 15 These options are module dependent that is the menu items available depend on the module selected Telnet Connection 172 22 12 50 Sonin Edit Options Capture Help ap AU Sucten Status Current Map Map 1 System Config Create Edit Maps System Utility Modules Packet Manager Router Vedicated Maps ircuit Status Dial Plan A UN A A i i 6 f A SERAIS 10 ALRH 11 AL Rit 12 it 13 ALR 14 ALR 15 ALRH 16 AL RI P Figure 15 Dedicated Maps Menu ACTIVATE MAP Write security 3 Read security 5 Activates a dedicated map automatically or manually You can have up to five different dedicated 2001 ADTRAN Inc ATLAS 890 System Manual 61200321L1 1A ATLAS 890 Section 4 User Interface Guide Page 168 of 234 maps each with an optionally specified name The configuration choices are AUTO Automatically activates a particular dedicated map at the time and day specified in the ACTIVATE TIME field MAPS 1 THROUGH 5 Allows you to manually activate a specific dedicated map To manually activate a dedicated map highlight the ACTIVATE MAP field and press Enter Choose the desired dedicated map from the popup menu list CURRENT MAP
194. c ATLAS 890 System Manual 61200321L1 1A ATLAS 890 Section 4 User Interface Guide Page 76 of 234 ATLAS DROP Write security 4 Read security 5 Counter measures each frame that is dropped or discarded during communication between the the ATLAS 890 and the packet voice device i e ATLAS Frames Dropped The exchange protocol is designed so that no frames should be discarded during this operation A consistent pattern of dropped frames by a given packet voice device may indicate a faulty packet voice device or an overloaded ATLAS 890 system The discarded frame indicated by this value does not reflect network level performance management but indicates an anomalous condition within the ATLAS 890 unit Persis tently dropped frames may indicate a problem with the ATLAS 890 unit or the Voice Compression Resource Module VCOM FRMS Write security 4 Read security 5 Counts every frame successfully sent to or received from the ATLAS 890 system controller This is an indication of activity but does not indicate the actual amount of packet data exchanged The following equation gives the total number of frames handled for this packet voice device by the ATLAS 890 Framesycoyro Framesycoy Framesycompropped See the VCOM DROP definition below for a description of the term Framesycoypyoppea VCOM Drop Write security 4 Read security 5 Counter that measures each frame dropped or discarded by A
195. call type gt LT Tried to call unregistered SPID lt spid gt WARNING SPID Unregistration attempted D channel is DOWN MAJOR D Channel Down lt message gt Incorrectly formatted cause IE MAJOR _ Incorrectly formatted IE BRI NT Spid lt spid gt was rejected MAJOR SPID Failed BRI NT SPID Negotiations failed resetting MAJOR _ SPID Negotiation failed the link BRI LT SPID lt spid gt received NOT IN MAJOR Unknown SPID received LIST BRI NT SPID Negotiations failed Retrying MINOR SPID Retry in progress Configured BRI as LT NORMAL BRI LT configuration successful Configured BRI as NT NORMAL BRI NT configuration successful Rejected an incoming call for an unregistered NORMAL Call Rejected SPID D channel is UP NORMAL D Channel Up Released No longer an ISDN line NORMAL ISDN line released No outgoing B channel available for call to NORMAL No B channels for call number Configured PRI as central office emulator NORMAL PRI CO configuration successful ATLAS 890 System Manual 2001 ADTRAN Inc 61200321L1 1A ATLAS 890 Section 6 System Event Logging Page 11 of 16 Table 7 ISDN Events Continued Console Log String Category Event Configured PRI as CPE NORMAL PRI CPE configuration successful BRI NT Spid lt spid gt registered NORMAL SPID registered BRI LT All SPIDs registered NORMAL SPID Registration complet
196. can track up to 10 000 PIVs The PIV is derived from the Max Number of Days and Max Number of Intervals selected by the user Changing one affects the other PRI Primary Rate ISDN An ISDN service that provides 23 B bearer channels 64 kbps each for data transmission and 1 D data channel 64 kbps for signaling and control PVC Permanent Virtual Circuit Virtual circuit within the frame relay network that has all bandwidth parameters permanently defined upon ordering the circuit QOS Quality of service A means of guaranteeing available bandwidth under normal operating conditions Remote Access The ability to connect to non local communications equipment 2001 ADTRAN Inc ATLAS 890 System Manual 61200321L1 1A ATLAS 890 Glossary Page 10 of 12 RIP Routing Information Protocol A protocol used to exchange routing information among a set of com puters connected by a LAN RIP uses hop count as a routing metric robbed bit signaling A type of in band signaling used with voice transmissions for multiplexing multiple voice circuits onto a T1 Router An interface which finds the best path between two networks Routers forward packets from one net work to another based on network layer information Routing Metric The method by which a routing algorithm determines that one route is better than another This infor mation is stored in routing tables Such tables include reliability delay bandwidth load MTUs com mu
197. cess granted to a user The lowest level of access Level 5 is read only and allows a user to see but not change the current configuration of the system The top level of access Level 0 is read write and allows the user to both see and change system con figuration parameters After initial login the System Administrator is now able to define levels of access for various users See DLP 008 Adding Removing Users and Changing Password Security Levels for more details ATLAS 890 System Manual 2001 ADTRAN Inc 61200321L1 1A ATLAS 890 Section 5 DLP 006 Page 3 of 4 Upon entering the correct password the ATLAS 890 MAIN MENU is displayed as shown below ATLAS 890 HyperTerminal p File Edit View Call Transfer Help lol x ATLAS 890 System Info System Info System Status System Config System Utility Modules Packet Manager Router Dedicated Maps Circuit Status Dial Plan System Name System Location System Contact Firmware Revision System Uptime Startup Mode Current Time Date 24h Installed Memory Serial Number Boot ROM Rev ATLAS 890 Adtran ATLAS 890 Adtran ATLAS 890 A0012 04 20 01 08 37 44 1 days 3 hours 951 min Power cycle 43 secs Tuesday May 8 12 55 48 29001 2 ines bytes DRAM 16777216 byte 8 00 03 03 06 01 6 ALRM 8 15 16 PS OK System Information menu Z help 12 55_ Connected 0 02 03 vT100 fasooeN SCROLL CAPS NUM Capt
198. ch severely errored frame or AIS signal is received SES P Severely Errored Seconds Path An accumulation of seconds during which parity errors severely errored frames or AIS signal is received UAS P Unavailable Seconds Path An accumulation of one second intervals during which the DS3 path is unavailable i e 10 contiguous SES Ps DS3 PERF 15 MIN Write security 3 Read security 5 In the DS3 PERF 15 MIN menu the performance data for the previous 15 minute window is stored Refer to DS3 Perf Current above for a detailed description 2001 ADTRAN Inc ATLAS 890 System Manual 61200321L1 1A ATLAS 890 Section 4 User Interface Guide Page 112 of 234 DS3 PERF 24 HR Write security 3 Read security 5 Stores the performance data for the previous 24 hour window Refer to DS3 Perf Current on page 111 for a detailed description DS3 CONFIGURATION Write security 3 Read security 5 Includes all of the configurable parameters pertaining to the primary and secondary T3 interfaces PRT Read security 5 Indicates the port number PORT NAME Write security 3 Read security 5 Enter any text up to 16 characters to uniquely identify the T3 port on the T3 Option Module FRAME Write security 3 Read security 5 Configures the framing format for the T3 circuit Selections are M13 or C Bir TX CLOCK Write security 3 Read security 5 Selects the source of the T3 transmit clock The fol
199. chable 6 foot power cord with a 3 prong plug for connecting to a grounded power receptacle As shipped the ATLAS 890 is set to factory default condi tions After installing the Base Unit and any option modules the ATLAS 890 is ready for power up To power up the unit ensure that the unit is properly connected to an appropriate power source and turn on the unit using the on off switch on the rear panel 2001 ADTRAN Inc ATLAS 890 System Manual 61200321L1 1A ATLAS 890 Section 3 Network Turnup Procedure Page 4 of 8 This unit shall be installed in accordance with Article 400 and 364 8 of the NEC NFPA 70 when installed outside of a Restricted Access Location i e central office behind a locked door service personnel only area Power to the ATLAS 890 AC system must be from a grounded 90 130 VAC 50 60 Hz source The power receptacle uses double pole neutral fusing Maximum recommended ambient operating temperature is 45 C DC Powered Systems The DC powered ATLAS 890 comes equipped with a DC Power supply to furnish the voltages necessary for proper backplane operation As shipped the ATLAS 890 is set to factory default conditions After installing the Base Unit and any option modules the ATLAS 890 is ready for power up e This unit shall be installed in accordance with Article 400 and 364 8 of the NEC NFPA 70 when installed outside of a Restricted Access Location i e central office behind
200. cket counts SUBLINK STATS FRAME RELAY Write security 3 Read security 5 Displays frame relay performance statistics for supported packet endpoint sublinks These statistic fields reflect the total count since cleared These settings are not appli cable for PPP or TBOP NAME User defined name of a sublink PVC DLCI Local address for each PVC as assigned by the carrier STATE Indicates if this particular sublink PVC has been defined as active by a full status poll and also indicates if the PVC is in backup mode ACTIVE PVC is active INACTIVE PVC is inactive ACTIVE BU PVC is active but in backup mode INACTIVE BU PVC is inactive and in backup mode Tx PCKTS Total number of frame relay user data packets transmitted over this PVC Rx PCKTS Total number of frame relay user data packets received over this PVC ATLAS 890 System Manual 2001 ADTRAN Inc 61200321L1 1A ATLAS 890 Section 4 User Interface Guide Page 125 of 234 CONFIG STATISTICS Provides additional information as follows on the individual sublink RESET COUNTERS Resets all sublink counters FECN COUNT Total number of FECN bits received on this PVC BECN COUNT Total number of BECN bits received on this PVC DE DISCARD COUNT Total number of Discard Eligible bits that have been received on this PVC Write security 3 Read security 5 Creates and configures packet endpoints ENDPNT NAME Write securi
201. control port input provides the follow ing functions e Accepts EIA 232 input from a PC or a modem for controlling the ATLAS 890 e Operates at 2400 9600 19200 or 38400 bps e Acts as input for either VT 100 or PC control e Acts as an interface for flash memory software downloads using XMODEM The Admin connection follows and Table 4 shows the pinout CONNECTOR TYPE RJ 48C PART NUMBER AMP 555164 2 Table 4 Admin In Pinout PIN NAME DESCRIPTION 1 GND Ground connected to unit chassis 2 RTS Request to send flow control 3 RXDATA Data received by the ATLAS 890 4 DTR Data terminal ready 5 TXDATA Data transmitted by the ATLAS 890 6 CD Carrier detect 7 UNUSED 8 CTS Clear to send flow control 10 100BaseT Connection The 10 100BaseT port RJ 48C provides a 10 100BaseT Ethernet LAN connection which is used for IP Routing TFTP SNMP and Telnet connections The network connection follows and Table 5 shows the pinout CONNECTOR TYPE USOC RJ 48C PART NUMBER AMP 555164 2 Table 5 Ethernet Pinout PIN NAME DESCRIPTION 1 TX1 Transmit Positive TX2 Transmit Negative RX1 Receive Positive ATLAS 890 System Manual 2001 ADTRAN Inc 61200321L1 1A ATLAS 890 Section 2 Engineering Guidelines Page 9 of 22 Table 5 Ethernet Pinout Continued PIN NAME DESCRIPTION 4 5 UNUSED 6 RX2 Receive Negative 7 8 UNUSED
202. ctivate again CRAFT Port Use the CRAFT port to configure the system via an EIA 232 connection The connector type is shown below and Table 1 gives the CRAFT port pinout CONNECTOR TYPE RJ 48C PART NUMBER AMP 555164 2 Table 1 CRAFT Port Pinout PIN NAME DESCRIPTION 1 2 UNUSED 3 RXDATA Data received by the ATLAS 890 4 UNUSED 5 TXDATA Data transmitted by the ATLAS 890 6 7 UNUSED 8 UNUSED Front Panel LEDs With the ATLAS 890 powered up the front panel LEDs provide visual information about the status of the ATLAS 890 and any option modules that may be installed Table 2 provides a brief description of the front panel features and Table 3 on page 5 provides detailed information about the LEDs Table 2 ATLAS 890 Front Panel Description Feature Description SYSTEM STATUS LEDS Displays the status of the fans alarm and ACO buttons for ATLAS 890 See Table 3 on page 5 Fans Indicates the fans are operational Alarm Indicates a triggered alarm condition for the alarm relays ACO Indicates the alarm cut off switch is pressed ATLAS 890 System Manual 2001 ADTRAN Inc 61200321L1 1A ATLAS 890 Section 2 Engineering Guidelines Page 5 of 22 Table 2 ATLAS 890 Front Panel Description Continued Feature Description CONTROLLER MODULE Displays the status of the network interface See Table 3 All LEDs are LEDS off
203. cular type OPERATION Write security 3 Read security 5 Selects the mode of operation for the particular analog call resource The following selections are permissible Operation Mode Meaning ENABLED Indicates the selected analog resource is available for use as an analog call resource in the system DISABLED Indicates this resource is not available for use as an analog call resource in the system If a call is active on this resource when changing the operation to DISABLED it will be immediately terminated AUTO DISABLED Indicates this resource will not be available for use as an analog call resource once the current call has been completed HARDWARE RESET Write security 3 Read security 5 Reset a specific analog resource on the modem module Any calls currently active will be dropped DIGITAL RSRC Write security 5 Read security 5 Displays the configuration parameters for the digital resources available on the option module RSRC Read security 5 Indicates the resource number of the digital call resource On the Modem 16 Option Module analog resources are numbered 1 16 and digital ISDN resources are num bered 17 32 STATUS Read security 5 Indicates the current status of the particular digital call resource The status display ATLAS 890 System Manual 2001 ADTRAN Inc 61200321L1 1A ATLAS 890 Section 4 User Interface Guide Page 97 of 234 values are listed below Display Value
204. d last manual or scheduled test FAILED Failed last manual or scheduled test ATLAS 890 System Manual 2001 ADTRAN Inc 61200321L1 1A ATLAS 890 Section 4 User Interface Guide Page 181 of 234 PASS FAIL Read security 5 Displays the number of successful and unsuccessful test calls made through this dedicated dial backup circuit TEST NOW Write security 5 Read security 5 Press to initiate a test call on the dedicated dial backup circuit gt DIAL PLAN The DIAL PLAN submenus set global ATLAS 890 switch parameters as well as individual parameters for each ATLAS 890 port handling a switched call see Figure 16 The individual ports are separated into two port types network and user Network ports terminate a connection from the network User ports terminate incoming calls and in turn may be connected to user equipment Telnet Connection 172 22 12 50 ystem Info System Status System Config System Utility Modules Packet Manager Router Dedicated Maps Circuit Status Vial Plan User Term Global Param EH ALRE ALRI ii SCB STBY 10 ALRM 11 8LRM 12 ALRH Figure 17 Dial Plan Menu NETWORK TERM Write security 3 Read security 5 This menu allows the user to define option parameters for ports which terminate a connection from the network 2001 ADTRAN Inc ATLAS 890 System Manual 61200321L1 1A ATLAS 890 Section 4 User Interface Guide Page 182 of 234
205. d security 5 Enters the dedicated map connections Press lt Enter gt to activate the submenus To FROM CONFIG Write security 3 Read security 5 Specifies the configuration for the TO FROM connection The following selections may apply to the Quad E1 PRA Option Module depending on the application TSO SELECTION Defines TSOs for an E1 port Use this field to define the TSOs for this connection You can enter the TSOs in several ways For example to enter TSOs one through five enter 1 5 For TSOs one and five enter 1 5 TSO AVAILABLE Indicates which TSOs of the E1 are assigned TSO assignment is based on the fol lowing items DIGIT 0 9 This TSO is available The digit that displays in this field represents the last digit of the TSO number This TSO has been requested for this connection but the TSO is not yet acti vated for this port This TSO is used by this port in this connection and is currently activated S This TSO is used in the switched DIAL PLAN S This TSO is used in the switched DIAL PLAN and conflicts with this connec tion n This TSO is already used in this DEDICATED MAP N This TSO is already used in this DEDICATED MAP and conflicts with this con nection ATLAS 890 System Manual 2001 ADTRAN Inc 61200321L1 1A ATLAS 890 Section 4 User Interface Guide Page 173 of 234 TSO RATE Sets the TSO rate to either 56 or 64 kbps This field is only valid for E1 ports mapped to
206. dded if only seven digits are sup plied This action may be required in areas with ten digit local dialing ISDN SUBSCRIBER PREFERRED Examines the incoming number and if seven digits are received or if a ten digit number is received with an area code that matches the area code provisioned in the global parameters the number is forwarded to the network as a seven digit number defined as ISDN Subscriber number plan and type If the incoming num ber is ten digits but with a different area code it is forwarded to the network as ISDN National preferred ISDN NATIONAL DMS RESERVED PREFERRED Ignores the incoming numbering plan and type and substitutes the ISDN Tele phony numbering plan and National number type Ten digits are sent to the net work Leading ones if present are stripped out and the area code set in global parameters is added if only seven digits are supplied This action may be required in areas with ten digit local dialing ISDN NATIONAL As DIALED Sends the digits provided as National number type possible this may also be the preferred form in 10 digit calling areas We When SWITCH TYPE is set to AESS many installations require the National form where STRIP MSD Strips a selected quantity choose from NONE 1 2 and 3 of the most significant dig its MSD of a dialed number prior to being forwarded out of the port Example A network port could be set to accept all calls beginning with 9 9 and then with
207. deciding the BONDING call has failed TXFA TIMER Specifies the length of time both endpoints attempt to detect the BONDING frame pattern when a call is connected before deciding the BONDING call has failed When interoperating with other manufacturers BONDING equipment it may be necessary to change this time so that it matches TXADDO1 TXADDO1 TIMER Specifies the length of time both endpoints wait for additional calls to be connected at the end of negotiation before deciding that the BONDING call has failed The factory default setting is sufficient for most calls to connect although when dialing overseas it may be necessary to lengthen this timer to allow for slower call routing TXDEQ TIMER Specifies the length of time both endpoints attempt to equalize the network delay between the bearer channels before deciding the BONDING call has failed ATLAS 890 System Manual 2001 ADTRAN Inc 61200321L1 1A ATLAS 890 Section 4 User Interface Guide Page 67 of 234 TANULL TIMER Specifies the length of time the answering endpoint attempts to detect the BONDING negotiation pattern from the originating endpoint before deciding the BONDING call has failed It may be necessary to shorten this timer if the DTE equipment using the BONDING module also has timer constraints for completing non BONDING parameter negotiation TCID TIMER Specifies the length of time both endpoints attempt to negotiate an agreeable value f
208. define option parameters for ports which terminate a PRI connection from the network IFCE CONFIG PRI Write security 3 Read security 5 Specifies the configuration parameters for the endpoint SWITCH TYPE Defines the type of PRI switch to which the port is connected If connected to another ATLAS 890 both need to be set to the same switch type The following options are available Lucent 5E Northern DMS 100 e National ISDN AT amp T AESS FiRST DSO Defines the first DSO for this endpoint The ATLAS 890 uses DSOs starting with this selection to send and receive calls to and from the network The outgoing calls which are allowed or restricted over these DSOs are set by OUTHACCEPT see page 182 and OUT REJECT see page 184 NUMBER OF DSOs Specifies the number of DSOs ATLAS 890 uses for this endpoint OUTGOING NUMBER CONVERSION Converts outgoing towards the network numbers to the selected numbering plan and type option AS DIALED Sends the digits provided as an unknown number type 2001 ADTRAN Inc ATLAS 890 System Manual 61200321L1 1A ATLAS 890 Section 4 User Interface Guide Page 194 of 234 ISDN NATIONAL PREFERRED Regardless of what type of number is received the outgoing number is substituted with ISDN National as the number plan and type Ten digits are always sent to the network Leading ones if present are stripped out and the area code provisioned under DIAL PLAN GLOBAL PARAMETERS is a
209. ding ACO Switch pressed MINOR ACO switch pressed External Alarm Detected MINOR Alarm detected on External Alarm Monitor Login Failure MINOR Console login failure External Alarm Cleared MINOR External alarm cleared Timing source changed to Internal MINOR Neither the primary nor the backup are valid Timing source changed to Backup MINOR The primary source is not Backup valid Timing source changed to Primary MINOR The timing source changed to primary Not responding to programming MINOR Unable to program module Cold NORMAL system cold start Firmware update completed INFO Flash download successful Module Found INFO Module found SNMP Authentication Failure INFO SNMP authentication failure a Three consecutive logins were attempted and failed b Generated five seconds after the completion of system initialization c Generated if the ATLAS receives an SNMP request from an SNMP manager defined in the ATLAS SNMP communities list but with a community name that does not match the community name defined in the SNMP communities list Table 2 Switchboard Events Console Log String Category Event number rejected No such number WARNING Call rejected number rejected Outgoing reject list NORMAL Call rejected ATLAS 890 System Manual 2001 ADTRAN Inc 61200321L1 1A ATLAS 890 Section 6 System Event Logging Page 7 of 16 Table 2 Switchboard Events Continued
210. displays with information about the item Press lt CTRL Z gt to activate a help screen that displays the available keystrokes you can use to navigate the terminal menu 2001 ADTRAN Inc ATLAS 890 System Manual 61200321L1 1A ATLAS 890 Section 4 User Interface Guide Page 8 of 234 2 TERMINAL MENU AND SYSTEM CONTROL Selecting the Appropriate Menu The terminal menu is the access point to all other operations Each terminal menu item has several func tions and submenus that identify and provide access to specific operations and parameters Use the chart below to help select the appropriate terminal menu To do this Go to this menu Review and monitor general system information for the ATLAS 890 SYSTEM INFO Review and monitor system status for the ATLAS 890 SYSTEM STATUS Set up the operational configuration for the ATLAS 890 SYSTEM CONFIG Update settings transfer files perform system diagnostics and reboot SYSTEM UTILITY the ATLAS 890 Review and configure settings for each installed module including the MODULES ATLAS 890 network modules Define and configure all layer 2 connections including Frame Relay and PACKET MANAGER PPP endpoints Define configure and monitor all ATLAS 890 Router functions ROUTER Assign dedicated connections between any two ports in the ATLAS 890 DEDICATED MAPS Dial Backup functions including monitoring the status of backup links CIRCUIT
211. dministrator for the appropriate address DEFAULT METRIC Write Security 2 Read Security 2 Defines the default gateway metric Enter the default gateway metric by pressing lt Enter gt and entering a decimal number DEFAULT GATEWAY COST Write Security 2 Read Security 2 Defines the default gateway cost Enter the default gateway metric by pressing lt Enter gt and entering a decimal number 2001 ADTRAN Inc ATLAS 890 System Manual 61200321L1 1A ATLAS 890 Section 4 User Interface Guide Page 152 of 234 PING Write Security 2 Read Security 2 Allows you to send pings ICMP requests to devices accessible via the network b Only one ping session can be active at a time IP ADDRESS Write Security 2 Read Security 2 Specifies the IP address to ping COUNT Write Security 2 Read Security 2 Specifies the number of pings to send The maximum value is 99 SIZE Write Security 2 Read Security 2 Specifies the size in bytes of the data portion of the ping request The default value is 64 bytes and the maximum size is 1024 bytes TIMEOUT Write Security 2 Read Security 2 Specifies the time in milliseconds to wait for the ping reply before timing out The default tim eout is three seconds and the maximum timeout value is ten seconds ROUND TRIP MIN Write Security 2 Read Security 2 Displays the minimum round t
212. dule or power supply slots and power supply only slots The two controller slots are designated SCUA and SCUB for system controller units A and B The 13 option module slots are designated 1 through 13 and the three hybrid option module or power supply slots are designated 14 through 16 Slot 17 is used for power supplies only 2001 ADTRAN Inc ATLAS 890 System Manual 61200321L1 1A ATLAS 890 Section 4 User Interface Guide Page 38 of 234 Inserting modules into inappropriate slots will result in damage of the ATLAS 890 system System Controller modules are for use in the controller slots SCUA and SCUB only dm e Option Modules are for use in the option module slots 1 16 only e Power supplies are for use in the power supply slots 14 17 only TYPE Write security 3 Read security 5 Displays the type of module actually installed in the slot or the type of module you plan to install in the slot The ATLAS 890 controller automatically detects the type of module installed in each slot and the TYPE field automatically defaults to the installed module type You can also use this field to preconfig ure a unit before actually installing modules by specifying the module that you want to install in each slot To use this option navigate to the field you want to edit and press Enter For empty slots a list of all the available module types displays Select the one you want and it displays in the TYPE field If t
213. e BRI NT All SPIDs registered NORMAL SPID Registration complete BRILT Registering SPID lt spid gt NORMAL SPID Registration in progress BRI NT Registering SPID lt spid gt NORMAL SPID Registration in progress Call to lt called number gt declared busy after INFO Call busy leaving ATLAS Call to lt called number gt refused Busy INFO Call busy Call to lt called number gt cleared from INFO Call cleared ATLAS end Call to lt called number gt connected INFO Call connected Call to lt called number gt disconnected by far INFO Call disconnected end Call not accepted to lt called number gt No INFO Call not accepted channel available Call to ATLAS lt called number gt received INFO Call received Call to lt called number gt ringing INFO Call ringing Dialing lt called number gt INFO Dialing number Incoming call to lt called number gt accepted INFO Incoming call accepted Incoming call to lt called number gt refused INFO Incoming call refused Table 8 Circuit Backup Events Console Log String Category Event Circuit Backup Attempt Failed MAJOR _ Outgoing backup call was unsuccessful Circuit Backup Test Call Failed MAJOR _ Outgoing backup test call was unsuccessful Attempting Circuit Backup MINOR _ Circuit Backup call attempted to restore data circuit Circuit Backup Active MINOR Port is currently in backup 2001 ADTRAN Inc ATLAS 890 System Manual 61200321L1 1A ATLAS 8
214. e Page 12 of 234 CAT Displays the severity of the event The possible categories are Critical Major Minor Warning Normal and Info You can specify which types of errors you want the system to log with the System Event Logging option See Section 7 System Event Logging for details SRC Displays the source of the event SLOT Displays the slot number in which the event occurred If this field displays SCUA or SCUB for the active system controller the event that occurred was an ATLAS 890 system event PORT Displays the port in which the event occurred EVENT DESCRIPTION Displays a description of the event CLEAR SYSTEM EVENT LOG Write security 3 Read security 3 Clears the event log When you select this command the following prompt displays r Confirm y n This will clear the entire event log Select Y to clear the log or N to exit the command d If you clear the event log you cannot retrieve the data ETHERNET PORT Read security 5 Displays status information about the Ethernet port An asterisk indicates activity for the item The following read only fields are available to review I F STATUS Indicates the current status of the Ethernet port TX FRAMES Indicates the number of frames transmitted from the Ethernet port since system startup RX FRAMES Indicates the number of frames received on the Ethernet port since system startup
215. e dedicated for a specific connection and service DHCP Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol Allows dynamic IP address allocation Dial plan The numbering plan for ATLAS ports user and network handling switched connections Individual dial plans contain phone number and features associated with DTMF dialing PRI and BRI 2001 ADTRAN Inc ATLAS 890 System Manual 61200321L1 1A ATLAS 890 Glossary Page 4 of 12 DID Direct Inward Dial True DID lines provided as a service are inbound trunks that provide dialed infor mation but have no outbound dialing capability In ATLAS DID refers to digits received or transmit ted that allow the attached equipment to further route a call Digital Access Cross Connect System See DACS Discard Eligible DE A flag that can be set to indicate to the network that if excess traffic is received this frame can be dis carded if necessary DLCI Data Link Connection Identifier Identifies each virtual circuit within a shared physical channel DLCIs have significance only for the physical circuit for which they are assigned local significance DNIS Dialed Number Identification Service Service provided by a telephone company that allows the caller to see what number has been dialed DSO Digital signal or service having a transmission rate of 64 kbps intended to carry one voice channel a phone call Also called a fractional T1 because it bridges the gap between 56 kbps direct dial s
216. e Quad Nx 56 64 Option Module P N 1200184L 1 e Quad USSI Option Module P N 4200261Lx e Octal Basic Rate ISDN Option Module 1200186L2 e T3 Option Module P N 1200223L 1 e T3 Option Module with Drop and Insert Interface P N 1200225L1 e 8 16 24 32 Channel Voice Compression Resource Modules P N 1200221Lx e Nx 56 64 IMUX Resource Module P N 1200262L1 e HDLC Resource Module P N 1200222L 1 e Modem 16 Resource Module P N 1200181L 1 e Async 232 Option Module P N 1200182L 1 Each option module is hot swappable with configuration restored upon replacement Win Replacing an option module with a different module type will result in configuration loss Each option module has a variety of performance and alarm status information Several features of each module are user configurable although default values reflect the most common configurations All option modules contain an extensive self test as well as tests designed for the technology they incorporate ATLAS 890 System Controller Module P N 1200322L 1 In addition to controlling the shelf and its contents the system controller modules serve as the user inter face The operator provisions and monitors all modules in the system either locally or remotely via the system controller interface The system controllers provision the option cards in the shelf via the faceplate RJ 45 Admin connector of the active system controller and a VT 100 terminal see Figure 4 Additionally
217. e a PRI connection IFCE CONFIG PRI Write security 3 Read security 5 Specifies the configuration parameters for the endpoint SWITCH TYPE Defines the type of PRI switch that the ATLAS 890 emulates If connected to another ATLAS 890 both need to be set to the same switch type The following options are available Lucent 5E Northern DMS 100 National ISDN AT amp T AESS FiRST DSO Defines to the ATLAS 890 the first DSO for this endpoint The ATLAS 890 uses DSOs starting with this selection to send and receive calls to and from the network The out going calls which are allowed or restricted over these DSOs are set by OUTHACCEPT see page 182 and OUTZREJECT see page 184 NUMBER OF DS0S Specifies the number of DS0s ATLAS 890 uses for this endpoint STRIP MSD Strips a selected quantity choose from NONE 1 2 and 3 of the most significant dig its MSD of a dialed number prior to being forwarded out of the port Example A network port could be set to accept all calls beginning with 9 9 and then with STRIP MSD set to 1 all digits would be sent toward the network except the leading 9 toe STRIP MSD does not affect CALL ACCEPT criteria All of the digits including the MSDs that are subsequently stripped are used as accept criterion NETWORK SPECIFIC FACILITY VOICE AND DATA Enables the sending of appropriate information to the PSTN The default for this option is NORMAL and in this case no Net
218. e access level This way different users with the same access privileges can have different passwords Each of the six password security levels are described in Table 1 on page 8 LABEL Defines a username PASSWORD Allows you to change the password the default password is password The current password displays as a series of asterisks EEE The password can contain up to a combination of 12 case sensitive alphanumeric characters spaces or special characters ACCESS RIGHTS Defines the password level for the corresponding label You can select from six different password levels see Table 1 on page 8 ACTIVE Displays the number of users for each label that are currently logged into the system BONDING CONFIG Write security 3 Read security 5 Displays the configuration submenus available for the IMUX Module This configuration is shared among all IMUX Modules TXINIT TIMER Specifies the length of time the originating endpoint attempts to detect the BONDING negotiation pattern from the answering endpoint before deciding the BONDING call has failed TXFA TIMER Specifies the length of time both endpoints attempt to detect the BONDING frame pattern when a call is connected before deciding the BONDING call has failed When interoperating with other manufacturers BONDING equipment it may be necessary to change this time so that it matches TXADDO1 TXADDO1 TIMER Specifies the length of time bot
219. e on the installed module PROCESSOR ID Read security 5 Displays the processor ID of the installed module STATUS Read security 5 Displays the status submenus for both analog and digital resources available on the Modem 16 Option Module ANALOG RSRC SESSION STATUS Read security 5 This submenu displays the session status information for the analog resources available on the Modem 16 Option Module RSRC Read security 5 Indicates the resource number of the analog call resource On the Modem 16 Option Module analog resources are numbered 1 16 and digital ISDN resources are num bered 17 32 STATUS Read security 5 Indicates the current status of the particular analog call resource and displays new activity as it occurs The possible status display values are listed below Display Value Meaning N A Card is not able to determine the status of the analog call resource AVAILABLE Indicates this resource is available for use as an analog call IN USE Indicates this resource is currently being used in an analog call TESTING Indicates this resource is in a test mode and may be unavailable for use DISABLED Indicates this resource has been disabled for use as an analog call resource This may be done automatically by the system if a given analog resource does not initialize properly 2001 ADTRAN Inc ATLAS 890 System Manual 61200321L1 1A ATLAS 890 Section 4 User Interface Guide Page 88 of 234
220. e password the ATLAS 890 will use to authenticate the peer TX METHOD This field displays a list of the methods that we will allow the peer to authen ticate us with This is of use when a peer wants to do PAP just to get your password NONE is selected when you do not want to be authenticated by the peer PAP CHAP or EAP is selected when you will let the peer use one or all of the authentication protocols CHAP or EAP is selected when you will let the peer use only one of the encrypted authentication protocols EAP is selected when you will let the peer use only the EAP authentication protocol TX USERNAME The username that the peer will use to authenticate the ATLAS 890 TX PASSWORD The password that the peer will use to authenticate the ATLAS 890 DEBUG LOG The following events can be viewed in the event log when PPP events have been turned to INFO LCP DEBUGGING This turns on LCP negotiation debugging IPCP DEBUGGING This turns on IPCP negotiation debugging AUTHENTICATION DEBUGGING This turns on authentication debugging UNKNOWN PROTOCOL DEBUGGING This turns on debugging for unknown protocols MAX CONFIG This value is the number of unanswered configuration requests that should be transmitted before giving up on negotiation The default value is 10 MAX TIMER This value is the number of seconds to wait between unanswered configuration requests The default value is 2 seconds MAX FAILURE Due to the nature of PPP con
221. e session mode for the port The following modes are available UNASSIGNED IDLE LOOPBACK MODEM RING MODEM ANSWER MODEM DIAL MODEM CONNECTED ISDN PPP RING Port not assigned to a phone number in the Dial Plan Port assigned but no call is active Loopback is turned on in the test menu Incoming analog modem call is ringing on port Async 232 port will toggle RI The DTE has answered an incoming analog modem call The DTE is using the Async 232 port to make an outgoing analog modem call An analog modem call has been established Incoming ISDN PPP call is ringing on the port Async 232 port will toggle RI ISDN PPP ANSWER The DTE has answered an incoming ISDN PPP call 2001 ADTRAN Inc ATLAS 890 System Manual 61200321L1 1A ATLAS 890 Section 4 User Interface Guide Page 80 of 234 ISDN PPP DiAL The DTE is using the Async 232 port to make an outgoing ISDN PPP call ISDN PPP An ISDN PPP call has been established CONNECTED CALL DIR Read security 5 Displays the current call direction as INCOMING or OUTGOING If there is no active call IDLE will display Rsc Read security 5 This field indicates the slot and device number allocated for a call to or from this port If no call is active it will indicate NONE The allocated resource will be either an analog modem or an ISDN digital call resource LAST DISCONNECT Read security 5 This field indicates the
222. ed alarm condition is present 3 Common COM Common connection between external circuitry and NC or NO terminal 4 Chassis Ground GND 2001 ADTRAN Inc ATLAS 890 System Manual 61200321L1 1A ATLAS 890 Section 5 DLP 002 Page 4 of 4 External Relay Monitor Connector Pinout Pin Name Description 1 Alarm Out Outputs EIA 232 level signal for connection to external alarm contacts Alarm In Monitors signal coming from external alarm contacts Chassis Ground Follow up Procedures Once this procedure is complete return to the procedure which referred you to this DLP and continue with the tasks indicated there ATLAS 890 System Manual 2001 ADTRAN Inc 61200321L1 1A ATLAS 890 Section 5 DLP 003 Page 1 of 2 SETTING IP PARAMETERS FOR THE ATLAS 890 Introduction If the ATLAS 890 is connected to an IP network for Telnet TFTP or SNMP management there are sev eral IP parameters that must be set in order for the unit to communicate with the network These parame ters are described in this DLP along with the procedures for setting them Ld Please see your Network Administrator for the proper assignment of the following parameters IP address Subnet Mask and Default Gateway Prerequisite Procedures This procedure assumes that the ATLAS 890 unit is connected to an IP network and is powered up Tools and Materials Required e Data cable to connect to either a VT 100 terminal
223. ed to it and the rate per DSO associated with the active maps INBAND STATS Read security 5 Provides information on the following inband channel statistics PORT Operating port number RX FRAMES The number of frames received on the operating port since system startup 2001 ADTRAN Inc ATLAS 890 System Manual 61200321L1 1A ATLAS 890 Section 4 User Interface Guide Page 60 of 234 TX FRAMES The number of frames transmitted from the operating port since system startup Rx BYTES The number of bytes received from the operating port since system startup TX BYTES The number of bytes transmitted to the operating port since system startup RESET STATS Clears inband statistic results PLL FIFO Read security 5 Displays the Phase Lock Loop PLL and FIFO status PORT Indicates the operating port PLL FIFO Displays the state of the PLL and FIFO systems Lock PLL is locked This is required to transfer data RXE Receive data FIFO empty RXF Receive data FIFO full TXE Transmit data FIFO empty TXF Transmit data FIFO full CONFIGURATION Write security 3 Read security 5 All of the following configurable parameters apply to the individual USSI ports PRT Read security 5 Displays the port number PORT NAME Write security 3 Read security 5 Accepts any alpha numeric name up to 16 characters long to uniquely identify each port on the Quad USSI Option Module CLK Write securi
224. een rennen 14 Table 12 ISDN E2 Messages 142 tct Dee e Pee e PEG Ee eere eta 15 Table 13 ISDN Call Control Messages nettes neget eee dne ec nnn te Paten ce de et lecvieoateccees 15 Table 14 Source ISDN Information Elements esee nennen 15 2001 ADTRAN Inc ATLAS 890 System Manual 61200321L1 1A ATLAS 890 Section 6 System Event Logging Page 2 of 16 1 SETTING THE EVENT LOG CATEGORY The following steps outline the procedure for setting up the event CATEGORY thresholds for the Event Log 1 From the MAIN MENU go to the SYSTEM CONFIG menu and press the right arrow key to enter the right pane menus Session Edit Options Capture Help ystem P iming Systen Status Backup T timing Source System Config ADLP dress System Utility Session Timeout Modules Max Telnet Sessions Packet Manager Ethernet Port Router Admin Port Dedicated Maps Craft Port Circuit Status SNMP Dial Plan Event Logging Syslog Setu Real Time Clock Access Passwords BONDING Config Alarm Relay Reset Alarm Relay Threshold Ext Input Threshold Enable DACS Alarms USTEN Ining source 2 Select the EVENT LOGGING field and press lt Enter gt Once in the EVENT LOGGING menus press the right arrow key to access the right pane menus Telnet Connection 172 22 12 50 Sarson Edit Options Capture Help y finn Port Suitchboard Craft Port Nx 56 64 Module SNMP fisunc 232 Module Event Logging T1 Module Sysl
225. emote modem If it cannot the call is disconnected FORCE MNP MODE Modem will attempt to negotiate MNO error correction with the remote modem If it cannot the call is disconnected ATLAS 890 System Manual 2001 ADTRAN Inc 61200321L1 1A ATLAS 890 Section 4 User Interface Guide Page 85 of 234 AT STORED PROFILE Write security 3 Read security 5 These fields allow an alternate way of changing certain AT command profile settings Normally these fields would be changed via their AT command equivalent in an ini tialization string sent by the DTE or set by a DTE and then saved to NVRAM using AT amp W Changing the values here is the equivalent of setting modem DIP switches to assign default values Any AT commands issued after the menu option is changed or the unit is rebooted override the menu default Issued AT commands are stored between reboots if the profile is saved via AT amp W as above The values in this menu will reflect the stored profile ECHO ATEN The ECHO ATEN field ENABLES default or DISABLES the echo attenuation RESPONSE MSG FORMAT ATVN The RESPONSE MSG the formate of the response message RESPONSE MsG ENABLE ATQN The RESPONSE MSG ENABLE field allows you to turn the response messaging ON default or OFF EXTENDED RESULT CODER ATXN The EXTENDED RESULT CODER field allows you to configure the Async 232 Option Module to CONNECT W BITRATE default or perform a SIMPLE CON NECT ATSO
226. en a controller switch from active to standby will occur CONTROLLER SWITCH IMMEDIATE A forced controller switch will occur immediately CONTROLLER SWITCH AT TIME Controller switch will occur at the specified date and time When this option is selected a new field called CTRL SwiTCH DATE AND TIME will be displayed below the current field FORCE CONTROLLER SWITCH Write security 0 Read security 0 Causes the switch from active to standby to occur immediately REBOOT SYSTEM Write security 0 Read security 0 Reboots the ATLAS 890 system When you select this command the following message displays WARNING This will reboot the entire system and service will be interrupted Press Y to reboot the system or N to cancel the command FACTORY DEFAULT SYSTEM Write security 0 Read security 0 Resets the entire system to the factory default settings To reset the system press Y To cancel this command press N When you select this command the following message displays WARNING This will delete all configuration settings ADTRAN recommends a backup copy of the configuration before defaulting the system ALARM RELAY TEST Write security 5 Read security 5 TOGGLE TEST MODE Selects whether the alarm relay test mode is entered The test mode is only active for a limited amount of time The key increases the amount of test time and the key decreases the amount of test time while the cursor is on TOGGLE TE
227. entification Service is the called party number in the dial plan must use the ANI number not the DNIS number Ld With this swap the ATLAS 890 switchboard uses ANI to route the call The accept number B CHANNEL SELECTION Determines how the ATLAS 890 switchboard uses B channels for call routing The CIRCULAR method can be used for call load balancing among the available B channels 2001 ADTRAN Inc ATLAS 890 System Manual 61200321L1 1A ATLAS 890 Section 4 User Interface Guide Page 214 of 234 on this interface NORMAL Always start with the last channel configured i e for a full PRI channel 23 would be used if available CIRCULAR Contiguous channels from last to first Busy OPTION Defines the response propagated to the CPE upon receipt of a DISCONNECT USER BUSY message from the network NORMAL Send a Progress message to the CPE and map busy tones Pass THRU Send a DISCONNECT USER BUSY message to the User Term CPE device gt DIAL PLAN QUAD E1 PRA OPTION MODULE NETWORK TERM PRA This menu allows the user to define option parameters for ports which terminate a PRA connection from the network IFCE CONFIG PRA Write security 3 Read security 5 Specifies the configuration parameters for the endpoint SWITCH TYPE Defines the type of PRA switch to which the port is connected If connected to another ATLAS 890 both need to be set to the same switch type The following option is
228. epting CLR these fields are all read only The monitored parameters include the following PRT Displays the T1 number 1 28 CLR Clears performance information for the selected T1 ES Errored Second ES is a second with one or more error events OR one or more Out Of Frame events OR one or more Controlled Slips BES Bursty Errored Second BES is a second with more than one but less than 320 error events SES Severely Errored Second SES is a second with 320 or more error events OR one or more Out Of Frame events 2001 ADTRAN Inc ATLAS 890 System Manual 61200321L1 1A ATLAS 890 Section 4 User Interface Guide Page 116 of 234 SEFS Severely Errored Frame Second is a second that contains four consecutive errored framing patterns LoFC Loss of Frame Count is a count of seconds in which a valid framing pattern could not be obtained Css Controlled Slip Second UAS Unavailable Second Pcv Path Code Violation DS1 PERF 15MIN Write security 3 Read security 5 Stores the performance data for the previous 15 minute window Refer to DS Perf Current on page 115 for a detailed description of these fields DS1 PERF 24HR Write security 3 Read security 5 Stores the performance data for the previous 24 hour window Refer to DSI Perf Current on page 115 for a detailed description DS1 CONFIGURATION Write security 3 Read security 5 All of the following configurable parameters apply to whether the port is
229. equipment to ADTRAN For service RMA requests training or more information see the toll free contact numbers given below Presales Inquiries and Applications Support Please contact your local distributor ADTRAN Applications Engineering or ADTRAN Sales Applications 800 615 1176 Engineering Sales 800 827 0807 Post Sale Support Please contact your local distributor first If your local distributor cannot help please contact ADTRAN Technical Support and have the unit serial number available Technical Support 888 4ADTRAN The Custom Extended Services ACES program offers multiple types and levels of service plans which al low you to choose the kind of assistance you need For questions call the ACES Help Desk ACES Help Desk 888 874 2237 Repair and Return If ADTRAN Technical Support determines that a repair is needed Technical Support will coordinate with the Custom and Product Service CAPS department to issue an RMA number For information regarding equipment currently in house or possible fees associated with repair contact CAPS directly at the following number CAPS Department 256 963 8722 Identify the RMA number clearly on the package below address and return to the following address ADTRAN Customer and Product Service 901 Explorer Blvd Huntsville Alabama 35806 RMA ATLAS 890 System Manual 2001 ADTRAN Inc Training The Enterprise Network EN Technical Training offers training on o
230. er V 29 7200 BPS FAX data reception of 7200 bps using protocol V 29 V 29 9600 BPS FAX data reception of 9600 bps using protocol V 29 V 33 12000 BPS FAX data reception of 12000 bps using protocol V 33 2001 ADTRAN Inc ATLAS 890 System Manual 61200321L1 1A ATLAS 890 Section 4 User Interface Guide Page 74 of 234 V 33 14400 BPs FAX data reception of 14400 bps using protocol V 33 CONFIG Write security 4 Read security 5 Provides diagnostic tools for suspected problems under normal operation users do not configure the packet voice devices CONFIGURE VCOM DEVICES Write security 4 Read security 5 Contains configuration parameters for individual VCOM Devices DEVICE Read security 5 Indicates the resource number of the packet voice device listed On the ATLAS 890 packet voice devices are numbered 1 24 STATE Write security 4 Read security 5 Controls the configuration state of the individual packet voice device The ATLAS 890 determines the initial configuration state of each device ATLAS uses this config uration information to determine which packet voice devices are functional and may be used which are defective and should not be used or which are not present on the module and should not be used Users who suspect an individual packet voice device of improper operation can manually disable that device to prevent ATLAS from attempting to use it The possible states are defined bel
231. er vice DDS and a full T1 implementation 24 channels DSU Data Service Unit A device used with a CSU to support digital communications by converting sig nals See also CSU DTE Data terminal equipment The portion of a data terminal that interfaces to the end user s equipment The main difference between DCE and DTE is that pins 2 and 3 are reversed on the EIA 232 DTMF dialing Dual tone multifrequency dialing The tones used by customer equipment to signal the network El circuit European equivalent to the T 1 with a capacity of 2 048 Mbps An E1 can handle 32 voice channels with each conversation being digitized at 64 kbps ESF Extended superframe A method of grouping T1 carrier frames into larger superframes each contain ing 24 consecutive T1 frames ATLAS 890 System Manual 2001 ADTRAN Inc 61200321L1 1A ATLAS 890 Glossary Page 5 of 12 FECN Forward Explicit Congestion Notification Sent to the device receiving data from the frame relay net work to indicate that there is congestion in the receive direction The receiving DTE device should take action to slow down traffic from the remote end Compare with BECN flash memory A kind of non volatile storage device similar to EEPROM where erasing can only be done in blocks or the entire chip flash upgrades Upgrades that can be downloaded into the flash memory FRAD Frame Relay Access Device Any equipment that provides a connection between a frame re
232. er requires the NFAS word TSO 0 in odd frames and the FAS word TSO 0 in even frames for frame sync When disabled only the FAS word is needed for frame sync TS16 MF Write security 3 Read security 5 If enabled the receiver requires MFAS word in TS16 to achieve sync CAS signaling The transmitter outputs MFAS word in TS16 CCS signaling CRC 4 Write security 3 Read security 5 Transmits the CRC 4 checksum bits in the outgoing E1 data stream when enabled Also checks the received signal for errors AUTO ALARM Write security 3 Read security 5 Transmits a remote alarm when framing is lost when Red Alarm Generation is on and trans mits an AIS alarm when all ones are received when RCM AIS Generation is on CODE Write security 3 Read security 5 Allows selection of line coding HDB3 is normally the only coding method used on public net works AMI may be selected for testing purposes 2001 ADTRAN Inc ATLAS 890 System Manual 61200321L1 1A ATLAS 890 Section 4 User Interface Guide Page 50 of 234 TSO SPARE TEST Write security 3 Read security 5 TSO bits Sa4 through Sa8 in frames not containing the Frame Alignment Signal may be used in specific applications but should be set to 1s when crossing an international border Enter decimal number whose 5 LSB are to be used for all Sa4 Sa8 bits Refer to CCITT G 704 for more information TS16 SPARE Write security
233. er to DLP 010 TRANSFER METHOD Write security 3 Read security 5 Displays the method used to transfer the configuration file to or from a server Currently TFTP is required TFTP SERVER IP ADDRESS Write security 3 Read security 5 Specifies the IP address of the TFTP server Get this address information from your System Administrator TFTP SERVER FILENAME Write security 3 Read security 5 Defines the name of the configuration file that you transfer to or retrieve from the TFTP server The default name is ATLAS890 cfg but it is editable CURRENT TRANSFER STATUS Read security 5 Indicates the current status of the update PREVIOUS TRANSFER STATUS Read security 5 Indicates the status of the previous update ATLAS 890 System Manual 2001 ADTRAN Inc 61200321L1 1A ATLAS 890 Section 4 User Interface Guide Page 31 of 234 LOAD AND USE CONFIG Write security 3 Read security 5 Retrieves the configuration file specified in the TFTP SERVER FILENAME field from the server To start this command enter Y To cancel this command enter N If you execute this command the ATLAS 890 retrieves the configuration file reboots then restarts using the new configuration SAVE CoNFIG REMOTELY Write security 3 Read security 5 Saves the configuration file specified in TFTP SERVER FILENAME to the server identified in TFTP SERVER IP ADDRESS To start this command ente
234. ervice For detailed warranty repair and return information refer to the ADTRAN Equipment Warranty and Repair and Return Policy Procedure Return Material Authorization RMA is required prior to returning equipment to ADTRAN For service RMA requests or further information contact one of the numbers listed at the end of this sec tion LIMITED PRODUCT WARRANTY ADTRAN warrants that for five 5 years from the date of shipment to Customer all products manufac tured by ADTRAN will be free from defects in materials and workmanship ADTRAN also warrants that products will conform to the applicable specifications and drawings for such products as contained in the Product Manual or in ADTRAN s internal specifications and drawings for such products which may or may not be reflected in the Product Manual This warranty only applies if Customer gives ADTRAN writ ten notice of defects during the warranty period Upon such notice ADTRAN will at its option either repair or replace the defective item If ADTRAN is unable in a reasonable time to repair or replace any equipment to a condition as warranted Customer is entitled to a full refund of the purchase price upon return of the equipment to ADTRAN This warranty applies only to the original purchaser and is not trans ferable without ADTRAN s express written permission This warranty becomes null and void if Customer modifies or alters the equipment in any way other than as specifically authori
235. es of messages will be logged to an ASCII text file Mark the lowest priority Event Log message you want to log to the Syslog server text file For example the figure below shows that all messages will be logged to the text file Set Facility Filters 00 01 02 00 02 01 00 00 02 00 02 01 y 08 TSHZZTS CZATZSUATUSS SSUBUTRHANT TCE May 08 13 22 20 172 22 12 50 ATLAS 890 ADTRAN ICCISCUAIOITx Len 3 OC 10 04 May 08 13 22 20 172 22 12 50 ATLAS 880 ADTRANTICCISCUAIOIRx Len S OC 11 04 9 9 e C e 2 e Eats saa e The HELP menu also explains these features Click on HELP CONTENTS SYSLOG HosT DAEMON for fur ther explanation of Syslog features ATLAS 550 System Manual 2001 ADTRAN Inc 61200321L1 1A ATLAS 890 Section 6 System Event Logging Page 1 of 16 SYSTEM EVENT LOGGING The ATLAS 890 Event Log is used to log various message types at settable threshold levels This section describes the entries that may be logged by the system Event Log The Event Log CATEGORY threshold is particularly important this is the minimum severity level that must be set in order that the event be logged Use caution when changing CATEGORY values from their default levels If too many sources have their CATEGORY values set too low the number of messages being logged in UT a given period can be very large If too many messages are being logged too rapidly system performance can be adversely affected T
236. ess systems on the market 2 FEATURES AND BENEFITS The following is a brief list of ATLAS 890 features and benefits Configuration and Management e VT 100 Emulation SNMP per MIB II RFC1213 DS1 MIB RFC1406 and ADTRAN private MIBs Telnet e Dial up remote management via external analog modem e Six levels of password protection and privileges Software Upgradeable e Flash memory e TFTP download e XMODEM via control port ATLAS 890 System Manual 2001 ADTRAN Inc 61200321L1 1A ATLAS 890 Section 1 System Description Page 3 of 6 Signaling Support ISDN D Channel e Robbed bit E amp M Ground Start Loop Start e Convert between Robbed Bit Signaling and ISDN D Channel e Direct Inward Dialing ISDN Switch Types e 5ESS DMS 100 National ISDN 4ESS Dedicated Connection Maps e Up to five connection maps e Time of day day of week configurable e Preserves signaling through cross connect e No effect on non configured channels Switched Connection Maps e Inbound and outbound call filtering and blocking Testing e Local and remote payload line V 54 depending on installed modules e Patterns 511 QRSS all ones all zeros depending on installed modules Performance Monitoring e Reports Information stored for last 24 hours in 15 minute increments e Performance statistics per TR54016 T1 403 RFC1406 e Alarm reporting per TR54016 T1 403 Frame Relay e Routes Internet Protocol
237. etransmis sion timeout measured in milliseconds More refined semantics for objects of this type depend upon the algorithm used to determine the retransmission tim eout In particular when the timeout algorithm is rsre 3 an object of this type has the semantics of the UBOUND quantity described in RFC 793 MAXCONN The limit on the total number of TCP connections the ATLAS 890 can sup port In entities where the maximum number of connections is dynamic this object should contain the value 1 ACTIVEOPENS The number of times TCP connections have made a direct transition to the SYN SENT state from the CLOSED state PASSIVEOPENS The number of times TCP connections have made a direct transition to the SYN RCVD state from the LISTEN state 2001 ADTRAN Inc ATLAS 890 System Manual 61200321L1 1A ATLAS 890 Section 4 User Interface Guide Page 158 of 234 Table 4 TCP Statistics Continued Name Description ATTEMPTFAILS The number of times TCP connections have made a direct transition to the CLOSED state from either the SYN SENT state or the SYN RCVD state plus the number of times TCP connections have made a direct transition to the LISTEN state from the SYN RCVD state ESTABRESETS The number of times TCP connections have made a direct transition to the CLOSED state from either the ESTABLISHED state or the CLOSE WAIT state CURRESTAB The number of TCP connections for which the current state is eit
238. evels SIMPLE and MD5 Both meth ods use Hello packets to maintain adjacency A Hello packet is multicast usually every ten seconds to neighboring routers Neighboring routers then return a Hello packet to the sending router If a router does not receive a Hello packet from an adja cent router it knows there is a problem NONE Does not authenticate SIMPLE Transmits a clear text password in the OSPF Hello packets When set to SIMPLE a new menu PASSWORD opens PASSWORD Defines the password a maximum of 8 characters used in transmitting OSPF Hello packets The password also authenticates Hello packets from other routers ATLAS 890 System Manual 2001 ADTRAN Inc 61200321L1 1A ATLAS 890 Section 4 User Interface Guide Page 149 of 234 MD5 Selects MDS as the hashing algorithm that exchanges keys passwords between OSPF routers Instead of exchanging the key over the link the router builds a message digest based on the key the key ID and the packet KEY LisT Defines and manages the keys up to four used in MD5 Opens only when AUTHEN METHOD z MD5 MODE Defines how OSPF uses the key entry INVALID means the key is not used for authentication VALID means the key can be used for authenticating other routers but not for transmit ting Hello packets TRANSMIT means the key is used for transmitting Hello packets and authenticating other routers KEY Transmits OSPF hello packets when Mode Transmit Authe
239. f the Quad E1 PRA Option Module includes the following items Quad EI PRA Option Module Quad EI PRA Option Module Quick Start Guide One DB 62 to Quad DB 15 female cable ADTRAN P N 31251061 Ld The Quad EI PRA Option Module may also be purchased with BNC Network Connection Interfaces P N 4200264L1 Quad Nx 56 64 Option Module P N 1200311L1 Shipping Contents The ADTRAN shipment of the Quad Nx 56 64 Option Module includes the following items e Quad Nx 56 64 Option Module e Quad Nx 56 64 Option Module Quick Start Guide e Two DB 37 to V 35 converter cables ADTRAN P N 31251029 ATLAS 890 System Manual 2001 ADTRAN Inc 61200321L1 1A ATLAS 890 Section 3 Network Turnup Procedure Page 7 of 8 Quad USSI Option Module System P N 4200261LX Shipping Contents The ADTRAN shipment of the Quad USSI Option Module System includes the following items e Quad USSI Option Module System e Quad USSI Option Module System Quick Start Guide And one of the following e ETA 530 530A to DB 78 Cable System P N 4200261L2 Cable P N 31251058 e RS 449 V 36 System P N 4200261L1 Cable P N 31251057 e RS 232 System P N 4200261L4 Cable P N 31251063 e CCIT X 21 V 11 System P N 4200261L3 Cable P N 31251056 Octal Basic Rate ISDN Option Module P N 1200186L2 Shipping Contents The ADTRAN shipment of the Octal Basic Rate ISDN Option Module includes the following items e Octal Basic Rate ISDN Option Module e Octal
240. fault Gateway 7 Left arrow to highlight the ETHERNET submenu to save changes 8 Escape out to the SYSTEM CONFIG menu and logoff by pressing lt Ctrl L gt Follow up Procedures Once this procedure is complete return to the procedure which referred you to this DLP and continue with the tasks indicated there ATLAS 890 System Manual 2001 ADTRAN Inc 61200321L1 1A ATLAS 890 Section 5 DLP 004 Page 1 of 4 VERIFYING COMMUNICATIONS OVER AN IP LAN Introduction When an Ethernet Port is connected to a local area network LAN test steps must be performed on the ATLAS 890 to ensure that the unit is communicating properly over the network This procedure outlines those steps Prerequisite Procedures Before beginning this procedure the unit should be physically connected to the LAN and the provisioning tasks detailed in DLP 003 should be complete Tools and Materials Required e Access to a PC or other computer connected to the LAN To prevent electrical shock do not install equipment in a wet location or during a Ww ARNING lightning storm Electronic modules can be damaged by static electrical discharge Before handling modules wear an antistatic discharge wrist strap to prevent damage to electronic d components Place modules in antistatic packing material when transporting or storing When working on modules always place them on an approved antistatic mat that is electrically grounded 2001 A
241. figuration for the ATLAS 890 Write security 4 Read security 5 Sends the modem initialization string to the modem When you select this command the following message displays Please verify a modem is connected to the Admin port before continuing Confirm y n Ensure that a modem is connected before selecting Y This option sets the flow control for the Admin port You may configure the Admin port flow control for NONE or H W hardware 2001 ADTRAN Inc ATLAS 890 System Manual 61200321L1 1A ATLAS 890 Section 4 User Interface Guide Page 20 of 234 CRAFT PORT Write security 2 Read security 5 PORT NAME Defines the name of the Craft port You can leave this field blank PoRT SPEED Specifies the baud rate of the port Select either 2400 9600 19200 SNMP or 38400 If you are using DIAL for PORT TYPE ensure that the PORT SPEED setting matches the modem baud rate Write security 3 Read security 5 Provides a way to configure SNMP access for the ATLAS 890 The following options are available for review and editing SNMP ACCESS Write security 3 Read Security 5 Defines whether SNMP access to the ATLAS 890 is enabled or disabled Select the appropri ate option SNMP COMMUNITIES Write security 3 Read Security 5 Defines SNMP manager s characteristics as follows IP ADDRESS Specifies the IP address of the network manager PRIVILEGES Def
242. figuration options may not be agreed upon between two PPP peers This value is the number of configuration NAKs that should occur ATLAS 890 System Manual 2001 ADTRAN Inc 61200321L1 1A ATLAS 890 Section 4 User Interface Guide Page 129 of 234 before an option is configuration rejected This allows a connection to succeed that might otherwise fail The default value is 5 KEEPALIVE Configures the ATLAS 890 to send keepalive frames on PPP connections that are not currently in use for data RESET SESSION Resets PPP negotiation with the peer SUBLINKS FRAME RELAY Contains the configuration parameters for individual sublinks or PVCs The follow ing parameters are available NAME User definable name for the DLCI DLCI Local address for each PVC as assigned by the carrier QOS Quality of service These values can be used to assign a guaranteed amount of bandwidth available for this connection The sum of all QOS values for the sub link should not exceed the Committed Information Rate CIR BURST Sets the burst rate used by this virtual circuit for data traffic A value of zero means that the burst rate is not limited The value is in kilobits second If voice traffic is flowing on ANY sublink on the port carrying THIS sublink you should enter a value for this setting Otherwise leave this field set to default zero If the service provider has supplied a Be value enter that value in this field The burs
243. following steps outline the procedure for viewing EVENT LOG messages 1 From the MAIN MENU go to the SYSTEM STATUS menu and press the right arrow key to enter the right pane menus Telnet Connection 172 22 12 50 Eigi Session Edit Options Capture Help y System Status Cleng System Event Log System Config Ethernet Port System Utility Admin Port Modules Craft Port Packet Manager System Alarms Router System Timing Source PRIMARY Locked Dedicated Maps Resource Usage Circuit Status Trunk Usage Dial Plan Redundancy 2001 ADTRAN Inc ATLAS 890 System Manual 61200321L1 1A ATLAS 890 Section 6 System Event Logging Page 4 of 16 2 Select the EVENT LOG field and press lt Enter gt Once in the EVENT LOG press the right arrow key to access the actual messages Telnet Connection 172 22 12 50 Seron Edit Options Capture Help Ethernet Sart 05707 11 203 AE Wan syste 3 T Module Not Responding Admin Port Min Syste Module Found Craft Port 03707 09 Oh 09 Min ICC ICC is up System Alarms 05 07 09 04 05 Hin Exter Clear External Input Resource Usage 05 07 09 04 05 Min Syste 117 Module Found Trunk Usage 05 07 09 04 05 Min Syste Module Found Redundancy A UNLN SCB STBY 10 Ld The EVENT LOG messages are stored in a first in first out table Therefore the most recent log entry is found at the top of the log EVENT LOG messages ma
244. ftware follow the proce dure in DLP 007 Connecting to the ADMIN or CRAFT interface limits the upgrade procedure to XMODEM Only 2 Login to the unit Login to the unit using the read write password see DLP 006 for details 3 Go to the SYSTEM UTILITY menu and select the UPDATE FIRMWARE menu press lt Enter gt 4 Select the MODULE SLOT menu and press lt Enter gt Select the appropriate module slot to update Select either SCUA or SCUB to upgrade the installed System Controller module s Selecting ALL MODULES OF A TYPE and SYS CTRL will force a controller switchover Won during the update process Take caution to connect both installed System Controller modules to the Ethernet network to ensure proper Telnet operation following the update 5 Go to the TRANsFER METHOD menu and select XMODEM 6 From the RESTART SCHEDULE menu select the time for the module to perform a restart after completing the update process RESTART IMMEDIATELY AFTER UPDATE restarts the system immediately after the update is com plete RESTART AT SPECIFIED DATE AND TIME allows you to select when the updated system will restart If you select this option a new field called RESTART DATE AND TIME displays below the current field To use that option enter the time in 24 hour format such as 23 00 00 for 11 00 pm Enter the date in mm dd yyyy format for example 09 30 2000 T View CURRENT UPDATE STATUS to verify the progress of the current firmware
245. g host resides e Host FACILITY Specifies the facility destination of log events Options are LOCALO to LOCAL7 Setting Up the Syslog Host On your PC go to START PROGRAMS ADTRAN UTILITIES SYSLOG When the Syslog window opens you will see LOCALO through LOCAL7 listed on the left This should correspond with the HOST FACILITY speci fied in the ATLAS 890 The Syslog program must be open on your PC in order for it to record ATLAS 890 information The Syslog files can be viewed through the Syslog window They are also available under the ADTRAN Utilities folder LOCALX TXT where X can equal 0 through 7 You can also view the LOCALX TXT file by clicking on EDIT Loc Atlas SysLog Host C LOCALI C LOCAL2 LOCAL3 C LOCAL4 LOCALS LOCALE C LOCAL Current Event File Log Files Help May 08 13 22 13 172 22 12 50 ATLAS 890 ADTRAN May 08 13 22 14 172 22 12 50 ATLAS 830 ADTRAN I May 08 13 22 14 172 22 12 50 ATLAS 890 AD TRAN May 08 13 22 14 172 22 12 50 ATLAS 890 AD TRAN May 08 13 22 14 172 22 12 50 ATLAS 890 AD TRAN May 08 13 22 15 172 22 12 50 ATLAS 890 ADTRAN May 08 13 22 15 172 22 12 50 ATLAS 830 ADTRAN I May 08 13 22 15 172 22 12 50 ATLAS 890 AD TRAN May 08 13 22 15 172 22 12 50 ATLAS 890 AD TRAN May 08 13 22 16 172 22 12 50 ATLAS 890 ADTRAN May 08 13 22 16 172 22 12 50 ATLAS 890 ADTRAN May 08 13 22 16 172 22 12 50 ATLAS 830 ADTRAN I May 08 13 22 16 172 22 12 50 ATLAS 8830 ADTRAN I May 08 13 22 1
246. g routed based on the dialed number ACCEPT NUMBER Designates which numbers this endpoint will accept terminate from the network The accept list may consist of multiple entries The numbers are defined using the fol 2001 ADTRAN Inc ATLAS 890 System Manual 61200321L1 1A ATLAS 890 Section 4 User Interface Guide Page 188 of 234 lowing wildcards Any single digit Any single digit 2 through 9 X N Any number of digits of any value 9 This specific number 1 2 3 A single digit in this group Example 963 8000 would be a specific incoming number that would be accepted by this end point If this endpoint consisted of a T1 with multiple DSOs a hunt group for 963 8000 would be formed The entry would accept any call Any specific entry will take precedence over a wildcard For example if endpoint A was Win designated as while endpoint B accepted 963 800X then an incoming call to 963 800X would only be accepted by endpoint B SEARCH Instructs ATLAS 890 in which order to search for an accept number match Normally all searches are set to primary The secondary search selection forces ATLAS 890 to only accept a call at this endpoint if all primary endpoints are unavailable PRIMARY SEARCH AII long distance calls should go out a PRI directly to an IXC MCI ATT etc and local calls should go out a T1 to the LEC It may be desirable to place long distance calls on the local e
247. g type ANNEX A Transmits and responds to ITU T Q 933 A standards ANNEX D Transmits and responds to ANSI T1 617 D standards LMI Transmits and responds to Group of Four specifications USER POLL TIMER T391 Sets the polling interval to the network in seconds USER POLLS PER STATUS N391 Controls how many link integrity polls occur between full status polls USER BAD EVENT THRESHOLD N392 Sets the number of bad polling events that will cause the link to be declared down in N393 polls USER EVENT WINDOW SIZE N393 Defines the number of poll events in each monitored window For most applications the USER POLL TIMER USER POLLS PER STATUS USER BAD Win EVENT THRESHOLD and USER EVENT WINDOW SIZE configuration parameters should be left in the default state Use caution when changing these parameters NET POLL RESPONSE TIMEOUT T392 Determines how long this packet endpoint will wait without receiving a poll ATLAS 890 System Manual 2001 ADTRAN Inc 61200321L1 1A ATLAS 890 Section 4 User Interface Guide Page 127 of 234 before declaring the poll bad erratic behavior will result Ensure that this timer is greater than the T391 on the user side of the UNI otherwise UT NET POLLS PER STATUS N391 Sets the number of link integrity polls before a full status is transmitted NET BAD EVENTS THRESHOLD N392 Sets the number of bad polling events that will cause the link to be declared down
248. gits Choices NORMAL if no digits are to be received ANI DNIS to receive both ANI and DNIS DNIS to receive DNIS only ANI to receive ANI only WINK AFTER ANI DNIS Displayed only if SIGNALING METHOD is configured for FEATURE GROUP D When enabled the ATLAS 890 will transmit a wink after ANI DNIS digits are transmitted DIRECT INWARD DIALING Defines whether Direct Inward Dialing DID is being used by the network If DID is ENABLED then the following information must be defined DID DIGITS TRANSFERRED Defines the number of digits sent to ATLAS 890 from the network if DID is used This option only displays if DID is set to ENABLED DID PREFIX Defines the prefix digits which are not received as a part of the DID number The ATLAS 890 uses the combination of prefix and DID number to determine the user endpoint that should receive the incoming call This option only displays if DID is set to ENABLED If DID is DISABLED then you must define the trunk number Win If FEATURE GROUP D is used DID only refers to DNIS digits CALLER ID NUMBER Defines the number the ATLAS 890 uses to provide caller ID to the network for out going calls sent through this endpoint This item is optional Win The Caller ID number must be specific i e no wildcards STRIP MSD Strips a selected quantity choose from NONE 1 2 and 3 of the most significant dig its MSD of a dialed number prior to being forwarded out of the port Example A
249. gits transferred and ISDN Messages The Event Log can maintain the most recent 350 lines of data in a first in first out buffer To ensure that important data is not lost saving the Event Log mes sages to an external Syslog server is advised The ATLAS 890 ships with an ADTRAN provided Syslog server Prerequisite Procedures This procedure assumes that the ATLAS 890 unit is connected to an IP network and is powered up Tools and Materials Required e Syslog Server provided on ATLAS 890 System CD in ADTRAN Utilities To prevent electrical shock do not install equipment in a wet location or during a W ARNING lightning storm Electronic modules can be damaged by static electrical discharge Before handling modules wear an antistatic discharge wrist strap to prevent damage to electronic dm components Place modules in antistatic packing material when transporting or storing When working on modules always place them on an approved antistatic mat that is electrically grounded 2001 ADTRAN Inc ATLAS 550 System Manual 61200321L1 1A ATLAS 890 Section 5 DLP 013 Page 2 of 4 DLP 013 Setting Up the ATLAS 890 to use the Syslog Login to the system with maximum rights details for login in are in DLP 006 Once you have logged in to the ATLAS 890 go to SYSTEM CONFIG SYSLOG SETUP The options should be set as follows e TRANSMISSION Enabled Host IP ADDRESS Enter the IP address of the PC where the Syslo
250. h days of the week the map is active gt DEDICATED MAPS QUAD T1 PRI OPTION MODULE CONNECTS Write security 3 Read security 5 Enters the dedicated map connections Press lt Enter gt to activate the submenus To FROM CONFIG Write security 3 Read security 5 Specifies the configuration for the TO FROM connection The following selections may apply to the Quad T1 PRI Option Module depending on the application DSO SELECTION Defines DSOs for a T1 port Use this field to define the DSOs for this connection You can enter the DSOs in several ways For example to enter DSOs one through five enter 1 5 For DSOs one and five enter 1 5 DSO AVAILABLE Indicates which DSOs of the T1 are assigned DSO assignment is based on the fol lowing items DIGIT 0 9 This DSO is available The digit that displays in this field represents the last digit of the DSO number This DSO has been requested for this connection but the DSO is not yet acti vated for this port ATLAS 890 System Manual 2001 ADTRAN Inc 61200321L1 1A ATLAS 890 Section 4 User Interface Guide Page 171 of 234 This DSO is used by this port in this connection and is currently activated S This DSO is used in the switched DIAL PLAN S This DSO is used in the switched DIAL PLAN and conflicts with this connec tion n This DSO is already used in this DEDICATED MAP N This DSO is already used in this DEDICATED MAP and conflicts wit
251. h endpoints wait for additional calls to be connected at the end of negotiation before deciding that the BONDING call has failed The factory default setting is sufficient for most calls to connect although when dialing overseas it may be necessary to lengthen this timer to allow for slower call routing TXDEQ TIMER Specifies the length of time both endpoints attempt to equalize the network delay between the bearer channels before deciding the BONDING call has failed 2001 ADTRAN Inc ATLAS 890 System Manual 61200321L1 1A ATLAS 890 Section 4 User Interface Guide Page 26 of 234 TANULL TIMER Specifies the length of time the answering endpoint attempts to detect the BONDING negotiation pattern from the originating endpoint before deciding the BONDING call has failed It may be necessary to shorten this timer if the DTE equipment using the BONDING module also has timer constraints for completing non BONDING parameter negotiation TCID TIMER Specifies the length of time both endpoints attempt to negotiate an agreeable value for bearer channels and channel capacities before deciding the BONDING call has failed CALL STAGGER Specifies the amount of delay between placing calls for outgoing BONDING sessions The following call stagger values are available No STAGGER There is no delay between the call dialing of a BONDING session 500 ms Wait approximately 1 2 second between the call dialing of a BONDING
252. h this con nection DSO RATE Sets the DSO rate to either 56 or 64 kbps This field is only valid for T1 ports mapped to a PKT ENDPNT T1 TRUNK CONDITIONING SERVICE Sets known values in the signaling bits and the data field for outgoing DSOs which are cross connected to a T1 port experiencing alarms The trunk conditioning process consists of a 2 5 second transmission indicating call termination followed by a continuous transmission signaling the final condi tion as chosen by the user This selection is only valid for T1 ports having RBS set to ON This option defines to ATLAS 890 the type of signaling being used on the trunk E amp M LS GS NETWORK or USER SW56 or CUSTOM T1 TRUNK CONDITIONING STATE Defines the final fault signaling state IDLE Used for one way trunks that is for outgoing or incoming calls only not both SEIZED Used for two way trunks Prevents connected equipment from attempting to use a failed trunk for an outgoing call T1 FAULT SIGNALING Displays the final fault signaling state of the AB bits This field is read only unless CUSTOM is chosen for the T1 TRUNK CONDITIONING SERVICE option 2001 ADTRAN Inc ATLAS 890 System Manual 61200321L1 1A ATLAS 890 Section 4 User Interface Guide Page 172 of 234 T1 TROUBLE CODE VALUE Displays the Hex value of the 2 5 second pre alarm transmission gt DEDICATED MAPS QUAD E1 PRA OPTION MODULE CONNECTS Write security 3 Rea
253. he ATLAS 890 components to provide solutions for a variety of wide area networking WAN applications Providing sixteen asynchronous EIA 232 data terminal equip ment DTE ports the Async 232 Module serves as the interface to terminal servers and other DTE equip ment Each port of the Async 232 Module can be configured to operate at any standard asynchronous rate up to 115 2 kbps The Async 232 Module is only supported in dial up applications using the Modem 16 Resource Module and is not a valid interface for TDM data ATLAS 890 System Manual 2001 ADTRAN Inc 61200321L1 1A ATLAS 890 Section 2 Engineering Guidelines Page 1 of 22 ENGINEERING GUIDELINES CONTENTS Equipment Dimensions 2 2 oes eee Soe Gee eee eee ERE ee ee eS 3 Power Requirements 2 00 e cece eee eee hh hh hh m hh hr 3 AG SYSICM yia Va Dee eal ve t Em cua Ad odas mi Vee Gola emer LEAL 3 DG System oeil s uESPSECH Qe eELeeD Ce euer deu epp Vu CR TEM GT ees 3 Reviewing the front Panel Design lelleeeeeeeee I IIR III hh Ih 3 ACO SWING ies crx both main tdi eret iidL d EA ANE LT E Dm d LL D ead 4 CRAET PO mioa esta Mud vest utet ee ub cdi tcd doter ils m prit ete rad 4 Front Panel BEDS ios 4R REA EPPR e UDA HER d S aA udes ea eu Seebp Saud at eed epu 4 Reviewing the Rear Panel Design elsleeseeeeeeee RII nh 7 AAMI FON du e paese o he ES AY LEER EE RT Rp 8 10 100BaseT Connection 0 0 0 hs 8 Alarm Relay Connec
254. he Event Log is a useful tool for troubleshooting switchboard or call connection activities including the viewing of digits received digits transferred and ISDN Messages Since most of the events discussed in the following tables are used primarily during troubleshooting they should be turned off in normal opera tion CONTENTS l Setting the Event Los Category siir sc eb E eae p E A R 2 2 Wiewing the Event Log x oae He Eee ee tte Ue eerie t n e ee eek te qt 3 3 oystem BEVents oee e Re foes AER GENIS ENTM e IEEE Howie taeda ELT UR Ce ders 5 4 ISDN Cause Codes de ate ute RU EU ee de arte e Ha qe E 13 5 Cause Code Log Entries 2 en adeo tee bi PE beber 14 TABLES Tablet System Controller Events nnde nf he etii ip aee tes 5 T ble2 Switchboard Events oe RICE RERO RR OR ee E ta ease 6 Table4 Nx 50 04 Events dace cce ete tette rate tme EE i a A EA Saee itat 7 T ble 3 ACC Events iiec p HR UR I RC ae THES 7 Table CELBYents 2 2 ettet teet nee P e eee hee ere Lettere et a 8 Table 6 Ethernet Bvents nume uem Re a e aeris ee vete ede 10 Table 7 ISDNGE Vents iuri re ee Ge EHE eee eate Lema Delete tein aasit 10 Table 8 lt Circuit Back p Events ua eb Dele be Heec 11 Table 9 DP Outgoing Signaling Events eeeeseeseeeeeeeeere i i e a i ada ia 12 Table 10 ISDN Cause Code Evehts heme Imt e A O a AES 13 Table 11 Cause Code Log Entry Location Designations eseeeeeeeeeeeene
255. he MAX DAYS setting VIEW IQ STATISTICS Write Security 2 Read Security 5 Displays statistical information gathered for intervals and days on a port and for intervals and days on sublinks PVCs or DLCIs INTERVAL AND DAY Descriptions of the statistics available in the INTERVAL or DAY submenus follow RX FRAMES The number of frames the port received for the interval or day Rx BYTES The number of bytes the port received for the interval or day MAX RX THRU The maximum throughput the port received for the interval or day AVG RX THRU The average throughput the port received for the interval or day MAX RX UTIL The maximum utilization the port received for the interval or day AVG RX UTIL The average utilization the port received for the interval or day TX FRAMES The number of frames the port transmitted for the interval or day TX BYTES The number of bytes the port transmitted for the interval or day MAX TX THRU The maximum throughput the port transmitted for the interval or day AVG TX THRU The average throughput the port transmitted for the interval or day MAX TX UTIL The maximum utilization the port transmitted for the interval or day AVG TX UTIL The average utilization the port transmitted for the interval or day 2001 ADTRAN Inc ATLAS 890 System Manual 61200321L1 1A ATLAS 890 Section 4 User Interface Guide Page 138 of 234 Port UA TIME Time in seconds the port is unav
256. he network server on which the update file resides TFTP SERVER FILENAME Write security 1 Read security 5 Identifies the name of the update file to retrieve from the TFTP Server Enter the full path name and filename for the file RESTART SCHEDULE Write security 1 Read security 5 Indicates when to restart the updated module to invoke the new code after selecting a module slot The two options include RESTART IMMEDIATELY AFTER UPDATE and RESTART AT SPECIFIED DATE AND TIME RESTART IMMEDIATELY AFTER UPDATE Write security 1 Read security 5 Automatically restarts the module immediately after the update is complete ATLAS 890 System Manual 2001 ADTRAN Inc 61200321L1 1A ATLAS 890 Section 4 User Interface Guide Page 29 of 234 RESTART AT SPECIFIED DATE AND TIME Write security 1 Read security 5 Lets you specify a date and time to automatically restart the updated module When you select this option a new field called RESTART DATE AND TIME displays below the current field RESTART DATE AND TIME Write security 1 Read security 5 Defines the date and time to restart the system after updating Enter the time using a 24 hour format 1 e 23 25 30 for 11PM 25 minutes 30 seconds Enter the date in mm dd yyyy format i e 11 08 2000 CURRENT UPDATE STATUS Read security 5 Indicates progress or problems encountered during the current update process The field dis plays IDLE if no update is in prog
257. he selected call type regardless of the actual incoming call type The default selection AS RECEIVED effectively disables the fea ture by using the actual call type Other options include DATA 64K and DATA 56K OUT REJ Write security 3 Read security 5 Defines parameters for outgoing calls that ATLAS 890 will not send to the network REJECT NUMBER Identifies which numbers this endpoint will not pass on toward the network The reject list may consist of multiple entries The reject list may be used to more easily specify the call filtering desired The wildcards are identical as in OUTHACCEPT see Out Accept on page 182 Ld The reject list takes precedence over the accept list For example 1 900 rejects all 1 900 long distance calls and 1 rejects all long distance calls DATA 64K DATA 56K AUDIO SPEECH Rejects outgoing calls based on call type For example setting the reject number to Digital 56 64 to ENABLED and Audio and Speech to DISABLED will reject all digital calls but accept analog calls Win This list may remain blank if the accept list meets desired filtering ATLAS 890 System Manual 2001 ADTRAN Inc 61200321L1 1A ATLAS 890 Section 4 User Interface Guide Page 185 of 234 IFCE CONFIG Write security 3 Read security 5 Specifies the configuration parameters for the endpoint The selections displayed in this field are based on the type of module selected in the SLOT SVC
258. he transmission capacity of a communications channel stated in megabits per second Mbps BECN Backward Explicit Congestion Notification Sent to the device generating excessive frame relay traf fic as a means to slow down the flow of data to the network Compare with FECN bit Bit is a contraction of the term binary digit It is the smallest unit of information a computer can pro cess representing either high or low yes or no or 1 or 0 It is the basic unit in data communications A bit can have a value of zero a mark or one a space bps Bits per second A measure of the speed of data communications BRI Basic Rate ISDN An ISDN service that offers two bearer B channels operating at 64 kbps for data transfer and a 16 kbps D channel for signaling and control information Burst A sporadic increase in a transmission Bursty traffic Traffic that alternates between steady transmission and short bursts of high transmission byte Eight bits of information composed of zeros or ones one of which may include a parity bit Caller ID Caller ID is information about the originating party telephone number name date and time of call that is transmitted on the subscriber loop using frequency shift keyed FSK modem tones The mes sage is transmitted using the ASCII character code form Caller ID is not the same as ANI CIR Committed Information Rate The guaranteed bandwidth available for customer data under normal circumstances
259. her ESTAB LISHED or CLOSE WAIT INSEGS The total number of segments received including those received in error This count includes segments received on currently established connections OuTSEGS The total number of segments sent including those on current connections but excluding those containing only retransmitted octets RETRANSSEGS The total number of segments retransmitted that is the number of TCP seg ments transmitted containing one or more previously transmitted octets CLEAR Clears the accumulated statistics Table 5 UDP Statistics Name Description INDATAGRAMS The total number of UDP datagrams delivered to UDP users NOPORTS The total number of received UDP datagrams for which there was no applica tion at the destination port INERRORS The number of received UDP datagrams that could not be delivered for rea sons other than the lack of an application at the destination port OUTDATAGRAMS The total number of UDP datagrams sent from this ATLAS 890 CLEAR Clears the accumulated statistics ATLAS 890 System Manual 2001 ADTRAN Inc 61200321L1 1A ATLAS 890 Section 4 User Interface Guide Page 159 of 234 Table 6 IP Fast Cache Statistics Name Description HITS Total number of times the ATLAS 890 went into the Fast Cache and success fully retrieved an IP address MISSES Total number of times the ATLAS 890 went into the Fast Cache and failed to retrieve an IP address CLEAR Clears the accum
260. his field is already configured with a module you can only set this field to EMPTY To change from one module type to another you must set the field to EMPTY first MENU Read security 5 Displays additional status and configuration menus for the ATLAS 890 controller or selected module To access the submenus for this item use the arrow keys to scroll to the MENU column for the module you want to edit and press Enter For detailed information on each submenu item for a particular module refer to the modules menus discussion for the appropriate network option or resource mod ule ALARM Read security 5 Displays whether there is an alarm condition on the ATLAS 890 controller or selected module Press Enter to access the ALARM menu For detailed information on each submenu item for a particular module refer to the following sections for the appropriate network option or resource module alarm menu discussions TEST Read security 5 Displays whether the ATLAS 890 controller or selected module is executing a test Press Enter to access the TEST menu This option will allow you to setup and initiate tests You may also access this menu through the MENU submenu on this screen For detailed information on each submenu item for a particular module refer to the following sections for the appropriate network option or resource mod ule test menu discussions ATLAS 890 System Manual 2001 ADTRAN Inc 61200321L1 1A A
261. his field will display n a LINE PARAMS Read security 5 Displays technical details about the analog resource for the currently active call This information may be used when troubleshooting modem connection problems with the Modem 16 Option Module RESOURCE STATUS This field indicates the current status of the analog resource The following states are valid ATLAS 890 System Manual 2001 ADTRAN Inc 61200321L1 1A ATLAS 890 Section 4 User Interface Guide Page 89 of 234 n a Module is not able to determine the status of the analog resource AVAILABLE This resource is available for use as an analog call resource IN UsE This resource is currently being used in an analog call TESTING This resource is in a test mode and may be unavailable for use DISABLED This resource has been disable for use as an analog call resource SIGNAL TO NOISE RATIO dB Signal to noise ratio in decibels on the modem s receive signal Rx MEAN SQUARE ERROR Mean square error of the received signal ROUND TRIP DELAY ms Delay between the near and far end modem devices Rx LEVEL dBm Displays the level of the signal in dBm of the signal received by the resource Tx LEVEL dBm Displays the level of the signal in dBm of the signal transmitted by the resource NEAR END ECHO dBm Displays the echo level of the signal in dBm of the signal received by the resource FAR END ECHO dBm Displays the echo leve
262. his limit are not installed or acknowledged This limit value MUST be set identically in all routers attached to the OSPF backbone and or any regular OSPF area i e OSPF stub areas and NSSAs are excluded OVERFLOW INTERVAL SECS The number of seconds that the router will remain in the overflow state During this state the router will regenerate local non default external LSAs When set to 0 the router will not leave overflow state until restarted OVERFLOW STATE Displays the current overflow state The selections are ACTIVE and NOT ACTIVE TOTAL LSA ENTRIES The number of LSA entries registered and acknowledged in the LSA database ATLAS 890 System Manual 2001 ADTRAN Inc 61200321L1 1A ATLAS 890 Section 4 User Interface Guide Page 165 of 234 DATABASE MEMORY ALLOCATED BYTES The total memory allocated to hold the current LSA database This is only the memory of the database itself and does not include the memory used for other OSPF informa tion i e neighbor area or interface data TOTAL ROUTE ENTRIES The total number of route entries registered and acknowledged in the forwarding table DATABASE Write Security 2 Read security 2 Displays information that the router keeps in a database of all LSAs it has created or has learned from other routers AREA ID Displays the area to which this LSA entry belongs This field is not visible when the LSA is an external type LSA LiNK ID Displays the LSA
263. hronized LOS At one point the patter was synchronized but is currently not synchronized SYNC Pattern is synchronized ES Number of seconds with at least one bit error CLR Write security 4 Read security 4 Clears error counters on test pattern results menu INJ Write security 4 Read security 4 Injects errors into transmitted test pattern 2001 ADTRAN Inc ATLAS 890 System Manual 61200321L1 1A ATLAS 890 Section 4 User Interface Guide Page 58 of 234 gt MODULES MENU QUAD USSI OPTION MODULE The ATLAS 890 system controller automatically detects the presence of the Quad USSI Option Module when it is installed in the system listed as USSI To see the menus for the Quad USSI Option Module via the terminal menu use the arrow keys to scroll to the MODULES menu and press lt Enter gt to access the module choices Refer to the Quad USSI Option Module Quick Start Guide for a menu tree containing a complete listing of menus INFO Read security 5 Provides information about the module part number serial number and assembly revision PART NUMBER Read security 5 Displays the part number of the module SERIAL NUMBER Read security 5 Displays the serial number of the module BOARD REVISION Read security 5 Displays the board revision of the installed module ALARM STATUS Read security 5 Displays the current alarm status PRT Read security 5 Indicates the port number
264. ial number and assembly revision PART NUMBER Read security 5 Displays the part number of the module SERIAL NUMBER Read security 5 Displays the serial number of the module BOARD REVISION Read security 5 Displays the board revision of the installed module DS1s DROPPED Read security 5 Displays the number of T1 circuits configured for use in the ATLAS 890 system and not passed through to the drop and insert interface DS1 FRAMER REV Read security 5 Displays the revision of the DS1 framer on the installed module M13 REV Read security 5 Displays the revision of the M13 mux on the installed module Mux CONFIGURATION Write security 3 Read security 5 Allows users to define which T1s should be dropped for use in the ATLAS 890 system or passed on to the drop and insert interface T1s are dropped in pairs DS1 DISPOSITION Read security 5 This field has 28 letters each corresponding from left to right to T1s 1 28 delivered on the T3 primary interface The following letters will display D Dropped available for use in the ATLAS 890 system P Pass through to the drop and insert secondary T3 interface 2001 ADTRAN Inc ATLAS 890 System Manual 61200321L1 1A ATLAS 890 Section 4 User Interface Guide Page 110 of 234 DS1s DROPPED Read security 5 This field shows the number of T1s from the T3 circuit in the primary interface that
265. ic network serving the remote user RPN Private network serving the remote user TN Transit network U User Table 12 ISDN L2 Messages Console Log String Category Event message contents INFO ISDN Layer 2 LAPD Message d Provides a hex dump of the entire LAPD frame Table 13 ISDN Call Control Messages Console Log String Category Event Host gt gt CC lt tag gt lt call ID message INFO ISDN Call Control Messages CC gt gt Host lt tag gt lt call ID message INFO ISDN Call Control Messages Table 14 Source ISDN Information Elements Console Log String Category Event message contents INFO ISDN Information Element a Provides a hex dump of the ISDN IE sent with a call control message 2001 ADTRAN Inc ATLAS 890 System Manual 61200321L1 1A ATLAS 890 Section 6 System Event Logging Page 16 of 16 ATLAS 890 System Manual 2001 ADTRAN Inc 61200321L1 1A ATLAS 890 Glossary Page 1 of 12 GLOSSARY 10 100BaseT Ethernet connection The ATLAS RJ 48C port that provides Ethernet LAN connection for TFTP SNMP and Telnet A Law PCM coding method as defined by the ITU T It is a companding standard for converting between analog and digital in a PCM system A Law is mainly used in Europe u Law is the North American equivalent AMI Alternate mark inversion A Layer 1 line code used in a T1 carrier Zeros are transmitted as zero volts
266. idual packet voice device This field may display the fol lowing N A This device is not populated on the selected VCOM Resource Module AVAILABLE This resource is available for voice compression and functioning properly If a VCOM 8 Option Module is installed 8 voice compression resources will be AVAIL ABLE and the rest will display N A The same principle applies to the VCOM 16 24 and 32 Option Modules PENDING This resource is currently changing state Busy This resource is currently in use TESTING This resource is currently being tested and is not available for use FAILED This resource has failed testing and is not available for use 2001 ADTRAN Inc ATLAS 890 System Manual 61200321L1 1A ATLAS 890 Section 4 User Interface Guide Page 72 of 234 RELOADED This resource was reinitialized after excessive errors ALGORITHM Read security 5 Denotes the voice compression algorithm being used by the packet voice device Any packet voice device can use any available compression algorithm When ATLAS 890 chooses a packet voice device for a particular call the voice compression algorithm is set to match the dial plan endpoint configuration Refer to the Frame Relay menu section of the ATLAS 590 User Manual for more information N A This device has not been assigned a voice compression algorithm G 723 1 CCITT G 723 1 compression 6 3 kbps bandwidth NETCODER Proprietary NETCODER comp
267. ier Choose either AMI or B8ZS TX YEL Write security 3 Read security 5 Controls the transmitting of yellow alarms Choose either ON or OFF Tx PRM Write security 3 Read security 5 Controls the sending of performance report messaging PRM data on the facility data link FDL The PRM data continues to be collected even if XMIT PRM is turned off possible only with ESF format Choose either ON or OFF LBO Write security 2 Read security 5 Selects the Line Build Out LBO for the network interface When connecting a ATLAS 890 port to a DSX 1 interface this parameter is typically set to match the distance in feet between the ATLAS 890 and the device with which it is connecting When you select this item a list of choices displays Select the appropriate option 2001 ADTRAN Inc ATLAS 890 System Manual 61200321L1 1A ATLAS 890 Section 4 User Interface Guide Page 44 of 234 TEST LB ACCEPT Write security 3 Read security 5 Sets unit to accept or reject the in band loop up and loop down codes as defined in ANSI T1 403 This is a line loopback Choose either ACCEPT or IGNORE PULSE DENSITY Write security 3 Read security 5 Choose either ON or OFF When ON Pulse Density Enforcer causes the ATLAS 890 to moni tor for ones 1s density violations and insert a one 1 when needed to maintain ones at 12 596 This data insertion will cause data errors ADLP Write security
268. in N393 polls NET EVENT WINDOW SIZE N393 Defines the number of poll events in each monitored window Ld If the number of bad polls reaches N392 in any N393 period the link will be declared down When N393 good polls are received the link will be declared active again CONFIG PPP Write security 3 Read security 5 Displays the configuration for this packet endpoint AUTHENTICATION Contains the Authentication parameters for this endpoint RX METHOD These are methods the ATLAS 890 uses to authenticate the peer NONE is selected when you do not want to authenticate the peer PAP CHAP or EAP is selected when you will allow the peer to be authenticated with one of the listed authentication protocols In this case the most secure method will be used first EAP then CHAP then PAP CHAP or EAP is selected when you will authenticate the peer only using one of the encrypted authentication protocols EAP is selected when you will authenticate the peer only using the EAP authentication protocol RX AUTHENTICATION This selects the different types of authentication to use to authenticate the peer LOCAL is used when you want to use the local username and password for this port to authenticate the peer 2001 ADTRAN Inc ATLAS 890 System Manual 61200321L1 1A ATLAS 890 Section 4 User Interface Guide Page 128 of 234 RX USERNAME The username the ATLAS 890 will use to authenticate the peer Rx PASSWORD Th
269. in the EA field of the frame relay header INACTIVE DLCI The number of frames received while the PVC is in the inactive state INVALID DLCI The number of frames received with a DLCI value less than 16 or greater than 1007 not including PVC signaling frames SUBLINK Provides statistics for a particular DLCI or PVC by interval or day INTERVAL AND DAY Descriptions of the statistics available in the INTERVAL or DAY submenus follow RX FRAMES The number of frames the PVC received for the interval or day Rx BYTES The number of bytes the PVC received for the interval or day MAX RX THRU The maximum throughput the PVC received for the interval or day AVG RX THRU The average throughput the PVC received for the interval or day MAX RX UTIL The maximum utilization the PVC received for the interval or day AVG RX UTIL The average utilization the PVC received for the interval or day TX FRAMES The number of frames the PVC transmitted for the interval or day TX BYTES The number of bytes the PVC transmitted for the interval or day MAX TX THRU The maximum throughput the PVC transmitted for the interval or day AVG TX THRU The average throughput the PVC transmitted for the interval or day MAX TX UTIL The maximum utilization the PVC transmitted for the interval or day 2001 ADTRAN Inc ATLAS 890 System Manual 61200321L1 1A ATLAS 890 Section 4 User Interface Guide Page 140 of 234 AVG TX UTIL
270. in which order to search for an accept number match Normally all searches are set to primary The secondary search selection forces ATLAS 890 to only accept a call at this endpoint if all primary endpoints are unavailable PRIMARY SEARCH AII long distance calls should go out a PRI directly to an IXC MCI ATT etc and local calls should go out a T1 to the LEC It may be desirable to place long distance calls on the local exchange if all of the IXC trunks are unavailable busy or in alarm In this case the primary accept number for the local exchange would be N and the secondary accept would be 1 SECONDARY SEARCH The same accept rules apply for all secondary number searches as for primary searches 2001 ADTRAN Inc ATLAS 890 System Manual 61200321L1 1A ATLAS 890 Section 4 User Interface Guide Page 184 of 234 DATA 64K DATA 56K AUDIO SPEECH Reflects the bearer capability the network has provisioned for this line If the ISDN lines were purchased with different services provisioned then ATLAS 890 would send the call out of the port which supports the type of service the call requires For example the network termination is on a pair of BRIs with the same phone num ber with one provisioned for data and the other for voice By enabling data in one and not the other ATLAS 890 ensures that calls bearing data will be sent out the right BRI interface TREAT CALL AS Allows the incoming call to be treated as t
271. ine Type is Super D4 Frame AT amp T D4 format DS1 The default value is 691 framing errors for an approximate BER level of 10E 5 TOTAL The DS1 performance monitor Threshold Value for the Total Path PCV THRSH Code Violations PCV parameter when the Line Type is ESF Extended Super Frame DS1 The default value is 132 960 CRC errors for an approximate BER level of 10E 5 TOTAL The DS1 performance monitor Threshold Value for the Total LES THRSH Line Errored Seconds LES parameter The default value is 648 for an approximate BER level of 10E 5 TOTAL The DS1 performance monitor Threshold Value for the Total LCV THRSH Line Code Violations LCV parameter The default value is 133 400 for an approximate BER level of 10E 5 ASP ENDPOINT COMMUNITIES Write security 0 Read security 0 Configures the ADLP list used when accepting incoming traps from remote ADTRAN TSU 100 Series or ISU 512 units For a trap to be recognized and sent to the network management station the remote unit must be listed in the ASP Endpoint Communities list The following parameters must be configured ADLP Enter the ADLP address Unit ID of the remote unit Only traps ADDRESS containing an ADLP address listed here will be accepted ADLP Enter the ADLP password Unit Password of the remote unit PASSWORD The password will be verified before traps will be accepted from the remote unit SNMP ASP PROXY Write security 0 Read security 0 Enables or
272. ines the GET read only and GET SET read and write privileges GET NAME Defines the community name for GET access This value must match the GET name defined on the network management station PUBLIC is the default name SET NAME Defines the community name for SET access This value must match either the GET or SET name defined on the network management station PUBLIC is the default name TRAP TRANSMISSION Write security 3 Read Security 5 Enables and disables SNMP trap transmission AUTHEN TRAP TRANSMISSION Write security 3 Read Security 5 Enables and disables the authentication failure trap ATLAS 890 System Manual 2001 ADTRAN Inc 61200321L1 1A ATLAS 890 Section 4 User Interface Guide Page 21 of 234 TRAPS DESTINATION Write security 3 Read Security 5 Defines the destination for SNMP traps as follows IP ADDRESS COMMUNITY TRAP FILTERING STATION TYPE Identifies the IP address for the network manager NM to sends traps Defines the community name for trap destinations This name must match the community name defined on the NM Sets the minimum severity level required for a system event to generate an SNMP trap If a trap event occurs with a security level equal to or more severe than the trap type s current threshold setting the event is sent as an SNMP trap Refer to the ADTRAN Technical Support web page www adtran com for a listing of all MIBs containing traps and their sec
273. ints SOURCE ID Simplifies the creation of a dial plan in applications where the criterion for switching calls to a certain endpoint is a function of which endpoint originated the call Default value 0 Zero is the default ID for all endpoints and accept numbers With default values all calls are routed based only on the dialed number Multiple endpoints can have the same SOURCE ID When creating the CALL ACCEPT list specify a SOURCE ID s as well as a dialed number or range of dialed numbers to accept OUTDIAL NUMBER This only applies to originating endpoints This is the number dialed when the end point goes into backup FoRCE MODE This forces the backup state of this endpoint This is a configuration setting so it will retain its value until it is changed To temporarily force an endpoint into backup or to force a restore try the Manual activator BACKUP CRITERIA Criteria for automatic backup Note that this setting affects the available options for RESTORE CRITERIA RESTORE CRITERIA This only applies to originating endpoints These are criteria for automatically coming out of backup Note that NETWORK SUCCESS is only available when a backup crite 2001 ADTRAN Inc ATLAS 890 System Manual 61200321L1 1A ATLAS 890 Section 4 User Interface Guide Page 230 of 234 rion is not NET DATA FAIL NET SUCCESS When network is out of alarm MANUAL ONLY Only by the Manual activator STARTUP DELAY The amou
274. ion e Plug the RJ 45 male end of the data cable into the ATLAS 890 Make connection to the PC or laptop as appropriate for your equipment You are now ready to login to ATLAS 890 as described in DLP 006 Logging in to the System Follow up Procedures Once this procedure is complete return to the procedure which referred you to this DLP and continue with the tasks indicated there ATLAS 890 System Manual 2001 ADTRAN Inc 61200321L1 1A ATLAS 890 Section 5 DLP 008 Page 1 of 4 ADDING REMOVING USERS AND CHANGING PASSWORD SECURITY LEVELS Introduction All menu items in the ATLAS 890 are protected by passwords of varying security levels By assigning dif ferent passwords to different security levels the ATLAS 890 System Administrator can control which users can view or change various menu items You can assign multiple passwords at the same access level This way different users with the same access privileges can have different passwords This procedure details the steps which must be performed to add remove user profiles and assign password security levels in the ATLAS 890 Tools and Materials Required e WVT 100 terminal or PC with VT 100 terminal emulation software To prevent electrical shock do not install equipment in a wet location or during a W ARNING lightning storm Electronic modules can be damaged by static electrical discharge Before handling modules wear an antistatic discharge wrist strap to pre
275. ion 172 22 12 50 Ix aston Edit Options Capture Help System Status System Config System Utility Modules Packet Manager outer R Dedicated laps PED E Figure 16 Circuit Status Menu FROM Read security 5 Indicates the slot port and name of the endpoint configured for backup ATLAS 890 System Manual 2001 ADTRAN Inc 61200321L1 1A ATLAS 890 Section 4 User Interface Guide Page 179 of 234 MAN MANUAL BACKUP Write security 3 Read security 5 This activator forces a link in out of backup FB Force Backup FR Force Restoral BKUP STATUS BACKUP STATUS Read security 5 The displayed string indicates the current status of the dedicated line The following selections are available for the BACKUP STATUS menu item FB Backup was forced through the interface menu FR Restoral was forced through the interface menu PRIMARY The link is active DIALING Attempting to dial the backup link BACKUP FAILED Exceeded MAX NUM REDIALS RETRY DIAL NUM Will retry backup dialing in num seconds PRIMARY DOWN The link is in error and waiting on backup ANSWERING The link is answering a backup endpoint BACKUP The link is in backup LINE STATUS Read security 5 Displays the overall status of the connection The following selections are available for the LINE STATUS menu item UNKNOWN Endpoints do not support or are not configured for monitoring ACTIVE
276. ion of an ATLAS 890 using TFTP DLP 011 Loading the Current Configuration of an ATLAS 890 using TFTP DLP 012 Using the ADTRAN Utility Syslog with the ATLAS 890 DLP 013 2001 ADTRAN Inc ATLAS 890 System Manual 61200321L1 1A ATLAS 890 Section 5 Detail Level Procedures Page 2 of 2 ATLAS 890 System Manual 2001 ADTRAN Inc 61200321L1 1A ATLAS 890 Section 5 DLP 001 Page 1 of 4 CONNECTING THE ATLAS 890 TO AN EXTERNAL MODEM Introduction The ATLAS 890 can be accessed and managed via modem allowing the same capabilities to the user as if connected to the local ADMIN or CRAFT access ports Access is provided either by a female RJ 45 connec tor labeled ADMIN located on the back of the unit in the middle of the System Controller module or by the CRAFT port located on the right of the front of the unit Prerequisite Procedures The ATLAS 890 should be mounted in its permanent location before connecting to an external modem Tools and Materials Required e Female RJ 45 to Male DB 25 Connector shipped with unit e Modem e Modem Cable To prevent electrical shock do not install equipment in a wet location or during a Ww ARNING lightning storm Electronic modules can be damaged by static electrical discharge Before handling modules wear an antistatic discharge wrist strap to prevent damage to electronic dm components Place modules in antistatic packing material when transporting or storing When wor
277. isables the transmission of log events to the external Syslog server Hosr IP ADDRESS Write security 3 Read security 3 Lists the IP address of the external server that is running the Syslog host daemon HOST FACILITY Write security 3 Read security 3 Specifies the facility destination of log events Facilities are located on the host and are man aged by the Syslog host daemon running on either a UNIX machine or a PC REAL TIME CLOCK Write security 3 Read security 5 Provides access to the two options listed below You can review and edit these options CURRENT Displays the current date and time including seconds To edit this TIME DATE field enter the time in 24 hour format such as 23 00 00 for 11 00 pm and enter the date in mm dd yyyy format for example 09 23 1998 AUTO DAYLIGHT When enabled automatically updates the time and date when SAVINGS Daylight Savings Time starts and when Standard Time ends ATLAS 890 System Manual 2001 ADTRAN Inc 61200321L1 1A ATLAS 890 Section 4 User Interface Guide Page 25 of 234 ACCESS PASSWORDS Write security 0 Read security 0 Provides a way to edit passwords and to add new users and passwords All menu items are protected by passwords of varying security levels By assigning different passwords to different security levels the ATLAS 890 system administrator can control which users can change various menu items You can assign multiple passwords at the sam
278. ity and the connections The configuration choices are ENDPNT NAME Write security 3 Read security 5 Displays the packet endpoint name as defined in the PACKET ENDPNTS CONFIG menu see also Config ENDPNT NAME on page 125 2001 ADTRAN Inc ATLAS 890 System Manual 61200321L1 1A ATLAS 890 Section 4 User Interface Guide Page 120 of 234 PROTOCOL Read security 5 Displays the layer 2 protocol for this packet endpoint FR indicates this packet end point is configured for frame relay TBOP indicates this packet endpoint is configured for Transparent Bit Oriented Protocol TBOP PPP indicates this packet endpoint is configured for the Point to Point Protocol SIG ROLE Read security 5 Displays the frame relay signaling role for this packet endpoint The following options indicate the signaling role for this packet endpoint These settings are not applicable for PPP USER Indicates the user side of the User to Network Interface UNI NETWORK Indicates the network side of the UNI BOTH Indicates the packet endpoint is operating in Network to Network Interface NNI mode SIG TYPE Read security 5 Displays the frame relay signaling type used on this packet endpoint These settings are not applicable for PPP ANNEX A Signaling using ITU T Q 933 A ANNEX D Signaling using ANSI T1 617 D LMI Signaling using Group of Four SIG STATE FRAME RELAY Read security 5 Indicates the frame relay sign
279. k 28 Terminal in Service 11 DCE Ready A 29 DCE Ready B 12 DTE Ready A 30 DTE Ready B 13 Carrier Detect A 31 Carrier Detect B 14 Remote Loopback 32 Select Standby 15 Ring Indicator 33 Signal Quality 16 Select Frequency 34 New Signal 17 Ext Transmit Clock A 35 Ext Transmit Clock B 18 Test Mode 36 Standby Indicator 37 Send Common CONNECTOR TYPE RS 232 SYSTEM PART NUMBER 4200261L4 Table 17 RS 232 Connector Pinout PIN SIGNAL DESCRIPTION PIN SIGNAL DESCRIPTION 1 Shield Ground 14 Sec Transmit Data 2 Transmit Data 15 DCE Transmit Clock 3 Received Data 16 Sec Received Data 4 Request to Send 17 Receive Signal Element Timing 5 Clear to Send 18 Not used 6 Data Set Ready 19 Sec Request to Send 7 Signal Ground 20 Data Terminal Ready 8 Received Line Signal Detector 21 Signal Quality Detector 9 Voltage 22 Ring Indicator ATLAS 890 System Manual 2001 ADTRAN Inc 61200321L1 1A ATLAS 890 Section 2 Engineering Guidelines Page 17 of 22 Table 17 RS 232 Connector Pinout Continued PIN SIGNAL DESCRIPTION PIN SIGNAL DESCRIPTION 10 Voltage 23 Data Signal Rate Selector 11 Not used 24 DTE Transmit Clock 12 Sec Received LIne Signal Indicator 25 Not used 13 Sec Clear to Send CONNECTOR TYPE CCIT X 21 V 11 SYSTEM PART NUMBER 4200261L3 Table 18 CCIT X 21 V 11 Connector Pinout PIN SIGNAL DE
280. ked up in the IP routing table If the forwarding port is not on the Ethernet port and the route is not the default route the router answers the request with its own hardware address When DISABLED default the router only responds to ARP request received for its own address The ARP protocol itself provides a way for devices to create a mapping between physical 1 e Ethernet addresses and logical IP addresses PROXY ARP uses the mapping feature by instructing a router to answer ARP requests as a proxy for the IP addresses behind one of its ports The device which sent the ARP request then correctly assumes that it can reach the requested IP address by sending packets to the physical address that was returned This tech nique effectively hides the fact that a network has been further subnetted GLOBAL Write security 2 Read security 2 Provides a way to configure various settings for the Ethernet port The following menus are available for review and editing DEFAULT GATEWAY Write Security 2 Read Security 2 Defines or changes the default gateway Enter the default gateway address by entering a deci mal number into the appropriate field and then pressing lt Enter gt to move to the next field You will need a default gateway if the LAN contains multiple segments This address is composed of four decimal numbers each in the range of 0 to 255 separated by periods This value is set to 0 0 0 0 by default Contact your LAN a
281. king on modules always place them on an approved antistatic mat that is electrically grounded 2001 ADTRAN Inc ATLAS 890 System Manual 61200321L1 1A ATLAS 890 Section 5 DLP 001 Page 2 of 4 DLP 001 Perform Steps Below in the Order Listed 2 10 Mount the modem in its permanent position Connect power to the modem using manufacturer instructions Configure the modem as follows Speed 9600 bps Data bits 8 Parity none Stop bits 1 Flow control hardware Auto answer on DTR ignore Connect the male RJ 45 connector of the data cable to the female RJ 45 connector labeled ADMIN located on the back of the unit in the middle of the System Controller module Route the data cable to the modem Connect the other end of the cable to the RJ 45 end of the connector RJ 45 to male DB 25 Then connect the DB 25 end of the connector to the modem configured as described above Connect the modem to the POTS line as required by the manufacturer Login to the ATLAS 890 system Refer to DLP 006 for detailed instructions From the MAIN MENU select the System CONFIG menu and press the right arrow key to enter the right pane menus From the SYSTEM CONFIG menu select the CHAIN PORT menu and press lt Enter gt Once in the CHAIN PoRT menus press the right arrow key to enter the right pane menus ATLAS 890 System Manual 2001 ADTRAN Inc 61200321L1 1A ATLAS 890 Section 5 DLP 001 Page 3 of 4
282. l calls are routed based only on the dialed number Multiple endpoints can have the same SOURCE ID When creating the CALL ACCEPT list specify a SOURCE ID s as well as a dialed number or range of dialed numbers to accept This menu allows the user to define option parameters for ports configured as user packet voice endpoints IFCE CONFIG Write security 3 Read security 5 Specifies the configuration parameters for the endpoint DLCI Selects the appropriate DLCI for this dial plan entry VOICE PORT Identifies the voice port address of the remote unit FSU 5622s support ports 1 and 2 A remote ATLAS supports ports 1 through 255 CONFLICT REPORT Describes existing conflicts Potential problems include DLCI unavailable or Voice port already in use VOICE COMPRESSION Selects the voice compression algorithm used by this endpoint ADTRAN FSU 5622 and Express 5200 Series FRADs use CCITT G 723 1 compression at 6 3 kbps The Express 5200 Series FRADs also support the proprietary NETCODER algorithm at 6 4 kbps Both endpoints must agree about the compression algorithm choice SILENCE SUPPRESSION Reduces the total system bandwidth load by preventing ATLAS from sending frames containing a special silence code during periods of silence Both endpoints must agree to use silence suppression By default silence suppression is DISABLED To prohibit silence frames from transmitting and to decrease the total system bandwidth ENABLE this
283. l characters such as an underbar SYSTEM CONTACT Write security 3 Read security 5 Provides a user configurable text string for a contact name You can use this field to enter the name phone number or e mail address of a person responsible for the ATLAS 890 system You can enter up to 40 alphanumeric characters in this field including spaces and special characters such as an under bar FIRMWARE REVISION Read security 5 Displays the current firmware revision level of the controller SYSTEM UPTIME Read security 5 Displays the length of time the ATLAS 890 system has been running Each time you reset the system this value resets to 0 days O hours 0 min and 0 secs STARTUP MODE Read security 5 Displays details about the last system startup For example rebooting the ATLAS 890 from the SYs TEM UTILITY menu will cause this field to read WARM REBOOT CURRENT TIME DATE 24HR Write security 3 Read security 5 Displays the current date and time including seconds To edit this field place the cursor on the field and press lt Enter gt Then enter the time in a 24 hour format such as 23 00 00 for 11 00 pm and the date in mm dd yyyy format for example 10 30 1998 Press lt Enter gt when you are finished to exit the menu item INSTALLED MEMORY Read security 5 Displays the type and amount of memory in use including Flash memory and DRAM ATLAS 890 System Manual 2001 ADTRAN Inc 61200321L1 1A ATL
284. l input can be used to sense a relay closure or the presence of 48VDC To sense the relay closure connect VOUT 48VDC limited to 1 ma to the COM of the relay to be monitored and connect INPUT to the normally open NO contact of the device to detect when the relay is energized or the normally closed NC to detect when the relay is de energized To sense the presence of 48VDC connect INPUT to the source to be sensed 2 Using standard Telco cross connect wire or equivalent determine and cut the length required to reach from the external input header to the equipment to be sensed 3 Using wire strippers strip V4 inch from both ends of each wire 4 Remove the external input 3 pin terminal block 5 Using the small straight slot screwdriver loosen the screws in the terminal block 6 Insert the wires in the terminal block as determined in Item 1 and tighten the screws A chassis ground connection is also provided Replace the terminal block ATLAS 890 System Manual 2001 ADTRAN Inc 61200321L1 1A ATLAS 890 Section 5 DLP 002 Page 3 of 4 CAUTION RISK OF SUPPLEMENTAL EARTH GROUND MUST BE ELECTRIC SHOCK BP TELECOMMUNICATON WIRING Alarm Relay Connector External Input Connector Figure 1 ATLAS 890 Rear View Alarm Relay Connector Pinout Pin Name Description 1 Normally Closed NC Opens when a selected alarm condition is present 2 Normally Open NO Closes when a select
285. l of the signal in dBm of the signal transmitted by the resource RETRAINS REQUESTED BY REMOTE Number of Retrain Requests sent to the resource RETRAINS GRANTED TO REMOTE Number of Retrain Requests granted by the resource RETRAINS GRANTED TO LOCAL Number of Retrains granted to the resource RENEGOTIATIONS REQUESTED BY REMOTE Number of Renegotiation Requests sent to the resource 2001 ADTRAN Inc ATLAS 890 System Manual 61200321L1 1A ATLAS 890 Section 4 User Interface Guide Page 90 of 234 RENEGOTIATIONS GRANTED TO REMOTE Number of Renegotiation Requests granted by the modem card RENEGOTIATIONS GRANTED TO LOCAL Number of Renegotiation Requests granted to the modem card ANALOG RSRC CONNECTIONS STATS Write security 5 Read security 5 This menu option displays the connection statistics for the analog resources available on the Modem 16 Option Module RSRC Read security 5 Indicates the resource number of the analog call resource On the Modem 16 Option Module analog resources are numbered 1 16 and digital ISDN resources are num bered 17 32 ATTEMPTS Read security 5 Displays the number of connections attempted for this analog resource since the last reset COMPLETED Read security 5 Displays the number of successful connections for this analog resource FAILURES Read security 5 Displays the number of unsuccessful connections for this analog resource It is defined as the n
286. larm Cleared MAJOR Clock Slip Alarm Cleared Nx 56 64 External Clock Alarm Active MAJOR External Clock Alarm 2001 ADTRAN Inc ATLAS 890 System Manual 61200321L1 1A ATLAS 890 Section 6 System Event Logging Page 8 of 16 Table 4 Nx 56 64 Events Continued Console Log String Category Event Nx 56 64 External Clock Alarm Cleared MAJOR External Clock Alarm Cleared Nx 56 64 PLL Alarm Active MAJOR PLL Alarm Active Nx 56 64 PLL Alarm Cleared MAJOR PLL Alarm Cleared Nx 56 64 CTS Asserted INFO CTS Asserted Nx 56 64 CTS Dropped INFO CTS Dropped Nx 56 64 DCD Asserted INFO DCD Asserted Nx 56 64 DCD Dropped INFO DCD Dropped Nx 56 64 DTR Asserted INFO DTR Asserted Nx 56 64 DTR Dropped INFO DTR Dropped Nx 56 64 RTS Asserted INFO RTS Asserted Nx 56 64 RTS Dropped INFO RTS Dropped Table 5 T1 Events Console Log String Category Event T1 Curr CSS Thrs Exceeded WARNING Current T1 Controlled Slip Seconds Threshold Exceeded T1 Curr ES Thrs Exceeded WARNING Current T1 Errored Seconds Threshold Exceeded T1 Curr LCV Thrs Exceeded WARNING Current T1 Line Code Violations Threshold Exceeded T1 Curr LES Thrs Exceeded WARNING Current T1 Line Errored Seconds Threshold Exceeded T1 Curr PCV Thrs Exceeded WARNING Current T1 Path Code Violations Threshold Exceeded T1 Curr SEFS Thrs Exceeded
287. lay net work and a LAN Frame Relay A subset of the X 25 packet switching protocol that allows for efficient transmission of data by utiliz ing many virtual circuits on a single physical interface FTP File Transfer Protocol The TCP IP protocol used to log in to a network list files and directories and transfer files Full Status Poll A poll that occurs each N391 polls and reports the status of each PVC During this poll the frame relay switch can also notify the user side of the UNI of any creation or deletion of frame relay PVCs G 711 ITU specified voice compression algorithm designed to transmit and receive PCM voice at rates of 48 56 and 64 kbps G 723 1 ITU specified voice compression algorithm with a low hit rate 5 3 kbps or 6 3 kbps output quality Groom The assignment and redistribution of any DSO on any T1 circuit to any other DSO on any on the T1 circuits in a DACS Group of Four The Frame Relay Consortium composed of Cisco Systems DEC Nortel and StrataCom which defined an interface for the UNI 2001 ADTRAN Inc ATLAS 890 System Manual 61200321L1 1A ATLAS 890 Glossary Page 6 of 12 HDLC High Level Data Link Control A generic link level communications protocol developed by the Inter national Organization for Standardization ISO HDLC manages synchronous code transparent serial information transfers over a link connection hot swappable A device is hot swappable if it can be installed
288. ld not dial long distance numbers while other users could DATA 64K DATA 56K AUDIO SPEECH Rejects outgoing calls based on call type For example setting the reject number to Digital 56 64 to ENABLED and Audio and Speech to DISABLED rejects all digital calls while not rejecting analog calls Win This list may remain blank if the accept list meets desired filtering IFCE CONFIG Write security 3 Read security 5 Specifies the configuration parameters for the endpoint The selections displayed in this field are based on the type of module selected in the SLOT SVC option For detailed information on submenus for a particular module type please refer to the dial plan interface configuration menu discussion for the appropriate network option or resource module Some of the options available in this submenu change depending on the type of modules Win selected in the SLOT Svc or PORT PEP fields For more information on these submenus refer to the individual module interface configuration menu discussions in this section 2001 ADTRAN Inc ATLAS 890 System Manual 61200321L1 1A ATLAS 890 Section 4 User Interface Guide Page 190 of 234 SUBST TEMPL The substitution template allows the ATLAS 890 to select calls based on telephone number and substitute a user defined number for the received digits after the call has been processed by the switchboard Substitution templates are created for each en
289. le 23 lists the specifications for the ATLAS 890 system Table 23 Specifications Application Feature Specification TDM APPLICATIONS TDM bandwidth 49 Mbps Full duplex Dedicated map connections 766 dedicated DSO map connections in each of the 5 maps SWITCHING APPLICATIONS ISDN signaling types National ISDN Lucent 5E AT amp T 4ESS PRI Only Northern DMS 100 Nortel Custom ETSI DSS1 T1 signaling types Loop Start Ground Start E amp M Wink E amp M Immediate Feature Group D DSP Features DTMF MF tones support Progress tone generation 32 available DSP channels BRI Connections 128 connections PRI Connections 766 DSO connections RBS T1 Connections 766 DSO connections 27 simultaneous dial tones ATLAS 890 System Manual 2001 ADTRAN Inc 61200321L1 1A ATLAS 890 Section 2 Engineering Guidelines Page 21 of 22 Table 23 Specifications Continued Application Feature Specification FRAME RELAY Packet throughput 11 700 pkts sec 64 1500 size packets Management signaling interfaces UNI user and network NNI Management signaling types ANSI T1 617 D Annex D ITU T Q 933 A Annex A LMI Group of four Auto Encapsulation RFC 1490 PVC support 990 PVCs per packet endpoint Congestion control FECN BECN Discard eligible DE Quality of service QOS Prioritization on a per PVC basi
290. le or Voice port already in use VOICE COMPRESSION Selects the voice compression algorithm used by this endpoint ADTRAN FSU 5622 and Express 5200 Series FRADs use CCITT G 723 1 compression at 6 3 kbps The Express 5200 Series FRADs also support the proprietary NETCODER algorithm at 6 4 kbps Both endpoints must agree about the compression algorithm choice SILENCE SUPPRESSION Reduces the total system bandwidth load by preventing ATLAS from sending frames 2001 ADTRAN Inc ATLAS 890 System Manual 61200321L1 1A ATLAS 890 Section 4 User Interface Guide Page 232 of 234 containing a special silence code during periods of silence Both endpoints must agree to use silence suppression By default silence suppression is DISABLED To prohibit silence frames from transmitting and to decrease the total system bandwidth ENABLE this feature SIGNALING METHOD Selects the type of signaling that the remote port is configured to expect Available options include E amp M IMMEDIATE E amp M WINK and LOOP START DIRECT INWARD DIALING Defines whether Direct Inward Dialing DID is used by the remote equipment If DID is enabled then the following options must be configured CALLER ID Defines the number ATLAS uses to provide Caller ID to the network for outgoing calls sent through this endpoint Setting this menu item is optional Source ID Defines the Source ID Setting this menu item is optional DID DIGITS TRANSFERRED Defi
291. lectronic dm components Place modules in antistatic packing material when transporting or storing When working on modules always place them on an approved antistatic mat that is electrically grounded 2001 ADTRAN Inc ATLAS 890 System Manual 61200321L1 1A ATLAS 890 Section 5 DLP 005 Page 2 of 4 DLP 005 Perform Steps Below in the Order Listed To Begin 1 Connect to the ATLAS 890 using either the 10 100 BASET ADMIN or CRAFT interfaces If you are not already connected to the unit s ADMIN or CRAFT interfaces either with a VT 100 compatible terminal or with a PC running VT 100 emulation software use the procedure in DLP 007 to connect to the ADMIN or CRAFT interface Alternately if the unit is part of a management cluster connected to the local network you may use a PC connected to the network to Telnet into the unit Use the procedures in DLP 003 and DLP 004 to connect to the 10 100 BASET interface 2 Login to the unit Login to the unit using the read write password see DLP 006 for details Configure the Alarm Relay 3 Go to the SYSTEM CONFIG menu and press the right arrow key to access the right pane menus Select the ALARM RELAY THRESHOLD menu and choose the appropriate threshold level The ALARM RELAY will set for this threshold and all other alarms of greater impor tance Refer to Section 2 System Event Logging of this system manual for a listing of all alarms and levels of importance
292. les or disables fax over packet capability using the voice compression module STATISTICS Write security 4 Read security 5 These options initiate different types of tests and display test results DEVICE Read security 5 Indicates the resource number of the packet voice device listed On the ATLAS 890 packet voice devices are numbered 1 24 USAGE TIME Write security 4 Read security 5 Measures the total elapsed time that a packet voice device has the status BUSY The time is expressed with millisecond precision Available packet voice devices are assigned new con nections using a round robin technique where all other available packet voice devices must be used before a given device is assigned a new connection This scheme tends to use all packet voice devices evenly If a given device shows significantly less elapsed usage time than other packet voice devices on the same ATLAS 890 that device may be faulty ATLAS FRMS Write security 4 Read security 5 ATLAS Frames Counts every frame that the ATLAS 890 sends to or receives from the packet voice device This count indicates activity but does not indicate the actual amount of frame relay data exchanged The total number of frames handled by the packet voice device is given by the following equation Framesarzpastoral Framesatpas Frames ari aspropped See the ATLAS DROP definition below for a description of the term Frames ary aspropped 2001 ADTRAN In
293. les to the Ethernet network to ensure proper Telnet operation after the update 5 Go to the TRANSFER METHOD menu and select TFTP 6 Enter the IP address of the network TFTP server into the TFTP SERVER IP ADDRESS field T Enter the full path name and filename of the update file into the TFTP SERVER FILENAME field 8 From the RESTART SCHEDULE menu select the time for the module to perform a restart after completing the update process RESTART IMMEDIATELY AFTER UPDATE restarts the system immediately after the update is com plete RESTART AT SPECIFIED DATE AND TIME allows you to select when the updated system will restart If you select this option a new field called RESTART DATE AND TIME displays below the current field To use that option enter the time in 24 hour format such as 23 00 00 for 11 00 pm Enter the date in mm dd yyyy format for example 09 30 2000 9 View CURRENT UPDATE STATUS to verify the progress of the current firmware update or any errors encountered during the download process ATLAS 890 System Manual 2001 ADTRAN Inc 61200321L1 1A ATLAS 890 Section 5 DLP 010 Page 3 of 4 Refer to the table in step 10 for a detailed description of messages found in this field 10 Select BEGIN FIRMWARE UPDATE to start the update process Enter Y to confirm the transfer and to set up the module to receive the TFTP Upload During the TFTP upload process various status messages display in CURRENT UPDATE STATUS
294. llowing characters may display in this field 0 9 This DSO is available The digit that displays in this field represents the last digit of the DSO number This port is requesting this DSO for this connection but the DSO is not yet activated This DSO is used by this endpoint S This DSO is used elsewhere in the switched DIAL PLAN S This DSO is in the switched dial plan and conflicts with this end point n This DSO is used in one or more DEDICATED MAPS This DSO is in one or more DEDICATED MAPS and conflicts with this endpoint SiGNALING METHOD Defines the type of signaling to be used across this trunk The signaling selected needs to match the signaling being provided by the network The following choices are available e E amp M Immediate e E amp M Wink e Loop Start e Ground Start e Feature Group D Win The ATLAS 890 converts signaling types between network and user terminations FGD TX SEQUENCE Displayed only if SIGNALING METHOD is configured for FEATURE GROUP D Defines the format in which to present the outgoing digits Choices NORMAL if no digits are to be sent ANI DNIS to send both ANI and DNIS DNIS to send DNIS only ANI to send ANI only ATLAS 890 System Manual 2001 ADTRAN Inc 61200321L1 1A ATLAS 890 Section 4 User Interface Guide Page 209 of 234 FGD Rx SEQUENCE Displayed only if SIGNALING METHOD is configured for FEATURE GROUP D Defines the format in which to receive the incoming di
295. lls transmitted by this packet endpoint FULL STATUS RX Number of full status polls received by this packet endpoint LINK INTEGRITY STATUS TX Number of link integrity polls transmitted by this packet endpoint LINK INTEGRITY STATUS RX Number of link integrity polls received by this packet endpoint CLEAR COUNTERS Clears all values in this submenu LINK STATS TBOP Write security 3 Read security 5 Displays layer 2 performance statistics The statistics fields for TBOP reflect the total count since last cleared The available statistic information is discussed below TX PACKETS Total number of HDLC packets transmitted through this packet endpoint Rx PACKETS Total number of HDLC packets received through this packet endpoint CLEAR COUNTERS Clears all values in this submenu LINK STATS PPP Write security 3 Read security 5 Displays layer 2 performance statistics The statistics fields for PPP reflect the total count since last cleared The available statistic information is discussed below LCP STATE Displays the current state of the LCP negotiations 2001 ADTRAN Inc ATLAS 890 System Manual 61200321L1 1A ATLAS 890 Section 4 User Interface Guide Page 124 of 234 IPCP Displays the UP if PPP IP control has successfully negotiated TX PACKETS Number of packets transmitted over this link RX PACKETS Number of packets received over this link CLEAR COUNTERS Resets the Tx and Rx pa
296. lowing options are available RECOVERED The ATLAS 890 will derive transmit T3 timing from the receive T3 INTERNAL The ATLAS 890 will derive transmit T3 timing from the internal 20 PPM crystal source Ld Every T3 connection should have one RECOVERED and one INTERNAL transmit clock Failure to configure this will result in T3 clock slips LBO Write security 3 Read security 5 Selects the line build out for the T3 transmitter The following options are available SHORT 0 to 100 feet of cable LONG 100 to 450 feet of cable ATLAS 890 System Manual 2001 ADTRAN Inc 61200321L1 1A ATLAS 890 Section 4 User Interface Guide Page 113 of 234 DS3 TEST Write security 3 Read security 5 Executes loops and indicates test status PRT Read security 5 Indicates the T3 port under test LOOPBACK Write security 3 Read security 5 This field indicates the present loopback selected The following options will display NONE No loopback in effect LINE T3 line loopback active REMOTE LB Write security 3 Read security 5 This field indicates if loopbacks initiated from remote sources are in effect and may be used to execute remote loopbacks on the far end T3 equipment The following options are available NONE No remote loopbacks are activated DS3 LINE T3 line loopback active DS1 1 Remote individual T1 line loopback is activated DS1 28 DS1 ALL Remote TI line loopbacks for all 28
297. ly ANO loaded No additional confirmation is re uested and any online sessions will be W ARNIN fi q y terminated 6 Select the LOAD AND USE CONFIG menu field and press lt Enter gt Enter Y to confirm the request 7 View CURRENT TRANSFER STATUS to verify the progress of the current upload ATLAS 890 System Manual 2001 ADTRAN Inc 61200321L1 1A ATLAS 890 Section 5 DLP 012 Page 3 of 4 8 When the upload process has successfully completed IDLE displays in the CURRENT TRANS FER STATUS field and TFTP DOWNLOAD COMPLETE displays in the PREVIOUS TRANSFER STATUS field 1 NG TFTP is not secure No passwords are required for client access Anyone can access W ANNE files through the IP port on the server machine if they know the target file s name Follow up Procedures Once this procedure is complete return to the procedure which referred you to this DLP and continue with the tasks indicated there 2001 ADTRAN Inc ATLAS 890 System Manual 61200321L1 1A ATLAS 890 Section 5 DLP 012 Page 4 of 4 ATLAS 890 System Manual 2001 ADTRAN Inc 61200321L1 1A ATLAS 890 Section 5 DLP 013 Page 1 of 4 USING THE ADTRAN UTILITY SYSLOG WITH THE ATLAS 890 Introduction The ATLAS 890 Event Log is used to log various message types at settable threshold levels The Event Log is a useful tool for troubleshooting switchboard or call connection activities including the viewing of digits received di
298. ly detects the presence of the Async 232 Option Module when it is installed in the system listed as ASYNC232 To see the menus for the Async 232 Option Module via the terminal menu use the arrow keys to scroll to the MODULES menu and press Enter to access the module choices Refer to the Async 232 Option Module Quick Start Guide for a menu tree con taining a complete listing of menus INFO Read security 5 Provides information about the module part number serial number and assembly revision PART NUMBER Read security 5 Displays the part number of the module SERIAL NUMBER Read security 5 Displays the serial number of the module BOARD REVISION Read security 5 Displays the board revision of the installed module FIRMWARE REVISION Read security 5 Displays the revision of the coprocessor firmware on the installed module 2001 ADTRAN Inc ATLAS 890 System Manual 61200321L1 1A ATLAS 890 Section 4 User Interface Guide Page 78 of 234 PROCESSOR ID Read security 5 Displays the processor ID of the installed module SIGNAL STATS Read security 5 Shows the status of key DTE interface signals An asterisk indicates the presence of a signal and a hyphen indicates no signal present PORT Operating port number The following signals are monitored these options are read only DTR Data terminal ready from DTE DSR Data set ready to DTE RTS Request to send from DT
299. m Event Logging Page 13 of 16 4 ISDN CAUSE CODES In addition to the above events certain recognized ISDN cause codes are sent to the Event Log from the ISDN message facility during ISDN EVENTS L2 MESSAGES and L2 FORMATTED event categories Table 10 lists the codes applicable to the ATLAS 890 and the minimum category required for logging the cause code event Table 10 ISDN Cause Code Events Cause Code Event Category Code ACCESS_INFO_DISCARDED WARNING 43 BAD_INFO_ELEM MAJOR 99 BEAR_CAP_NOT_AVAIL MINOR 58 CALL_REJECTED INFO 21 CAP_NOT_IMPLEMENTED MINOR 65 CHAN_NOT_IMPLEMENTED MINOR 66 CHANNEL_UNACCEPTABLE INFO 6 DEST_OUT_OF_ORDER INFO 27 FACILITY_NOT_IMPLEMENTED MAJOR 69 FACILITY_NOT_SUBSCRIBED MINOR 50 FACILITY_REJECTED INFO 29 INCOMING_CALL_BARRED MINOR 54 INCOMPATIBLE_DEST MAJOR 88 INTERWORKING_UNSPEC MAJOR 127 INVALID_CALL_REF MAJOR 81 INVALID_ELEM_CONTENTS MAJOR 100 INVALID_MSG_UNSPEC MAJOR 95 INVALID_NUMBER_FORMAT INFO 28 MANDATORY IE LEN ERR MAJOR 103 MANDATORY IE MISSING MAJOR 96 NETWORK CONGESTION WARNING 42 NETWORK OUT OF ORDER WARNING 38 NO CIRCUIT AVAILABLE WARNING 34 NO ROUTE INFO 2 NO USER RESPONDING INFO 18 2001 ADTRAN Inc ATLAS 890 System Manual 61200321L1 1A ATLAS 890 Section 6 System Event Logging Page 14 of 16 Table 10 ISDN Cause Code Events Continued
300. mA Chassis Ground GND 2001 ADTRAN Inc ATLAS 890 System Manual 61200321L1 1A ATLAS 890 Section 2 Engineering Guidelines Page 10 of 22 5 OPTION MODULE INTERFACES Quad T1 PRI Option Module P N 1200185L3 Each port of the Quad T1 PRI Option Module uses a single eight position modular jack to connect to the T1 or PRI circuit Table 8 gives the pinout for this jack CONNECTOR TYPE USOC RJ 48C Table 8 T1 PRI Pinout PIN NAME DESCRIPTION 1 R1 RXDATA RING Receive data from the network 2 T1 RXDATA TIP Receive data from the network 3 UNUSED 4 R TXDATA RING Send data towards the network 5 T TXDATA TIP Send data towards the network 6 7 8 UNUSED Quad E1 PRA Option Module P N 1200264L1 The DB 62 port of the Quad E1 PRA Option Module supplies a DB 15 connection as defined in Table 9 using provided adapter cables The DB 62 interface pinout is shown in Table 10 Table 9 DB 15 Connector Pinout PIN NAME DESCRIPTION 1 RT Receive Tip 2 GND Ground 3 TT Transmit Tip 4 GND Ground 5 GND Ground 7 GND Ground 9 RR Receive Ring 11 TR Transmit Ring ATLAS 890 System Manual 2001 ADTRAN Inc 61200321L1 1A ATLAS 890 Section 2 Engineering Guidelines Page 11 of 22 Table 10 DB 62 Connector Pinout PIN NAME DESCRIPTION PIN NAME D
301. match the SPID s and phone number s programmed into the ISDN switch for this line Each BRI may have one or more phone numbers and SPIDs The SPID LIST submenu defines these parameters to ATLAS PHONE NUMBER The phone number s assigned to this BRI phone line SPID NUMBER This entry must match the SPID number s which has been set in the network s ISDN switch or in the PBX for this BRI line A SPID must be entered for each phone number CALLS The number of calls 1 or 2 which can be received or sent on this number SPID D64 D56 AUDIO SPEECH These options reflect the network provisions for this SPID If the BRI was pur chased with different services provisioned for the SPIDs then the call must match the services supported STRIP MSD Strips a selected quantity choose from NONE 1 2 and 3 of the most significant dig its MSD of a dialed number prior to being forwarded out of the port ATLAS 890 System Manual 2001 ADTRAN Inc 61200321L1 1A ATLAS 890 Section 4 User Interface Guide Page 223 of 234 Example A network port could be set to accept all calls beginning with 9 9 and then with STRIP MSD set to 1 all digits would be sent toward the network except the leading 9 toe STRIP MSD does not affect CALL ACCEPT criteria All of the digits including the MSDs that are subsequently stripped are used as accept criterion USER TERM Source ID Simplifies the creation of a dial plan in a
302. mation about the unit as well as data fields for editing infor mation Figure 3 displays the submenus and data fields that are available when you select this menu item Telnet Connection 172 22 12 50 Session Edit Options Capture Help I nto ystem N PII y System Location Adtran ATLAS 890 System Config System Contact Adtran ATLAS 890 System Utility Firmware Revision 80012 05 20 01 08 37 44 Modules System Uptime d 4 guns 23 mn 42 secs Packet Manager Startup Mode T Router Current Time Date 24h 41 13 27 47 2001 Dedicated Maps Installed Memory Flash 419 304 bytes DRAM 16777216 byte Circuit Status Serial Number B18 Dial Plan Boot ROM Rev A 00 03 03 06 01 Figure 3 System Information Menu 2001 ADTRAN Inc ATLAS 890 System Manual 61200321L1 1A ATLAS 890 Section 4 User Interface Guide Page 10 of 234 SYSTEM NAME Write security 3 Read security 5 Provides a user configurable text string for the name of the ATLAS 890 This name can help you dis tinguish between different installations You can enter up to 40 alphanumeric characters in this field including spaces and special characters such as an underbar SYSTEM LOCATION Write security 3 Read security 5 Provides a user configurable text string for the location of the ATLAS 890 This field is to help you keep track of the physical location of the unit You can enter up to 40 alphanumeric characters in this field including spaces and specia
303. mber is entered here it will be dialed when DTR goes active CALLOUT PROTOCOL Write security 3 Read security 5 This field determines what type or resource will be allocated and the data protocol that will be used for an outgoing call attempt for the port The following selections are available ANALOG MODEM An outgoing call attempts to allocate a modem resource and make an analog call Asynchronous data is passed unmodified between the Async 232 Mod ule port and the allocated modem The analog modem resource is freed when the call is hungup ATLAS 890 System Manual 2001 ADTRAN Inc 61200321L1 1A ATLAS 890 Section 4 User Interface Guide Page 83 of 234 ISDN PPP An outgoing call attempts to allocate an ISDN resource and make a digital call Both ends of the call must be using PPP as the protocol to communicate across the link The Async 232 Module port performs PPP Async to Sync conversion between the asynchronous DCE port and the synchronous ISDN link This conversion is the standard method of transporting PPP frames avail able in ISDN Terminal Adapters from ADTRAN and other manufacturers The PPP Async to Sync protocol complies with the Internet Engineering Task Force IETF RFC 1662 For the ISDN call to be routed outside ATLAS 890 a PRI or BRI interface must be connected to the system and be correctly configured Our ISDN CALL TYPE Write security 3 Read security 5 When CALLOUT PROTOCOL has been set to
304. med zeros QRSS Pseudo random pattern with suppression of excess zeros QRSS RLB RESULTS Write security 4 Read security 5 Displays current status of T1 tests including information regarding loopbacks and test patterns When displaying test pattern status the display string is composed of pattern sync status and errored seconds NONE No sync LOS Sync has been lost SYNC Pattern is synchronized ES Number of seconds with at least one bit error CLR Write security 3 Read security 5 Clears error counters on test pattern results menu INJ Write security 3 Read security 5 Injects errors into transmitted test pattern 2001 ADTRAN Inc ATLAS 890 System Manual 61200321L1 1A ATLAS 890 Section 4 User Interface Guide Page 46 of 234 gt MODULES MENU QUAD E1 PRA OPTION MODULE This section provides detailed information on the MODULES menu and submenus for the Quad EI PRA Option Module The ATLAS 890 system controller automatically detects the presence of the Quad EI PRA Option Module when it is installed in the system listed as E1 PRA To see the menus for the Quad E1 PRA Option Module via the terminal menu use the arrow keys to scroll to the MODULES menu and press Enter to access the module choices INFO Read security 5 Displays general information about the Quad E1 PRA Option Module as follows PART NUMBER Read security 5 Displays the part number of the Quad E1
305. n Edit Options Capture Help HS 87U Modules i UONE Module vpe ys Ctr Modules i Sys Ctrl Menus Hodules 11 Module Operation ONLINE Hodules 21 Module Status Online Modules 3 Module Assembly Rev B Modules 4 Modules 5 Modulesl6 Hodules 71 Modules 8 Modules 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 S ALRI BL RI ALRI BL RI ZALRM O ALRN BL RI SCB STBY 10 ALRM 11 ALRM 12 ALRM 13 ALRM 14 ALRM 15 ALRM 16 ALRM PS OK Module menus help 5U El Figure 2 Alternate Menu View Window Pane Navigation Use the following chart to assist you in moving between and within the two window panes To do this Press this key Move from left pane to right pane Tab Enter Right arrow Move from right pane to left pane Tab Escape Left arrow Backspace Move within each pane Up arrow Down arrow Left arrow Right arrow Right Window Pane Notation The right window pane shows the contents of the currently selected menu These contents can include both submenu items and data fields Some submenus contain additional submenus and ATLAS 890 System Manual 2001 ADTRAN Inc 61200321L1 1A ATLAS 890 Section 4 User Interface Guide Page 5 of 234 some data fields contain additional data fields The following chart explains the notation used to identify these additional items This notation Means that More items are available when selected DATA More items are available when
306. n a pull down menu which includes the ROUTER option This router is the internal ATLAS 890 router and can be used multiple times within the PACKET CNCTS menu SUBLINK Write Security 3 Read Security 5 If the packet endpoint selected in FROM PEP supports sublinks they are available in this menu In frame relay this is the PVC from which you are selecting to groom data To PEP Write Security 3 Read Security 5 Selects the other packet endpoint for the packet connection Refer to FROM PEP for more detail SUBLINK Write Security 3 Read Security 5 If the To PEP packet endpoint supports sublinks the available sublinks are shown within this menu which includes the ROUTER option ATLAS 890 System Manual 2001 ADTRAN Inc 61200321L1 1A ATLAS 890 Section 4 User Interface Guide Page 135 of 234 PROTOCOL Write Security 3 Read Security 5 Selects the protocols for this packet connection Selecting the protocols on each individual connection allows the mixing of data from multiple sources onto a single PVC Available pro tocols include the following ALL IP BRIDGE IP PACKET VOICE SNA SNAP and TRANS PARENT PROTOCOLS TBOP and TASYNC Keep in mind the following If ALL is selected additional connections from that PVC are not allowed Win 2 If ROUTER is selected as one packet endpoint IP is automatically set as the PROTOCOL 3 Ifa TBOP packet endpoint is selected as one packet endpoint TRAN
307. nd FEBE statistics NEBE Near end block errors FEBE Far end block errors CONFIGURATION Write security 3 Read security 5 All of the following configurable parameters apply to the individual U BRI interfaces PRT Read security 5 Displays the port number PORT NAME Write security 3 Read security 5 Accepts any alpha numeric name up to 16 characters long to uniquely identify each port on the Octal BRI Option Module 2001 ADTRAN Inc ATLAS 890 System Manual 61200321L1 1A ATLAS 890 Section 4 User Interface Guide Page 70 of 234 TEST Write security 5 Read security 5 These options initiate different types of tests and display test results LOCAL LOOPBACK Write security 4 Read security 5 Activates a local loopback toward the U interface The following options are available NONE No active loopback LOOPBACK B1 Loops the first B channel of the interface LOOPBACK B2 Loops the second B channel of the interface LOOPBACK B1 B2 Loops both B channels of the interface LOOPBACK 2B D Loops the entire physical interface REMOTE LOOPBACK Write security 4 Read security 5 Activates a loopback towards the controller The following options are available NONE No active loopback LOOPBACK B1 Loops the first B channel of the interface LOOPBACK B2 Loops the second B channel of the interface LOOPBACK 2B D Loops the entire physical interface gt MODULES MENU VOICE COMPRESSION RESOURCE MODULE
308. nes the number of digits sent to ATLAS from the network if DIRECT INWARD DIALING is enabled DID PREFIX Defines to ATLAS the prefix digits which are not received as a part of the DID num ber ATLAS uses the combination of prefix and DID number to determine the user endpoint that should receive the incoming call TRUNK NUMBER Determines which user endpoint should receive the incoming call when the network connection does not provide DID digits This field only displays if DIRECT INWARD DIALING is set to DISABLED STRIP MSD Strips a selected quantity choose from NONE 1 2 and 3 of the most significant dig its MSD of a dialed number prior to being forwarded out of the port Example A network port could be set to accept all calls beginning with 9 9 and then with STRIP MSD set to 1 all digits would be sent toward the network except the leading 9 oe STRIP MSD does not affect CALL ACCEPT criteria All of the digits including the MSDs that are subsequently stripped are used as accept criterion ATLAS 890 System Manual 2001 ADTRAN Inc 61200321L1 1A ATLAS 890 Section 4 User Interface Guide Page 233 of 234 USER TERM Source ID Simplifies the creation of a dial plan in applications where the criterion for switching calls to a certain endpoint is a function of which endpoint originated the call Default value 0 Zero is the default ID for all enpoints and accept numbers With default values al
309. network port could be set to accept all calls beginning with 9 9 and then with 2001 ADTRAN Inc ATLAS 890 System Manual 61200321L1 1A ATLAS 890 Section 4 User Interface Guide Page 210 of 234 STRIP MSD set to 1 all digits would be sent toward the network except the leading 9 We STRIP MSD does not affect CALL ACCEPT criteria All of the digits including the MSDs that are subsequently stripped are used as accept criterion SOURCE ID Simplifies the creation of a DIAL PLAN in applications where the criterion for switch ing calls to a certain endpoint is a function of which endpoint originated the call DEFAULT VALUE 0 Zero is the default ID for all endpoints and all accept num bers With default values all calls are routed based only on the dialed number Multiple endpoints can have the same SOURCE ID When creating the CALL ACCEPT list specify a SOURCE ID s as well as a dialed number or range of dialed numbers to accept Example An application requires that all calls that originate from Port 1 of the ATLAS 890 in Slot 1 be switched to Port 2 of that same module Assign a unique Source ID e g 7 to Port 1 of the module and then configure Port 2 to only accept calls from that unique Source ID 7 DIAL ON OFFHOOK Defines a number that is automatically sent to the switchboard when a call on this end point is initiated goes off hook Win The DIAL ON OFFHOOK number must be specific i e
310. ng and outgoing analog modem calls Selected options are issued to the modem when it is allocated to answer an incoming call or initiate an outgoing call Some options imply a negotiation with the remote modem These modem options may also be specified through the AT command interface if enabled HiGHEST BiT RATE Write security 3 Read security 5 Selects the highest bit rate the allocated modem will attempt to connect with to the remote modem Modulation scheme is automatically selected based on the connection speed LOWEST BIT RATE Write security 3 Read security 5 Selects the lowest bit rate the allocated modem will attempt to connect with to the remote modem If the lowest bit rate or higher cannot be negotiated with the remote modem the call is disconnected Modulation scheme is automatically selected based on the connection speed ERROR CORRECTION Write security 3 Read security 5 Configures the error correction for the allocated modem The following options are available DISABLED No error correction is requested If the remote modem refuses to support the option the call is disconnected Although no error correction is used this mode still allows speed matching data buffering and flow control AUTO RELIABLE LINK MODE Modem will attempt to negotiate LAPM MNO or no error correction with the remote modem This is the default setting FORCE LAPM MODE Modem will attempt to negotiated LAPM error correction with the r
311. ng power temperature fan and external input alarms The following status symbols are used Normal condition Failure condition No Information Available POWER ALARMS Read security 5 Indicates that one or both of the power supplies are not functional These power supplies are continuously monitored to determine failures If one of these supplies fails a message will be placed in the EVENT LOG see Section 7 System Event Logging for more details 2001 ADTRAN Inc ATLAS 890 System Manual 61200321L1 1A ATLAS 890 Section 4 User Interface Guide Page 14 of 234 TEMPERATURE ALARMS Read security 5 Indicates that the internal temperature of the power supply has exceeded normal operating lim its When the operating temperature is exceeded by any power supply in slots 14 17 a warning will be placed in the EVENT LOG see Section 7 System Event Logging for more details but no other action will be taken FAN ALARMS Indicates that installed fans are operating normally EXTERNAL INPUT ALARMS Indicates that the external input has been activated Indicates input is not active Indicates input is active SYSTEM TIMING SOURCE Read security 5 Indicates which timing source primary or backup is currently being used by ATLAS 890 and whether the system is locked onto this source If the display does not indicate locked the ATLAS 890 does not have a valid source of timing and cannot reli
312. nication costs and hop count SNA Systems Network Architecture Network architecture developed by IBM in the 1970s SNMP Simple Network Management Protocol A control and reporting scheme widely used to manage devices from different vendors SNMP operates on top of the Internet protocol SVC Switched Virtual Circuit Virtual circuit within the frame relay network that is created only when needed Bandwidth parameters are defined each time the circuit is created synchronous 1 The condition occurring when two events happen in a specific time relationship with each other both under control of a master clock 2 A method of data transmission requiring the transmission of timing pulses to keep the sender and receiver synchronized in their communication used to send blocks of information Synchronous data transmission is used in high speed data circuits because there is less overhead than asynchro nous transmission of characters which contain two extra bits per character to affect timing TI circuit Also T 1 A digital transmission link with a capacity of 1 544 Mbps T1 uses two pairs of normal twisted wires T1 normally can handle 24 voice conversations with each conversation being digitized at 64 kbps With more advanced digital voice encoding techniques it can handle more voice chan nels T1 is a standard for digital transmission in North America T391 Defines the time in seconds between frame relay link integrity polls ATLAS 8
313. nnected TX FRAMES Read security 5 Displays the number of data frames transmitted by the analog resource to the remote client modem during the current call This parameter is reset once the call is discon nected RX FRAMES Read security 5 Displays the number of data frames received by the analog resource from the remote client modem during the current call This parameter is reset once the call is discon nected RX OVRNS Read security 5 Displays the number of receiver overruns which occurred on the analog resource dur ing the current call A receiver overrun occurs when the client modem transmits data too fast for the analog resource to keep up This causes data to be lost This parameter is reset once the call is disconnected Rx PRTY Read security 5 Displays the number of bytes received by the analog resource from the remote client modem during the current call This parameter is reset once the call is disconnected RX FRME Read security 5 Displays the number of framing errors detected by the analog resource during the cur rent call This parameter is reset once the call is disconnected 2001 ADTRAN Inc ATLAS 890 System Manual 61200321L1 1A ATLAS 890 Section 4 User Interface Guide Page 92 of 234 Rx CRC BAD Read security 5 Displays the number of received PPP frames by the analog resource from the remote client modem during the current call This is used only when the analog resource is
314. nnections to endpoints supporting aggregation e g BONDING of the specified number of DSOs Max DSO s Set this to 1 for typical single call connections A value greater than 1 will accommo date connections to endpoints supporting aggregation e g BONDING of up to the specified number of DSOs This also sets the number of DSOs presented in the negoti ation of outgoing aggregate calls CALL ROUTING TABLE This table is only visible if GROUP is selected in the PRT PEP field The table format changes based on the selected routing option For each case CALL PARAMS contain OUTDIAL CALLER ID SOURCE ID and MIN MAX DSOsS as described above gt DIAL PLAN CIRCUIT BACKUP CONNECTIONS USER TERM This menu allows the user to define option parameters for ports configured as backup endpoints IFCE CONFIG Write security 3 Read security 5 Specifies the configuration parameters for the endpoint ATLAS 890 System Manual 2001 ADTRAN Inc 61200321L1 1A ATLAS 890 Section 4 User Interface Guide Page 229 of 234 ORIGINATE ANSWER The following selections are available for the ORIGINATE ANSWER menu item ORIGINATE The endpoint will originate the backup call ANSWER The endpoint will answer any incoming calls but will only go into backup if an error is detected ANSWER ANY The endpoint will answer any incoming calls and go immediately into backup OUTGOING CALL TYPE This only applies to originating endpo
315. nsupported protocol The number of input IP datagrams for which no problems were encountered to prevent their continued processing but which were discarded e g for lack of buffer space Note that this counter does not include any datagrams dis carded while awaiting re assembly ATLAS 890 System Manual 2001 ADTRAN Inc 61200321L1 1A ATLAS 890 Section 4 User Interface Guide Page 155 of 234 Table 2 IP Statistics Continued Name Description INDELIVERS The total number of input datagrams successfully delivered to IP user proto cols including ICMP OUTREQUESTS The total number of IP datagrams which local IP user protocols including OUTDISCARDS OUTNOROUTES REASMTIMEOUT REASMREQDS REASMOKS REASMFAILS FRAGOKS FRAGFAILS FRAGCREATES CLEAR ICMP supplied to IP in requests for transmission Note that this counter does not include any datagrams counted in FORWDATAGRAMS The number of output IP datagrams for which no problem was encountered to prevent their transmission to their destination but which were discarded e g for lack of buffer space Note that this counter would include data grams counted in FORWDATAGRAMS if any such packets met this discre tionary discard criterion The number of IP datagrams discarded because no route could be found to transmit them to their destination Note that this counter includes any packets counted in FORWDATAGRAMS which meet this no route
316. nt of time to wait after creating or changing the endpoint before allowing backup BACKUP DELAY The amount of time to delay after detecting an alarm before going into backup This only applies to originating endpoints If the circuit comes out of alarm before this time has expired the endpoint will not go into backup RESTORE DELAY The amount of time to delay after clearing an alarm before coming out of backup This only applies to originating endpoints If the circuit goes into alarm before this time has expired the endpoint will remain in backup MAX Num REDIALS The backup endpoint will attempt this many retries before giving up and declaring a backup failure This only applies to originating endpoints REDIAL TIMER The amount of time delayed between a failed backup call and the redial This only applies to originating endpoints ENABLE SCHEDULE Use this menu to schedule the times when backup is enabled The following selections are available for the ENABLE SCHEDULE menu item ENABLE TIME This is the time of day to enable dial backup DISABLE TIME This is the time of day to disable dial backup If the disable time is earlier than the enable time backup monitoring will be active across midnight DAYS ENABLED Use this record to enable disable backup monitoring on particular days of the week TEST CALL This only applies to originating endpoints Use this menu to schedule regularly occur ATLAS 890 System Manual 2001 ADT
317. nticates Hello packets from other routers when Mode Valid or Mode Transmit The Key is a maximum 16 character password KEY ID Associates a particular key to an ID which may be necessary to change keys in a multi router system ore Only one entry can TRANSMIT at a time HELLO TIME The number of seconds of the intervals between Hello packets that the router sends on the interface This value usually 10 must be the same for all routers attached to a common network 2001 ADTRAN Inc ATLAS 890 System Manual 61200321L1 1A ATLAS 890 Section 4 User Interface Guide Page 150 of 234 DEAD TIME The number of seconds that a router s Hello packets have not been seen before its neighbors declare the router down This value should be some multiple of the HELLO TIME interval and must be the same for all routers attached to a common network RETX INTERVAL The number of seconds between link state advertisement retransmissions for adjacen cies belonging to this interface This value is also used when retransmitting database description and link state request packets TRANSMIT DELAY The estimated number of seconds it takes to transmit a link state update packet over this interface Cost Calculates the cost of using an interface by dividing 10e8 by the bandwidth which is then advertised as the cost or penalty of using the interface If set to 0 the cost is automatically calculated using the interface bandwidth
318. number to use to provide Caller ID to the network for outgoing calls sent through this endpoint Choose from SEND AS PROVIDED SUBSTITUTE IF NOT PRESENT or SUBSTITUTE ALWAYS Win The Caller ID number must be specific i e no wildcards 2001 ADTRAN Inc ATLAS 890 System Manual 61200321L1 1A ATLAS 890 Section 4 User Interface Guide Page 218 of 234 SOURCE ID Simplifies the creation of a dial plan in applications where the criterion for switching calls to a certain endpoint is a function of which endpoint originated the call Default value 0 Zero is the default ID for all endpoints and all accept numbers With default values all calls are routed based only on the dialed number Multiple endpoints can have the same SOURCE ID When creating the CALL ACCEPT list specify a SOURCE ID s as well as a dialed number or range of dialed numbers to accept Example An application requires that all calls that originate from Port 1 of the ATLAS 890 in Slot 1 be switched to Port 2 of that same module Assign a unique Source ID e g 7 to Port 1 of the module and then configure Port 2 to only accept calls from that unique Source ID 7 Swap ANI DNIS Swaps the ANI and DNIS numbers received from the network ANI Automatic Num ber Identification is the billing number of the calling party and DNIS Dialed Num ber Identification Service is the called party number Won With this swap the ATLAS 890 switchboard uses
319. o conferencing Transparent BOP See TBOP trunk A direct line between two telephone switching centers 2001 ADTRAN Inc ATLAS 890 System Manual 61200321L1 1A ATLAS 890 Glossary Page 12 of 12 TSU T1 Service Unit UDP User Datagram Protocol Connectionless protocol defined by RFC 768 for transmission of data with out acknowledgment or error control UNI User to Network Interface Defines the interface between the CPE and the frame relay providers switch Voice Compression A means of reducing the bandwidth required for transmission of voice traffic with minimal impact on the quality of the voice VT 100 A non intelligent terminal or terminal emulation mode used for asynchronous communications Used to configure the ATLAS 890 WAN Wide Area Network A network that connects users across large distances XMODEM An error correcting file transfer data transmission protocol used to transmit files between PCs The XMODEM protocol sends information in128 byte blocks of data Some sums check sums are done on each block and the result is sent along with the block If the result does not check out at the other end the computer at the other end sends a request a NAK negative acknowledgment to retransmit that block again If the block checks out the computer send ACK an acknowledgment In this way relatively error free transmissions can be accomplished ATLAS 890 System Manual 2001 ADTRAN Inc
320. odule P N 1200262L1 The Nx 56 64 IMUX Resource Option Module supports multiple independent BONDING sessions with each session capable of using from 2 to 32 channels of 56K or 64K data The Nx 56 64 IMUX Resource Module combines with other ATLAS 890 components to provide a flexible disaster recovery system HDLC Resource Module P N 1200222L1 Certain ATLAS applications require a large number of High level Data Link Control HDLC controllers beyond the 35 supplied on the system controller module The HDLC Resource Module contains 128 HDLC controllers and is used when the application requirements call for more HDLC controllers than are provided with the other ATLAS hardware components The HDLC Resource Module provides no physical interfaces Modem 16 Resource Module P N 1200181L1 The Modem 16 Resource Module is a high capacity card for the ATLAS Integrated Access System capa ble of processing 16 modem calls and 16 ISDN calls Modem or ISDN calls are presented to ATLAS via one or more Primary Rate ISDN PRI Basic Rate ISDN BRD or T1 circuits The Modem 16 Resource Module can be used in cooperation with the Safe T Net feature of the ATLAS 890 to provide a V 34 disas ter recovery solution The Modem 16 Resource Module combines with the Async 232 Module to enable dial up access for up to 32 users The Modem 16 Resource Module provides no physical interfaces Async 232 Option Module P N 1200182L 1 The Async 232 Module combines with t
321. odule provides eight Basic Rate ISDN BRI U interfaces each capable of operating in either NT or LT mode Any port can deliver timing for the system T3 Option Module P N 1200223L 1 The T3 Option Module provides a single channelized T3 interface that allows bandwidth management of up to 28 T1s Functions as a T3 DSU CSU M13 multiplexer and 3 1 0 timeslot interchange DACS The T3 clock or any of the odd T1s contained in the T3 circuit may deliver timing for the system T3 Option Module with Drop and Insert Interface P N 1200225L 1 The T3 Option Module with Drop and Insert Interface provides a single channelized T3 interface for pri mary service and an additional drop and insert interface for passing T3 channels in T1 pairs to a second ary channelized T3 device Functions as a T3 DSU CSU M13 multiplexer and 3 1 0 timeslot interchange DACS The T3 clock or any of the odd T1s contained in the T3 circuit may deliver timing for the system 8 16 24 32 Channel Voice Compression Resource Modules P N 1200221Lx The Voice Compression Module VCOM Module combines with other ATLAS 890 components to implement voice over frame relay VoFR capability The Voice Compression Resources modules support 8 16 24 or 32 simultaneous compressed calls using G 723 1 or Netcoder compression algorithms 2001 ADTRAN Inc ATLAS 890 System Manual 61200321L1 1A ATLAS 890 Section 1 System Description Page 6 of 6 Nx 56 64 IMUX Resource M
322. oftware flow control uses XON and XOFF characters in the data stream to control flow NONE No flow control selected for this port FMT Write security 5 Read security 5 Configures the asynchronous character format options for the Async 232 port The following fields are applicable DATA BITS Number of data bits per character PARITY Parity method used for transmit and receive characters STOP BITS Number of stop bits per character CALL DIR Write security 3 Read security 5 Configures the Async 232 port to answer incoming calls and or originate outgoing calls The following options are available IN ONLY OUT ONLY and IN amp OUT IN CTRL Write security 3 Read security 5 Selects the method by which incoming calls are indicated to and controlled by the DTE Options include the following AT CMDS AT commands and responses indicate and control calls AT commands also support port and allocated modem or ISDN resource configuration DTR DCD An activated data carrier detect DCD signal indicates that an incoming call is answered from the Async 232 Module port Upon call hang up the DCD becomes inactive The data terminal ready DTR signal must be active from the DTE for an incoming call to be answered If the port is part of a group assigned in the Dial Plan then the first idle port with DTR active will answer the call If the DTE drives DTR inactive the Async 232 Module port hangs up an active call 2001 A
323. og Setu DS3 Module Real Time Clock Ethernet Events Access Passwords Frame Relay BONDING Config ISDN Events Ext Input Threshold ISDN L2 Messages ISDN L2 Formatted Call Control Messages Call Control IEs DP utgoing Signalling Dprint Firmvare Update AIS Stack Modem 56K 16 Resource Usage IMUR Module 3 Refer to the tables in this section to determine the desired CATEGORY thresholds ATLAS 890 System Manual 2001 ADTRAN Inc 61200321L1 1A ATLAS 890 Section 6 System Event Logging Page 3 of 16 4 To change the CATEGORY select the appropriate field and press lt Enter gt This will provide a list of available options Highlight the desired threshold and press lt Enter gt to select it Telnet Connection 172 22 12 50 Seron Edit Options Capture Help ys dg Port Suitchboard Craft Port Nx 56 64 Module SNMP fisunc 232 Module Event Logging T1 Module Syslog Setu Real Time Clock System Controller Access Passwords Disabled BONDING Config Critical Ext Input Threshold Major Warning Normal Info Firmware Update AIS Stack Modem 56K 16 Resource Usage IMUR Module Use caution when changing CATEGORY values from their default levels If too many sources have their CATEGORY values set too low the number of messages being logged in UT a given period can be very large If too many messages are being logged too rapidly system performance can be adversely affected 2 VIEWING THE EVENT LOG The
324. on characters will close the active telnet session to the remote unit specified in the ADDRESS field Option Keystroke Ctrl AX Ctrl AT Ctrl AUN Ctrl Shift 6 NS d Ctrl Shift PORT Write security 2 Read security 2 Defines the port used in the remote login session Default for Telnet is 23 CONNECT Write security 2 Read security 2 Activator used to start a Telnet session to the remote unit configured in the ADDRESS field STATISTICS Write security 2 Read security 2 This section describes the following STATISTICS submenus e IP see Table 2 on page 154 ICMP see Table 3 on page 156 e TCP see Table 4 on page 157 2001 ADTRAN Inc ATLAS 890 System Manual 61200321L1 1A ATLAS 890 Section 4 User Interface Guide Page 154 of 234 e UDP see Table 5 on page 158 e IP FAST CACHE see Table 6 on page 159 All of these statistics are taken from the MIB II variables in RFC 1156 To clear the accumulated sta tistics press the Enter key on CLEAR Table 2 IP Statistics Name Description FORWARDING DEFAULT TTL INRECEIVES INHDRERRORS INADDRERRORS FORWDATAGRAMS INUNKNOWNPROTOS INDISCARDS The indication of whether this ATLAS 890 is acting as an IP gateway in respect to the forwarding of datagrams received by but not addressed to this ATLAS 890 IP gateways forward datagrams hosts do not except those Source Rou
325. on parameters for ports which terminate an RBS T1 connection from the network IFCE CONFIG RBS Write security 3 Read security 5 Specifies the configuration parameters for the endpoint First DSO Defines to the ATLAS 890 the first DSO for this endpoint The ATLAS 890 uses DSOs starting with this selection to send and receive calls to and from the network The out going calls which are allowed or restricted over these DSOs are set by OUTHACCEPT see page 182 and OUTZREJECT see page 184 NUMBER OF DSOs Specifies the number of DSOs ATLAS 890 uses for this endpoint DSOs AVAILABLE Indicates which DSOs of the T1 have been defined in this switched endpoint indicated by in another switched endpoint indicated by s or in a DEDICATED MAP indicated by n This field is read only The following characters may display in this field 0 9 This DSO is available The digit that displays in this field represents the last digit of the DSO number This port is requesting this DSO for this connection but the DSO is not yet activated This DSO is used by this endpoint S This DSO is used elsewhere in the switched DIAL PLAN S This DSO is in the switched dial plan and conflicts with this end point n This DSO is used in one or more DEDICATED MAPS This DSO is in one or more DEDICATED MAPS and conflicts with this endpoint 2001 ADTRAN Inc ATLAS 890 System Manual 61200321L1 1A ATLAS 8
326. one point the pattern was synchronized but is currently not synchronized SYNC Pattern is synchronized ES Number of seconds with at least one bit error CLR Write security 4 Read security 4 Clears error counters on test pattern results menu INJ Write security 4 Read security 4 Injects errors into transmitted test pattern DTE INTERFACE MODE Write security 5 Read security 5 Configures the Quad USSI Module for the appropriate interface type Select the parameters matching the interface cable being used PRT Read security 5 Displays the port number DTE INTERFACE Write security 3 Read security 5 Configures the Quad USSI Module interface type The following options are available AUTO The ATLAS 890 will automatically detect the interface type The cable must be connected before the interface can be determined EIA 530A Configures the interface for EIA 530A use EIA 530 Configures the interface for EIA 530 RS 449 or V 36 use RS 449 V 36 X 21 V 11 Configures the interface for X 21 or V 11 use RS 232 Configures the interface for RS 232 use CURRENT DTE TYPE Read security 5 Displays the current configuration of the Quad USSI Module DTE Interface ATLAS 890 System Manual 2001 ADTRAN Inc 61200321L1 1A ATLAS 890 Section 4 User Interface Guide Page 65 of 234 gt MODULES MENU IMUX 56 64 RESOURCE MODULE The ATLAS 890 system controller automatically detects the p
327. or a PC configured as a VT 100 terminal e VT 100 terminal or PC configured as a VT 100 terminal To prevent electrical shock do not install equipment in a wet location or during a N ARNING lightning storm Electronic modules can be damaged by static electrical discharge Before handling modules wear an antistatic discharge wrist strap to prevent damage to electronic dm components Place modules in antistatic packing material when transporting or storing When working on modules always place them on an approved antistatic mat that is electrically grounded 2001 ADTRAN Inc ATLAS 890 System Manual 61200321L1 1A ATLAS 890 Section 5 DLP 003 Page 2 of 2 DLP 003 Perform Steps Below in the Order Listed 1 Connect the ATLAS 890 unit to your VT 100 system details found in DLP 007 2 Login to the system with maximum rights details for logging in are in DLP 006 3 From the SYSTEM CONFIG menu select the ETHERNET Port option and press lt Enter gt Win The next three steps will require confirmation after each change 4 From the SYSTEM CONFIG ETHERNET menu select the IP ADDRESS option and press lt Enter gt Enter the appropriate IP address 5 From the SYSTEM CONFIG ETHERNET menu select the SUBNET MASK option and press Enter Enter the appropriate Subnet Mask 6 From the SYSTEM COoNFIG ETHERNET menu select the DEFAULT GATEWAY option and press lt Enter gt Enter the appropriate De
328. or bearer channels and channel capacities before deciding the BONDING call has failed CALL STAGGER Specifies the amount of delay between placing calls for outgoing BONDING sessions The following call stagger values are available No STAGGER There is no delay between the call dialing of a BONDING session 500 MS Wait approximately 1 2 second between the call dialing of a BONDING session 1 SEC Wait approximately 1 second between the call dialing of a BONDING session 2 SEC Wait approximately 2 seconds between the call dialing of a BONDING session 2001 ADTRAN Inc ATLAS 890 System Manual 61200321L1 1A ATLAS 890 Section 4 User Interface Guide Page 68 of 234 gt MODULES MENU OCTAL BRI OPTION MODULE The ATLAS 890 system controller automatically detects the presence of the Octal BRI Option Module when it is installed in the system listed as U BRI To see the menus for the Octal BRI Option Module via the terminal menu use the arrow keys to scroll to the MODULES menu and press lt Enter gt to access the module choices Refer to the Octal BRI Option Module Quick Start Guide for a menu tree containing a complete listing of menus INFO Read security 5 Provides information about the module part number serial number and assembly revision PART NUMBER Read security 5 Displays the part number of the module SERIAL NUMBER Read security 5 Displays the serial number of the module
329. ort experiencing alarms The trunk conditioning process consists of a 2 5 second transmission indicating call termination followed by a continuous transmission signaling the final condi tion as chosen by the user This selection is only valid for T1 ports having RBS set to ON This option defines to ATLAS 890 the type of signaling being used on the trunk 2001 ADTRAN Inc ATLAS 890 System Manual 61200321L1 1A ATLAS 890 Section 4 User Interface Guide Page 176 of 234 E amp M LS GS NETWORK or USER SW56 or CUSTOM T1 TRUNK CONDITIONING STATE Defines the final fault signaling state IDLE Used for one way trunks that is for outgoing or incoming calls only not both SEIZED Used for two way trunks Prevents connected equipment from attempting to use a failed trunk for an outgoing call T1 FAULT SIGNALING Displays the final fault signaling state of the AB bits This field is read only unless CUSTOM is chosen for the T1 TRUNK CONDITIONING SERVICE option T1 TROUBLE CODE VALUE Displays the Hex value of the 2 5 second pre alarm transmission T1 TROUBLE CODE SERVICE When RBS signaling is off the T1 alarm code will be transmitted on an alarm event The options to select are OFF VOICE or DATA trouble code or the CUS TOM data code that is configured in T1 TROUBLE CODE VALUE DEDICATED MAPS PKT ENDPT CONNECTIONS CONNECTS Write security 3 Read security 5 To assign a packet endpoint to a
330. ost always be correct If less than ALL digits are sent then the PREFIX is defined as follows PREFIX Displays only if CALLED DIGITS TRANSFERRED is not set to ALL Enter the pre fix for the digits received Example If the number of digits is four and the number called is 963 8615 the telco s PRI switch sends only 8615 and the prefix is set to 963 This entire number is then used to determine which ATLAS 890 user port endpoint should receive the call OUTGOING CALLER ID Defines the number to use to provide Caller ID to the network for outgoing calls sent through this endpoint Choose from SEND AS PROVIDED SUBSTITUTE IF NOT PRESENT or SUBSTITUTE ALWAYS Won The Caller ID number must be specific i e no wildcards SOURCE ID Simplifies the creation of a dial plan in applications where the criterion for switching calls to a certain endpoint is a function of which endpoint originated the call DEFAULT VALUE 0 Zero is the default ID for all endpoints and all accept num 2001 ADTRAN Inc ATLAS 890 System Manual 61200321L1 1A ATLAS 890 Section 4 User Interface Guide Page 216 of 234 bers With default values all calls are routed based only on the dialed number Multiple endpoints can have the same SOURCE ID When creating the CALL ACCEPT list specify a SOURCE ID s as well as a dialed number or range of dialed numbers to accept Example An application requires that all calls that originate from
331. ot expressly approved by the party W ARNING responsible for compliance could void the user s authority to operate the equipment Canadian Emissions Requirements This digital apparatus does not exceed the Class A limits for radio noise emissions from digital apparatus as set out in the interference causing equipment standard entitled Digital Apparatus ICES 003 of the Department of Communications Cet appareil nuerique respecte les limites de bruits radioelectriques applicables aux appareils numeriques de Class A prescrites dans la norme sur le materiel brouilleur Appareils Numeriques NMB 003 edictee par le ministre des Communications 2001 ADTRAN Inc ATLAS 890 System Manual Canadian Equipment Limitations Notice The Canadian Industry and Science Canada label identifies certified equipment This certification means that the equipment meets certain telecommunications network protective operational and safety requirements The Department does not guarantee the equipment will operate to the user s satisfaction Before installing this equipment users should ensure that it is permissible to be connected to the facilities of the local telecommunications company The equipment must also be installed using an acceptable method of connection In some cases the company s inside wiring associated with a single line individual service may be extended by means of a certified connector assembly telephone extension cord
332. ote unit s RTS signal Note that this feature requires the Inband control chan nel to be ENABLED ATLAS 890 System Manual 2001 ADTRAN Inc 61200321L1 1A ATLAS 890 Section 4 User Interface Guide Page 55 of 234 DIAL DSR Write security 3 Read security 5 Determines the behavior of the Data Set Ready DSR signal If set to NORMAL DSR will generally be asserted when the interface is capable of passing data If set to FORCED ON DSR will always be asserted If set to REMOTE DTR the value of DSR will track the value of the remote unit s DTR signal This remote feature requires the Inband control channel to be Enabled DTR Write security 3 Read security 5 Determines whether the ATLAS 890 treats a connection as permanent IGNORE or connects only when Data Terminal Ready DTR is active CONNECT ON DTR Select either IGNORE or CONNECT ON DTR 0 INH Write security 3 Read security 5 When the port detects an uninterrupted string of Os being transmitted for more than one sec ond setting this parameter to ON will cause the ATLAS 890 to send 1s toward the network INBAND Write security 3 Read security 5 Creates an inband management channel by robbing 8 kbps bandwidth from the port s allocated bandwidth This channel can be used for management for ADTRAN products that are not co located with the ATLAS Consult the manual for ADTRAN T1 equipment for details on using
333. ow DEFERRED Devices which fail built in testing are automatically marked as DEFERRED indicating that the ATLAS 890 declines to use the device AVAILABLE The device is properly functioning and can be used when required The ATLAS 890 automatically marks devices that pass built in testing as AVAILABLE DISABLED Marking a device as DISABLED prevents the ATLAS 890 from attempting to use it You can mark a device currently in use as disabled without disturbing the connection but the device will not be eligible for use in future calls until you re mark it as AVAILABLE This is helpful if you suspect that a particular device is malfunctioning and do not want any calls routed to it ATLAS 890 System Manual 2001 ADTRAN Inc 61200321L1 1A ATLAS 890 Section 4 User Interface Guide Page 75 of 234 GAIN SETTINGS Write security 5 Read security 5 Contains the configuration for output and input gain for the VCOM Resource Module OUTPUT GAIN Write security 3 Read security 5 Output gain is applied in the receive direction Choices range from 12dB loudest to 12dB softest in 3db increments This setting takes affect immediately INPUT GAIN Write security 3 Read security 5 Input gain is applied in the transmit direction Choices range from 12dB softest to 12dB loudest in 3db increments This setting does not affect currently active calls CURRENT FAX STATUS Write security 5 Read security 5 Enab
334. owing items e The ATLAS 890 Base Unit e The ATLAS 890 System CD e AC Power cord ADTRAN P N 3127031 with AC systems e 19 23 Convertable Rackmount brackets and screws e RJ 45 DB 25 adapter 1 for modem connection e RJ 45 control port cable 1 ADTRAN P N 3127004 e RJ 45 DB C9 adapter 1 Win Customers must supply the Ethernet cable ATLAS 890 System Manual 2001 ADTRAN Inc 61200321L1 1A ATLAS 890 Section 3 Network Turnup Procedure Page 3 of 8 4 GROUNDING INSTRUCTIONS To following provides grounding instruction information from the Underwriters Laboratory UL1950 Standard for Safety of Information Technology Equipment Including Electrical Business Equipment of July 28 1995 An equipment grounding conductor that is not smaller in size than the ungrounded branch circuit supply conductors is to be installed as part of the circuit that supplies the product or system Bare covered or insulated grounding conductors are acceptable Individually covered or insulated equipment grounding conductors shall have a continuous outer finish that is either green or green with one or more yellow stripes The equipment grounding conductor is to be connected to ground at the service equipment The attachment plug receptacles in the vicinity of the product or system are all to be of a grounding type and the equipment grounding conductors serving these receptacles are to be connected to earth ground at the service eq
335. p plied This action may be required in areas with ten digit local dialing ISDN SUBSCRIBER PREFERRED Examines the incoming number and if seven digits are received or if a ten digit number is received with an area code that matches the area code provisioned in the global parameters the number is forwarded to the network as a seven digit number defined as ISDN Subscriber number plan and type If the incoming num ber is ten digits but with a different area code it is forwarded to the network as ISDN National preferred ISDN NATIONAL DMS RESERVED PREFERRED Ignores the incoming numbering plan and type and substitutes the ISDN Tele phony numbering plan and National number type Ten digits are sent to the net work Leading ones if present are stripped out and the area code set in global parameters is added if only seven digits are supplied This action may be required in areas with ten digit local dialing ISDN NATIONAL As DIALED Sends the digits provided as National number type possible this may also be the preferred form in 10 digit calling areas We When SWITCH TYPE is set to AESS many installations require the National form where STRIP MSD Strips a selected quantity choose from NONE 1 2 and 3 of the most significant dig its MSD of a dialed number prior to being forwarded out of the port Example A network port could be set to accept all calls beginning with 9 9 and then with STRIP MSD set to 1 all digits wo
336. performing Sync to Async PPP conversion This parameter is reset once the call is disconnected RESET STATS Write security 5 Read security 5 Resets the input and output statistics for the given analog resource This option resets the transmit and receive statistics for the analog resource DIGITAL RSRC SESSION STATUS Write security 5 Read security 5 Displays the session status information for the digital resources available on the Modem 16 Option Module RSRC Read security 5 Indicates the resource number of the digital call resource On the Modem 16 Option Module analog resources are numbered 1 16 and digital ISDN resources are num bered 17 32 STATUS Read security 5 Indicates the current status of the particular digital call resource The status display values are listed below Display Value Meaning N A Card is not able to determine the status of the digital call resource AVAILABLE Indicates this resource is available for use as a digital call IN USE Indicates this resource is currently being used in a digital call TESTING Indicates this resource is in a test mode and may be unavailable for use DISABLED Indicates this resource has been disabled for use as a digital call resource System resource usage for analog and digital call resources can be viewed under the SYSTEM STATUS menu of the ATLAS This menu provides detailed resource availability Win information for each resource type including hourly
337. physical port select the port in the FROM SLOT PORT field and configure the To SLOT PORT as follows To SLOT SERVICE Write security 3 Read security 5 Select PKT ENDPNT to activate a list of available packet endpoints in the TO PORT field To PoRT PEP Write security 3 Read security 5 Press Enter and select the appropriate packet endpoint to assign the endpoint to a physical port To FROM CONFIG Write security 3 Read security 5 Specifies the configuration for the TO FROM connection The following selections ATLAS 890 System Manual 2001 ADTRAN Inc 61200321L1 1A ATLAS 890 Section 4 User Interface Guide Page 177 of 234 apply to the packet endpoint TRANSMIT IDLE CODE Configures the ATLAS 890 to send idle code on the packet endpoint with marks or flags RECEIVE IDLE CODE Defines the idle code either marks or flags the ATLAS 890 should expect on the selected packet endpoint gt DEDICATED MAPS PACKET VOICE CONNECTIONS CONNECTS Write security 3 Read security 5 Enters the dedicated map connections Press lt Enter gt to activate the submenus To SLOT SERVICE Write security 3 Read security 5 Select PKT VOICE to activate a list of available packet endpoints in the TO PORT field To PoRT PEP Write security 3 Read security 5 Press lt Enter gt and select the appropriate packet endpoint from the drop down list To FROM CONFIG Write security 3 Read security 5 Specifies
338. pplications where the criterion for switching calls to a certain endpoint is a function of which endpoint originated the call Default value 0 Zero is the default ID for all endpoints and all accept numbers With default values all calls are routed based only on the dialed number Multiple endpoints can have the same SOURCE ID When creating the CALL ACCEPT list specify a SOURCE ID s as well as a dialed number or range of dialed numbers to accept Example An application requires that all calls that originate from Port 1 of the ATLAS 890 in Slot 1 be switched to Port 2 of that same module Assign a unique Source ID e g 7 to Port 1 of the module and then configure Port 2 to only accept calls from that unique Source ID 7 SwAP ANI DNIS Swaps the ANI and DNIS numbers received from the network ANI Automatic Num ber Identification is the billing number of the calling party and DNIS Dialed Num ber Identification Service is the called party number This menu allows the user to define option parameters for ports which emulate a BRI connection IFCE CONFIG Write security 3 Read security 5 Specifies the configuration parameters for the endpoint SWITCH TYPE Defines the type of BRI switch the ATLAS 890 emulates If connected to another ATLAS 890 both need to be set to the same switch type The following options are available Lucent 5E Northern DMS 100 e National ISDN 2001 ADTRAN Inc ATLAS 8
339. provided with the unit as part of the ADTRAN Utilities software To prevent electrical shock do not install equipment in a wet location or during a W ARNING lightning storm Electronic modules can be damaged by static electrical discharge Before handling modules wear an antistatic discharge wrist strap to prevent damage to electronic d components Place modules in antistatic packing material when transporting or storing When working on modules always place them on an approved antistatic mat that is electrically grounded 2001 ADTRAN Inc ATLAS 890 System Manual 61200321L1 1A ATLAS 890 Section 5 DLP 010 Page 2 of 4 DLP 010 Perform Steps Below in the Order Listed 1 Connect to the ATLAS 890 using the 10 100 BASET interface If you are not already connected to the unit s ETHERNET port using Telnet client software use the procedure in DLP 003 to connect to the unit 2 Login to the unit Login to the unit using the read write password see DLP 006 for details 3 Go to the SYSTEM UTILITY menu and select the UPDATE FIRMWARE menu press lt Enter gt 4 Select the MODULE SLOT menu and press lt Enter gt Select the appropriate module slot to update Select SCUA or SCUB to update the installed Sys tem Controller module s Selecting ALL MODULES OF A TYPE and SYS CTRL will force a controller switchover Win during the update process Take caution to connect both System Controller modu
340. ps are successful contact the LAN Administrator for assistance Refer to the documentation of the computer system if you are unsure how to perform a Ping command Most computers running a networked version of Microsoft Windows M or UNIX Won allow a Ping to be performed by simply typing ping IP Address at a command line prompt Typically the Ping program will respond by indicating that the remote IP Address has responded in a certain amount of time or that no response was received ATLAS 890 System Manual 2001 ADTRAN Inc 61200321L1 1A ATLAS 890 Section 5 DLP 004 Page 3 of 4 Some versions of Ping will continue running until you explicitly tell them to stop If the program does not terminate on its own type lt Ctrl C gt to get the program to stop 3 Telnet to the ATLAS 890 From the same computer used in the previous step Telnet to the ATLAS 890 and verify that the Telnet session is properly opened see DLP 006 for logging in to a system and establishing a Tel net session Once the Telnet session is established press lt Ctrl L gt to logout and close the session Refer to the documentation of the computer system if you are unsure how to perform a Telnet Most computers running a networked version of Microsoft Windows or UNIX Won allow a Telnet to be performed by simply typing Telnet IP Address at a command line prompt Telnet is a utility common on many local area networks that allows remote acce
341. r Interface Guide Page 217 of 234 The following option is available e ETSI DSSI First DSO Defines the first DSO for this endpoint The ATLAS 890 uses DSOs starting with this selection to send and receive calls to and from the network The outgoing calls which are allowed or restricted over these DSOs are set by OUTHACCEPT see page 182 and OUT REJECT see page 184 NUMBER OF DSOs Specifies the number of DSOs ATLAS 890 uses for this endpoint STRIP MSD Strips a selected quantity choose from NONE 1 2 and 3 of the most significant dig its MSD of a dialed number prior to being forwarded out of the port Example A network port could be set to accept all calls beginning with 9 9 and then with STRIP MSD set to 1 all digits would be sent toward the network except the leading 9 e STRIP MSD does not affect CALL ACCEPT criteria All of the digits including the MSDs that are subsequently stripped are used as accept criterion NETWORK SPECIFIC FACILITY VOICE AND DATA Enables the sending of appropriate information to the PSTN Currently not supported for EI PRA use CALLED DIGITS TRANSFERRED Defines the number of digits to forward from the called number When attached to a PBX the PBX may be provisioned to expect to receive fewer than all of the called digits of the incoming call however this option would normally be set to ALL Choose from NONE THREE FOUR SEVEN or ALL OUTGOING CALLER ID Defines the
342. r PPP NAME Displays the user defined name for the DLCI ATLAS 890 System Manual 2001 ADTRAN Inc 61200321L1 1A ATLAS 890 Section 4 User Interface Guide Page 133 of 234 DLCI Displays the local address for each PVC as assigned by the carrier TEST Displays the test mode for the PVC START The fixed duration that TEST is not running and the DLCI is not configured for continuous in band delay measurement To change this option set DIAG NOSTIC MODE to IN BAND DELAY MEASUREMENT also see Jn Band Delay Measurement on page 130 CONTDLY The fixed duration TEST is not running and the DLCI is configured for contin uous in band delay measurement The following RESULTS menu accumulates these measurements STOP The fixed duration TEST is running The following DURATION field shows the time remaining in the current test DURATION Shows the duration in seconds for the fixed duration test RESULTS MN AV MX DLv Displays the minimum average and maximum delay for the delay measurement test To display the additional test results place the cursor over this field and press Enter on the keyboard The displayed times are in milliseconds ECHO PKT TX Displays the total number of test packets that have been transmitted ECHO PkT RX Displays the total number of test packets that have been received ECHO PKT DROPPED Displays the total number of packets lost in the receiving direction traveling from the remote ADT
343. r Pinout PIN SIGNAL DESCRIPTION PIN SIGNAL DESCRIPTION 1 Shield Ground 13 Clear to Send B 2 Transmit Data A 14 Transmit Data B 3 Received Data A 15 Transmit Clock A 4 Request to Send A 16 Received Data B 5 Clear to Send A 17 Receive Clock A 6 DCE Ready A 18 Local Loopback 7 Signal Ground 19 Request to Send B 8 Carrier Detect A 20 DTE Ready A 9 Received Clock B 21 Remote Loopback 10 Carrier Detect B 22 Ring Indicator 11 Ext Transmit Clock B 23 Signal Ground 12 Transmit Clock B 24 Ext Transmit Clock A 25 Test Mode CONNECTOR TYPE RS 449 V 36 SYSTEM PART NUMBER 4200261L1 Table 16 RS 449 V 36 Connector Pinout PIN SIGNAL DESCRIPTION PIN SIGNAL DESCRIPTION 1 Shield Ground 19 Signal Ground 2 Signaling Rate Indicator 20 Receive Common 3 Not Used 21 Not Used 2001 ADTRAN Inc ATLAS 890 System Manual 61200321L1 1A ATLAS 890 Section 2 Engineering Guidelines Page 16 of 22 Table 16 RS 449 V 36 Connector Pinout Continued PIN SIGNAL DESCRIPTION PIN SIGNAL DESCRIPTION 4 Transmit Data A 22 Transmit Data B 5 Transmit Clock A 23 Transmit Clock B 6 Received Data A 24 Receive Data B 7 Request to Send A 25 Request to Send B 8 Receive Clock A 26 Receive Clock B 9 Clear to Send A 27 Clear to Send B 10 Local Loopbac
344. r Y To cancel this command enter N SYSTEM UTILIZATION Write security 0 Read security 0 Displays statistics related to the ATLAS 890 internal operating system Please check with ADTRAN Technical Support before attempting to use this menu SYSTEM SELFTEST Write security 3 Read security 5 Initiates a system self test The self test consists of memory tests and data integrity tests for each installed module m Self tests disrupt data flow SELFTEST Write security 3 Read security 5 Activates the self test To confirm self test activation press Y to cancel the self test press N SELECTED TESTS Write security 3 Read security 5 Allows the user to select a system wide test or an individual card test Choose from ALL TESTS SLOT SLTO SYS CTRL or any other installed option network module CURRENT TEST STATUS Write security 3 Read security 5 Displays which part of self test is currently being run See VIEW SELFTEST LOG below for details on individual tests 2001 ADTRAN Inc ATLAS 890 System Manual 61200321L1 1A ATLAS 890 Section 4 User Interface Guide Page 32 of 234 CURRENT SLOT PORT Write security 3 Read security 5 Displays which slot and part is currently being tested VIEW SELFTEST LOG Read security 5 Displays time stamped log of the tests conducted and the Pass Fail results Self tests verify data integrity and processor control to each port
345. r of ICMP Time Exceeded messages sent OuTPARMPROBS The number of ICMP Parameter Problem messages sent OUTSRCQUENCHS The number of ICMP Source Quench messages sent OUTREDIRECTS The number of ICMP Redirect messages sent ATLAS 890 System Manual 2001 ADTRAN Inc 61200321L1 1A ATLAS 890 Section 4 User Interface Guide Page 157 of 234 Table 3 ICMP Statistics Continued Name Description OUTECHOS The number of ICMP Echo request messages sent OUTECHOREPS The number of ICMP Echo Reply messages sent OUTTIMESTAMPS The number of ICMP Timestamp request messages sent OUTTIMESTAMPREPS The number of ICMP Timestamp Reply messages sent OUTADDRMASKS The number of ICMP Address Mask Request messages sent OUTADDRMASKREPS The number of ICMP Address Mask Reply messages sent CLEAR Clears the accumulated statistics Table 4 TCP Statistics Name Description RTOALGORITHM The algorithm used to determine the timeout value used for retransmitting unacknowledged octets RTOMIN The minimum value permitted by a TCP implementation for the retransmis sion timeout measured in milliseconds More refined semantics for objects of this type depend upon the algorithm used to determine the retransmission tim eout In particular when the timeout algorithm is rsre 3 an object of this type has the semantics of the LBOUND quantity described in RFC 793 RTOMAX The maximum value permitted by a TCP implementation for the r
346. r the FROM connection The selections displayed in this field are based on the type of module selected in the FROM SLT option For detailed information on submenus for a particular module type please refer to the DEDICATED MAPS menu discussion for the appropriate network option or resource module To CONFIG Write security 3 Read security 5 Specifies the configuration for the TO connection The selections displayed in this field are based on the type of module selected in the TO SLT option For detailed information on submenus for a particular module type please refer to the DEDICATED MAPS menu discussion for the appropriate network option or resource module 2001 ADTRAN Inc ATLAS 890 System Manual 61200321L1 1A ATLAS 890 Section 4 User Interface Guide Page 170 of 234 SIG Write security 3 Read security 5 Specifies whether the ATLAS 890 uses active RBS on the connection Selecting ON allows the ATLAS 890 to preserve signaling bits between the two endpoints of the connection Selecting OFF ignores the signaling bits of the connection This selection is automatically set to OFF when RBS does not apply For example a T1 to Nx con nection is set to OFF ACTIVATE TIME Write security 3 Read security 5 Sets the time when the map becomes active if you have selected AUTO in the ACTIVATE MAP field Enter this time in hh mm ss 24 hour format ENBL DAY Security level 3 Read security 5 Specifies whic
347. rd the network except the leading 9 Ed STRIP MSD does not affect CALL ACCEPT criteria All of the digits including the MSDs that are subsequently stripped are used as accept criterion Source ID Simplifies the creation of a dial plan in applications where the criterion for switching calls to a certain endpoint is a function of which endpoint originated the call Default value 0 The default ID for all endpoints is 0 and all accept numbers is 0 With default values all calls are routed based only on the dialed number Multiple endpoints can have the same SOURCE ID When creating the CALL ACCEPT list specify a SOURCE ID s as well as a dialed number or range of dialed numbers to accept ATLAS 890 System Manual 2001 ADTRAN Inc 61200321L1 1A ATLAS 890 Section 5 Detail Level Procedures Page 1 of 2 DETAIL LEVEL PROCEDURES Find Your Task in the List Below Then Go To Connecting the ATLAS 890 to an External Modem DLP 001 Connecting the Alarm Contacts DLP 002 Setting IP Parameters for the ATLAS 890 DLP 003 Verifying Communications Over an IP LAN DLP 004 Using the Alarm Connections and ACO Button DLP 005 Logging in to the System DLP 006 Connecting the Terminal or PC to the ADMIN or CRAFT Port DLP 007 Adding Removing Users and Changing Password Security Levels DLP 008 Updating the Firmware of an ATLAS 890 using XMODEM DLP 009 Updating the Firmware of an ATLAS 890 using TFTP DLP 010 Saving the Current Configurat
348. reason for the last call disconnect or dialout failure for this port If no call has been attempted for the given port this field will indicate NONE This information is also available in the system log if Async 232 module events are enabled HANGUP Write security 3 Read security 5 Activator used to hangup the current active call on the port CONFIGURATION Write security 5 Read security 5 All of the following configurable parameters apply to the individual Async 232 ports PRT Read security 5 Displays the port number PoRT NAME Write security 3 Read security 5 Accepts any alpha numeric name up to 16 characters long to uniquely identify each port on the Async 232 Option Module BiT RATE Write security 3 Read security 5 Configures the fixed DTE port bit rate Changing this field hangs up an active call and requires confirmation Options include the following 300 1200 2400 4800 9600 19 2K 38 4K 57 6K and 115 2K ATLAS 890 System Manual 2001 ADTRAN Inc 61200321L1 1A ATLAS 890 Section 4 User Interface Guide Page 81 of 234 FLOW CTR Write security 3 Read security 5 Configures the flow control for the Async 232 port Options are HARDWARE Hardware flow control monitors RTS from the DTE and controls CTS to indicate flow control status Hardware flow control should be used in all cases except when it is not supported by the attached DTE equipment SOFTWARE S
349. resence of the IMUX 56 64 Resource Mod ule when it is installed in the system listed as IMUX To see the menus for the IMUX 56 64 Resource Module via the terminal menu use the arrow keys to scroll to the MODULES menu and press lt Enter gt to access the module choices Refer to the IMUX 56 64 Resource Module Quick Start Guide for a menu tree containing a complete listing of menus INFO Read security 5 Provides information about the module part number serial number and assembly revision PART NUMBER Read security 5 Displays the part number of the module SERIAL NUMBER Read security 5 Displays the serial number of the module BOARD REVISION Read security 5 Displays the board revision of the installed module FIRMWARE REVISION Read security 5 Displays the current firmware revision of the IMUX 56 64 Resource Module STATUS Read security 5 Indicates the current status of a particular BONDING session STATUS Read security 5 Displays the current status of the BONDING session IDLE Indicates the number of Idle BONDING resources for a particular BONDING engine RESERVED BONDING resources reserved for a BONDING session that is in the process of coming up NEGOTIATING A single channel is connected and negotiating the BONDING call for a particular BONDING session ADD CHANNELS The initial BONDING negotiation was successful and the ATLAS 890 is in the process of adding channels to the BONDI
350. ress or when the update is successfully completed At the end of a successful update the contents of this field are copied into PREVIOUS UPDATE STATUS If you are updating several modules at the same time if MODULE SLOT is set to ALL MOD ULES OF A TYPE this option displays indicating this field contains submenu items The following submenus display SLT Indicates the slot number TYPE Defines the type of module for each slot CURRENT STATUS Indicates the status of the current update PREVIOUS STATUS Indicates the status of the previous update PREVIOUS TIME Indicates the time of the previous update During the TFTP upload process various status messages are provided in the CURRENT UPDATE STATUS field For a detailed listing of these messages please refer to DLP 010 PREVIOUS UPDATE STATUS Read security 5 Displays the status of the previous update after selecting a module slot If a firmware update has not been attempted for a particular slot this field reads HAS NOT BEEN ATTEMPTED Fol lowing a successful update the field reads MODULE UPDATE COMPLETE If an update was unsuccessful the appropriate error message displays BEGIN FIRMWARE UPDATE Write security 1 Read security 5 Begins updating the firmware for the selected modules To start this action enter Y to begin or enter N to cancel You can also cancel the operation after the update has begun For XMODEM updates cancel the process via the terminal emulation
351. ression 6 4 kbps bandwidth Some voice compression standards may be used only under specific licensing arrange ments due to existing patents The ATLAS 890 provides complete management of these licensed resources therefore users are not required to take additional steps to ensure conformance with licensing provisions For example the ATLAS 890 manages its resources so users never exceed the maximum licensed number of simultaneous connec tions Refer to the Frame Relay section of the ATLAS 890 User Manual for details SILENCE Read security 5 Voice endpoints continue to originate frame relay traffic during periods of relative silence The ATLAS 890 expects to receive such silence frames therefore silence compression is DISABLED by default Some voice endpoints can be configured so that no silence frames are transmitted during periods of relative silence For compatibility with these devices the ATLAS 890 can be configured to expect that silence suppression is ENABLED thus no frame relay traffic is generated during periods of silence Both voice endpoints must agree on the silence suppression setting CONNECTION Read security 5 Helps identify a suspect packet voice device if a particular call reports poor quality The dis played packet identifier and the dial plan endpoint identify the call using this packet voice device ATLAS 890 System Manual 2001 ADTRAN Inc 61200321L1 1A ATLAS 890 Section
352. rip time of the ping request reply of the cur rent set of pings ROUND TRIP AVG Write Security 2 Read Security 2 Displays the average round trip time of the ping request reply of the cur rent set of pings ROUND TRIP MAX Write Security 2 Read Security 2 Displays the maximum round trip time of the ping request reply of the cur rent set of pings TX STATS Write Security 2 Read Security 2 Displays the number of ping requests transmitted n txed the number of ping replies received n rxed and the number of ping requests that were lost n lost ATLAS 890 System Manual 2001 ADTRAN Inc 61200321L1 1A ATLAS 890 Section 4 User Interface Guide Page 153 of 234 RESET STATS Write Security 2 Read Security 2 Resets all ping statistics to zero If the ping client is active this menu will stop it START STOP Write Security 2 Read Security 2 If the ping client is currently idle this menu sends pings to the specified address If the ping client is active the menu stops sending pings TELNET CLIENT Write security 2 Read security 2 Allows a user to open a Telnet session to any device listed in the ATLAS 890 route table ADDRESS Write security 2 Read security 2 Defines the IP address assigned to the remote unit you are trying to connect to ESCAPE CHAR Write security 2 Read security 2 Defines the Telnet client escape character Typing the combinati
353. ription Provides managers with an overview of the ATLAS 890 system Engineering Guidelines Provides information to assist network designers with incorporating the ATLAS 890 system into their networks Network Turnup Procedure Provides step by step instructions on how to install the ATLAS 890 unit determine the parameters for the system install the network and option modules and power up the system User Interface Guide Explains the VT 100 and Telnet interfaces the VT 100 user interface conventions and the ATLAS 890 top level menu tree Detail Level Procedures DLP Provides the detail level procedures called out in Section 3 NTP System Event Logging Explains the System Event Logging messages for the ATLAS 890 and provides instructions for configuring the Event Log Revision History This is the 1 issue of this manual 2001 ADTRAN Inc ATLAS 890 System Manual Win Notes provide additional useful information di Cautions signify information that could prevent service interruption Warnings provide information that could prevent damage to the equipment or W ARNING endangerment to human life Safety Instructions When using your telephone equipment please follow these basic safety precautions to reduce the risk of fire electrical shock or personal injury 1 Do not use this product near water such as a bathtub wash bowl kitchen sink laun dry tub in a wet basement or near
354. ription Page 2 of 6 1 SYSTEM OVERVIEW The ATLAS 890 is a modular highly scalable platform that provides robust solutions for the wide area communication needs of medium to large corporations and network access providers The ATLAS 890 is an Integrated Access System with extensive support of dedicated bandwidth management and access switching The ATLAS 890 is a higher bandwidth version of the ATLAS 80077U5 t contains a high performance CPU and powerful communications drivers which supports applications such as frame relay and call switching The ATLAS 890 architecture also includes a packet switching and a circuit switching bussing scheme The result is a system capable of supporting bandwidth requirements of up to 30 T1 or Primary Rate ISDN PRD circuits Designed for standalone or rackmount the ATLAS 890 Base Unit provides 2 hot swappable redundant system controller slots and up to 16 expansion slots that accommodate hot swappable option modules and up to 4 hot swappable redundant power supplies for a variety of applications A 10 100BaseT Ethernet connection for IP routing and network management is standard with the ATLAS 890 System Controller Module With the ATLAS 890 you can consolidate your voice data and video applications into a single platform while optimizing wide area bandwidth and reducing equipment costs The ATLAS 890 architecture and expansion slots allow for a variety of modules making it one of the most versatile acc
355. rithm that exchanges keys passwords between OSPF routers Instead of exchanging the key over the link the router builds a mes sage digest based on the key the key ID and the packet PASSWORD This menu is available when AUTHEN METHOD SIMPLE KEY or AUTHEN METHOD MDB This item doubles as a password maximum of 8 characters when simple authentication is used or as a key maximum of 16 charac ters when MDS is used The password key is used to authenticate ourselves and to check the authentication of the router on the other end of the virtual link Key ID Associates a particular key to an ID This is necessary when changing key s in a multi router system HELLO TIME The number of seconds of the intervals between the Hello packets that the router sends over the virtual link This value must be the same for all routers attached to a common network DEAD TIME The number of seconds that a router s Hello packets have not been seen before the router declares the virtual link down This value should be some multiple of the Hello interval and must be the same for the router on the other end of the virtual link RETRANSMISSION INTERVAL The number of seconds between link state advertisement retransmissions for this virtual link This value is also used when retransmitting database description and link state request packets TRANSMIT DELAY The estimated number of seconds it takes to transmit a link state update packet over this vir
356. rity errors ES P Errored Second Path An accumulation of seconds during which any one of the following conditions exist parity errors severely errored frame or AIS signal received SAS P SEF AIS Second An accumulation of seconds during which severely errored frame or AIS signal is received SES P Severely Errored Seconds Path An accumulation of seconds during which parity errors severely errored frames or AIS signal is received UAS P Unavailable Seconds Path An accumulation of one second intervals during which the DS3 path is unavailable i e 10 contiguous SES Ps DS3 PERF 15 MIN Write security 3 Read security 5 In the DS3 PERF 15 MIN menu the performance data for the previous 15 minute window is stored Refer to DS3 Perf Current above for a detailed description DS3 PERF 24 HR Write security 3 Read security 5 Stores the performance data for the previous 24 hour window Refer to DS3 Perf Current above for a detailed description 2001 ADTRAN Inc ATLAS 890 System Manual 61200321L1 1A ATLAS 890 Section 4 User Interface Guide Page 102 of 234 DS3 CONFIGURATION Write security 3 Read security 5 Includes all of the configurable parameters pertaining to the T3 interface PRT Read security 5 Indicates the port number PORT NAME Write security 3 Read security 5 Enter any text up to 16 characters to uniquely identify the T3 port on the T3 Option Module FR
357. rvices is waived 2001 ADTRAN Inc ATLAS 890 System Manual Affidavit for Connection of Customer Premises Equipment to 1 544 Mbps and or Subrate Digital Services For the work to be performed in the certified territory of telco name State of County of I name business address telephone number being duly sworn state I have responsibility for the operation and maintenance of the terminal equipment to be connected to 1 544 Mbps and or subrate digital services The terminal equipment to be connected complies with Part 68 of the FCC rules except for the encoded analog content and billing protection specifications With respect to encoded analog content and billing protection Lattest that all operations associated with the establishment maintenance and adjustment of the digital CPE with respect to analog content and encoded billing protection information con tinuously complies with Part 68 of the FCC Rules and Regulations The digital CPE does not transmit digital signals containing encoded analog content or billing information which is intended to be decoded within the telecommunications network The encoded analog content and billing protection is factory set and is not under the control of the customer I attest that the operator s maintainer s of the digital CPE responsible for the establish ment maintenance and adjustment of the encoded analog content and billing information has
358. s Testing ADTRAN proprietary PVC loopback Round trip delay measurement SNMP support RFC 1315 PPP Connection support 35 PPP connections to the internal router not exceeding 11 700 packets per second 100 PPP connections to the internal router requires HDLC Module and cannot exceed 11 700 packets per second Authentication support PAP CHAP EAP Keepalive support On Off Interface support Numbered interfaces Un numbered interfaces 2001 ADTRAN Inc ATLAS 890 System Manual 61200321L1 1A ATLAS 890 Section 2 Engineering Guidelines Page 22 of 22 Table 23 Specifications Continued Application Feature Specification IP ROUTING Route discovery RIP V1 RIP V2 ICMP ARP IARP UDP Relay OSPF SNMP support RFCs 1315 1213 1406 Adtran Enterprise MIB VOICE COMPRESSION Algorithm Voice Compression Module G 723 1 or Netcoder proprietary Number of channels supported Up to 64 compression channels PCM coding u Law A Law future Fax support 9600 bps DTMF generation and TIA 464A detection ATLAS 890 System Manual 2001 ADTRAN Inc 61200321L1 1A ATLAS 890 Section 3 Network Turnup Procedure Page 1 of 8 NETWORK TURNUP PROCEDURE CONTENTS Introduction 2s RII RE A ees CE eee oe PERE ERA E RE ee RAE ME eee ER Po 2 Tools Required menie Saha ta aemPDPBRUIVAW uS 6 aha Ramee alata RE a ai 2 Unpack
359. s the configuration parameters for the analog resources available on the option module RSRC Read security 5 Indicates the resource number of the analog call resource On the Modem 16 Option Module analog resources are numbered 1 16 and digital ISDN resources are num bered 17 32 STATUS Read security 5 Indicates the current status of the particular analog call resource and displays new activity as it occurs The possible status display values are listed below Display Value Meaning N A Card is not able to determine the status of the analog call resource AVAILABLE Indicates this resource is available for use as an analog call IN USE Indicates this resource is currently being used in an analog call TESTING Indicates this resource is in a test mode and may be unavailable for use DISABLED Indicates this resource has been disabled for use as an analog call resource This may be done automatically by the system if a given analog resource does not initialize properly 2001 ADTRAN Inc ATLAS 890 System Manual 61200321L1 1A ATLAS 890 Section 4 User Interface Guide Page 96 of 234 System resource usage for analog and digital call resources can be viewed under the SYSTEM STATUS menu of the ATLAS This menu provides detailed resource availability ore information for each resource type including hourly average available minimum avail able and number of times there were no available resources of a parti
360. security 5 Read security 5 Allows a user to open a Telnet session to any device listed in the ATLAS 890 route table ADDRESS Write security 5 Read security 5 Defines the IP address assigned to the remote unit you are trying to connect to ESCAPE CHAR Write security 5 Read security 5 Defines the Telnet client escape character Typing the combination characters will close the active telnet session to the remote unit specified in the ADDRESS field Option Keystroke A lt Ctrl gt N Ctrl AT Ctrl AL lt Ctrl gt lt Shift gt 6 Aai lt Ctrl gt lt Shift gt PORT Write security 5 Read security 5 Defines the IP port used in the remote login session Default for Telnet is 23 CONNECT Write security 5 Read security 5 Activator used to start a Telnet session to the remote unit configured in the ADDRESS field CLIENT STATUS Write security 5 Read security 5 Displays status from current Telnet client sessions USER NAME Displays the username from access passwords list that has an active Telnet client session SESSION ID Displays the remote units IP address followed by the IP port of an active Telnet client session in the format IP IP IP IP Port 2001 ADTRAN Inc ATLAS 890 System Manual 61200321L1 1A ATLAS 890 Section 4 User Interface Guide Page 36 of 234 CONTROL SWITCH SCHEDULE Write security 5 Read security 5 Specifies wh
361. selected lt gt An action is to be taken such as activating a test Highlighted menu item You can enter data in this field Underlined field The field contains read only information Additional Terminal Menu Window Features e SCU displays status information about the system controllers such as ONLIN online STBY stand by and NRDY not ready e Tool Tip provides a brief description of the currently selected highlighted command e Slot Status displays status information such as OK WARN or ALRM about slots 1 16 e Extended Help displays information about selected commands CTRL A e Navigation Help lists characters used for navigating the terminal menu and session management CTRL Z e System Time displays current time Navigating Using the Keyboard Keys You can use various keystrokes to move through the terminal menu to manage a terminal menu session and to configure the system Press lt CTRL Z gt to activate a pop up screen listing the navigation key strokes Moving through the Menus To do this Press this key Return to the home screen H Jump between two menu items Press lt J gt while the cursor is located on a menu item and you jump back to the main screen Go to another menu item press lt J gt and you jump back to the screen that was displayed the first time you pressed lt J gt Press lt J gt anytime you want to jump between these items
362. sign a unique Source ID e g 7 to Port 1 of the module and then configure Port 2 to only accept calls from that unique Source ID 7 Min DSO s Set this to 1 for typical single call connections Setting this greater than 1 will restrict connections to endpoints supporting aggregation e g BONDING of the specified number of DSOs Max DSO s Set this to 1 for typical single call connections Setting this greater than 1 will accom modate connections to endpoints supporting aggregation e g BONDING of up to 2001 ADTRAN Inc ATLAS 890 System Manual 61200321L1 1A ATLAS 890 Section 4 User Interface Guide Page 222 of 234 the specified number of DSOs This also sets the number of DSOs presented in the negotiation of outgoing aggregate calls gt DIAL PLAN OCTAL BRI U OPTION MODULE NETWORK TERM This menu allows the user to define option parameters for ports which terminate a BRI connection from the network IFCE CONFIG Write security 3 Read security 5 Specifies the configuration parameters for the endpoint SWITCH TYPE Defines the type of BRI switch to which the port is connected If connected to another ATLAS 890 both need to be set to the same switch type The following options are available Lucent 5E Northern DMS 100 National ISDN SPID LisT To properly operate with a network ISDN switch the BRI interface must have Service Profile Identifiers SPIDs and phone number s that
363. ss to another computer or piece of equipment Follow up Procedures Once this procedure is complete return to the procedure which referred you to this DLP and continue with the tasks indicated there 2001 ADTRAN Inc ATLAS 890 System Manual 61200321L1 1A ATLAS 890 Section 5 DLP 004 Page 4 of 4 ATLAS 890 System Manual 2001 ADTRAN Inc 61200321L1 1A ATLAS 890 Section 5 DLP 005 Page 1 of 4 USING THE ALARM CONNECTIONS AND ACO BUTTON Introduction The alarm connections alert the user when a selected alarm condition exists The alarm may be cleared by pressing the Alarm Cut Off ACO switch located on the front panel of the ATLAS 890 This procedure details the steps which must be performed to use the ATLAS 890 alarm connections and ACO switch This procedure should be performed at installation on each ATLAS 890 shelf that is wired out to external office alarm equipment Prerequisite Procedures Before beginning this procedure the ATLAS 890 should be mounted in its permanent location and the alarm contacts should be connected see DLP 002 Tools and Materials Required e WVT 100 terminal or PC with VT 100 terminal emulation software To prevent electrical shock do not install equipment in a wet location or during a W ARNING lightning storm Electronic modules can be damaged by static electrical discharge Before handling modules wear an antistatic discharge wrist strap to prevent damage to e
364. switched dial plan and conflicts with this end point n This port is used in one or more DEDICATED MAPS This port is in one or more DEDICATED MAPS and conflicts with this endpoint NUMBER OF PORTS Specifies the number of V 35 ports ATLAS 890 uses for this endpoint NUMBER TO DIAL Specifies the number to dial on an outgoing call CALL TYPE Configures the call type either 56K or 64K used for outgoing calls from this end point DiAL CALL AS Allows the outgoing call to be treated as the selected call type Options include DIGI TAL for 56K or 64K data calls VOICE for speech calls and AUDIO for 3 1kHz audio calls Source ID Simplifies the creation of a dial plan in applications where the criterion for switching calls to a certain endpoint is a function of which endpoint originated the call Default value 0 Zero is the default ID for all endpoint and all accept numbers 2001 ADTRAN Inc ATLAS 890 System Manual 61200321L1 1A ATLAS 890 Section 4 User Interface Guide Page 220 of 234 With default values all calls are routed based only on the dialed number Multiple endpoints can have the same SOURCE ID When creating the CALL ACCEPT list specify a SOURCE ID s as well as a dialed number or range of dialed numbers to accept Example An application requires that all calls that originate from Port 1 of the ATLAS 890 in Slot 1 be switched to Port 2 of that same module Assign a unique Source ID
365. t choose from NONE THREE FOUR SEVEN and ALL The default is ALL and would almost always be correct If less than ALL digits are sent then the PREFIX is defined as follows OUTGOING CALLER ID Defines the number for the ATLAS 890 to use to provide Caller ID to the network for outgoing calls sent through this endpoint Choose from SEND AS PROVIDED SUBSTI TUTE IF NOT PRESENT or SUBSTITUTE ALWAYS Win The Caller ID number must be specific i e no wildcards SOURCE ID Simplifies the creation of a dial plan in applications where the criterion for switching calls to a certain endpoint is a function of which endpoint originated the call DEFAULT VALUE 0 Zero is the default ID for all endpoints and all accept num bers With default values all calls are routed based only on the dialed number Multiple endpoints can have the same SOURCE ID When creating the CALL ACCEPT list specify a SOURCE ID s as well as a dialed number or range of dialed numbers to accept Example An application requires that all calls that originate from Port 1 of the ATLAS 890 in Slot 1 be switched to Port 2 of that same module Assign a unique Source ID e g 7 to Port 1 of the module and then configure Port 2 to only accept calls from that unique Source ID 7 Swap ANI DNIS Swaps the ANI and DNIS numbers received from the network ANI Automatic Num ber Identification is the billing number of the calling party and DNIS Dialed Num ber Id
366. t rate defines the amount that this virtual circuit is allowed to exceed the CIR If the service provider has not supplied an excess burst rate enter the wire speed in this field CONFIG Allows configuration of parameters for each DLCI FRAGMENTATION THRESHOLD Max packet size allowed on this PVC A zero value disables fragmentation Fragmentation is used to improve the quality of voice transmission A good value is R 300 where R is the smallest of the ATLAS 890 link rates or the far end link rate in bits per second For example if a DLCI comes from an FSU 5622 running on a 56K DDS line and is delivered to the ATLAS 890 on a full T1 the lower rate is 56000 and the value is 186 or 187 Entered values between and 127 are adjusted upward 2001 ADTRAN Inc ATLAS 890 System Manual 61200321L1 1A ATLAS 890 Section 4 User Interface Guide Page 130 of 234 DLCI STATE Controls how the state of this DLCI is reported to any packet connections within ATLAS 890 attempting to send or receive data on this DLCI AUTO Passes the state as reported by the frame relay switch Set DLCI STATE to AUTO for normal operation FORCE ACTIVE This DLCI disregards the status as reported from the switch and reports ACTIVE to all packet endpoints within ATLAS 890 FORCE INACTIVE Reports status as DOWN to all packet endpoints within ATLAS 890 DIAGNOSTIC MODE Controls operation of PVC testing options To allow the far end to measure delay
367. t is ALL and would almost always be correct If less than ALL digits are sent then the PREFIX is defined as follows PREFIX Displays only if CALLED DIGITS TRANSFERRED is not set to ALL Enter the pre fix for the digits received Example If the number of digits is four and the number called is 963 8615 the telco s PRI switch sends only 8615 and the prefix is set to 963 This entire number is then used to determine which ATLAS 890 user port endpoint should receive the call OUTGOING CALLER ID Defines the number to use to provide Caller ID to the network for outgoing calls sent through this endpoint Choose from SEND AS PROVIDED SUBSTITUTE IF NOT PRESENT or SUBSTITUTE ALWAYS Won The Caller ID number must be specific i e no wildcards 2001 ADTRAN Inc ATLAS 890 System Manual 61200321L1 1A ATLAS 890 Section 4 User Interface Guide Page 196 of 234 SOURCE ID Simplifies the creation of a dial plan in applications where the criterion for switching calls to a certain endpoint is a function of which endpoint originated the call Default value 0 Zero is the default ID for all endpoints and all accept numbers With default values all calls are routed based only on the dialed number Multiple endpoints can have the same SOURCE ID When creating the CALL ACCEPT list specify a SOURCE ID s as well as a dialed number or range of dialed numbers to accept Example An application requires that all calls
368. tains the BACKUP SUBLINK to be tied to this sublink BACKUP SUBLINK Visible only if ENABLE BACKUP SUPPORT is set to YES Selects the BACKUP SUBLINK to be tied to this sublink PRIMARY PACKET ENDPT Visible only if BACKUP is selected Selects the PRIMARY PACKET ENDPT that contains the PRIMARY SUBLINK to be tied to this sublink PRIMARY SUBLINK Visible only if BACKUP is selected Selects the PRIMARY SUBLINK to be tied to this sublink The fields BACKUP MODE SWITCH ON SUBLINK DOWN SWITCH ON LMI INACTIVE Win SWITCH ON BACKUP ACTIVE BACKUP DELAY IN SECONDS and RESTORE DELAY IN SECONDS display if PRIMARY with BACKUP SUPPORT or BACKUP is enabled BACKUP MODE Provides switching options AUTO Provides normal operation FORCED Forces a switch to backup DISABLED Disables backup switching SWITCH ON SUBLINK INACTIVE Provides switching options if the sublink goes down Select YES to switch to backup if the primary sublink goes down otherwise select NO SWITCH ON LMI DOWN Provides switching options for LMI signaling Select YES to switch to backup if LMI signaling is inactive on the primary link otherwise select No SWITCH ON BACKUP ACTIVE Provides switching options if the backup sublink goes active Select YES to switch to backup if the backup sublink goes active otherwise select No 2001 ADTRAN Inc ATLAS 890 System Manual 61200321L1 1A ATLAS 890 Section 4 User Interface Guide Page 132 of 234
369. ted via the host The default value inserted into the Time To Live field of the IP header of datagrams originated at this ATLAS 890 whenever a TTL value is not sup plied by the transport layer protocol The total number of input datagrams received from interfaces including those received in error The number of input datagrams discarded due to errors in their IP headers including bad checksums version number mismatch other format errors time to live exceeded errors discovered in processing their IP options etc The number of input datagrams discarded because the IP address in their IP header s destination field was not a valid address to be received at this ATLAS 890 This count includes invalid addresses e g 0 0 0 0 and addresses of unsupported Classes e g Class E For entities which are not IP Gateways and therefore do not forward datagrams this counter includes data grams discarded because the destination address was not a local address The number of input datagrams for which this ATLAS 890 was not their final IP destination as a result of which an attempt was made to find a route to for ward them to that final destination In entities which do not act as IP Gate ways this counter will include only those packets which were Source Routed via this ATLAS 890 and the Source Route option processing was successful The number of locally addressed datagrams received successfully but dis carded because of an unknown or u
370. that originate from Port 1 of the ATLAS 890 in Slot 1 be switched to Port 2 of that same module Assign a unique Source ID e g 7 to Port 1 of the module and then configure Port 2 to only accept calls from that unique Source ID 7 SWAP ANI DNIS Swaps the ANI and DNIS numbers received from the network ANI Automatic Num ber Identification is the billing number of the calling party and DNIS Dialed Num ber Identification Service is the called party number With this swap the ATLAS 890 switchboard uses ANI to route the call The accept number Won in the dial plan must use the ANI number not the DNIS number B CHANNEL SELECTION Determines how the ATLAS 890 switchboard uses B channels for call routing The CIRCULAR method can be used for call load balancing among the available B channels on this interface NORMAL Always start with the last channel configured i e for a full PRI channel 23 would be used if available CIRCULAR Contiguous channels from last to first BUSY OPTION Defines the response propagated to the CPE upon receipt of a DISCONNECT USER BUSY message from the network NORMAL Send a progress message to the CPE and map busy tones ATLAS 890 System Manual 2001 ADTRAN Inc 61200321L1 1A ATLAS 890 Section 4 User Interface Guide Page 197 of 234 Pass THRU Send a DISCONNECT USER BUSY message to the User Term CPE device NETWORK TERM RBS This menu allows the user to define opti
371. the configuration for the TO FROM connection The following selections apply to the PKT VOICE connections DLCI Press Enter and select the appropriate DLCI from the drop down list VoicE PORT Identifies the voice port address of the remote unit Express units support ports 1 and 2 A remote ATLAS supports ports 1 through 255 CONFLICT REPORT Describes existing conflicts Potential problems include DLCI unavailable or Voice port already in use VOICE COMPRESSION Configures the compression algorithm used on the selected packet voice endpoint Older FSUs use G 723 1 at 6 3kbps and newer FSUs use 6 4K Netcoder The compression algorithm must match at both endpoints SILENCE SUPPRESSION Reduces the total system bandwidth load by preventing ATLAS from sending 2001 ADTRAN Inc ATLAS 890 System Manual 61200321L1 1A ATLAS 890 Section 4 User Interface Guide Page 178 of 234 frames containing a special silence code during periods of silence Both endpoints must agree to use silence suppression By default silence suppression is ENABLED to prohibit silence frames from transmitting and to decrease the total system bandwidth SIGNALING Signaling method on the packet voice endpoint Both endpoints must agree about the compression algorithm choice gt CIRCUIT STATUS The CIRCUIT STATUS menu allows the user to view the status of all circuits configured for dedicated circuit backup see Figure 15 Telnet Connect
372. the interface connected to the ATLAS router as follows ENO IP ATLAS Ethernet port Endpoint Name DLCI Number ADDRESS Write Security 2 Read Security 2 Defines the individual interface IP address If this field is left as 0 0 0 0 it is treated as an unnumbered interface 2001 ADTRAN Inc ATLAS 890 System Manual 61200321L1 1A ATLAS 890 Section 4 User Interface Guide Page 146 of 234 SUBNET MASK Write Security 2 Read Security 2 Defines the subnet mask applied to the address defined for this link If the interface IP address is unnumbered leave as 0 0 0 0 IARP Write Security 2 Read Security 2 The Inverse ARP IARP menu is only present when this interface is a frame relay network interface ATLAS sends Inverse ARP packets to determine the IP address on the other end of the virtual circuit ATLAS always responds to Inverse ARP requests with its IP address for the requested DLCI ENABLE Causes ATLAS to dynamically send Inverse ARP packets to determine the IP address on the other end of the virtual circuit When an Inverse ARP packet is not responded to no route is placed in the IP route table If the Inverse ARP packet is responded to a route is placed in the IP route table DISABLE Instructs ATLAS not to generate Inverse ARP request packets In this case the FAR END ADDRESS parameter may be used to statically assign a route address see the fol lowing
373. this entry as DYNAMIC or STATIC 2001 ADTRAN Inc ATLAS 890 System Manual 61200321L1 1A ATLAS 890 Section 4 User Interface Guide Page 144 of 234 INTERFACE Read Security 2 Displays the interface upon which this entry was found TX PENDING Read Security 2 Displays the number of transmit packets pending a reply ROUTES Write Security 2 Read Security 2 The ROUTES menu displays the contents of the ATLAS routing table All static and discovered routes are displayed from this menu IP ADDRESS Read Security 2 Displays the IP address of the destination host or network NETMASK Read Security 2 Displays the subnet mask applied to the destination address GATEWAY Read Security 2 Displays the IP address of the next hop router or host receiving the forwarded IP packet INTERFACE Read Security 2 Displays the next hop router or host interface through which IP packets are routed as defined here LocAL Forwards the packet directly to the ATLAS router ENO IP Forwards the packet through the ATLAS Ethernet port ENDPOINT NAME Forwards the packet using the DLCI number USED Read Security 2 Displays the number of times the router has referenced this route CLR Write Security 2 Read Security 2 Clears the USED menu and resets the value to zero ATLAS 890 System Manual 2001 ADTRAN Inc 61200321L1 1A ATLAS 890 Section 4
374. tion llsssesesellseee ehh 9 External Input Connection 000 0c hs 9 Option Module Interfaces sseeseeseeeeee rh n nmn 10 Quad T1 PRI Option Module P N 1200185L3 0 00 02 cee seh 10 Quad E1 PRA Option Module P N 1200264L1 llle 10 Quad Nx 56 64 Option Module P N 1200184L1 0 0 00 cee ee 11 Quad USSI Option Module P N 1200261L1 0 13 Octal BRI Option Module P N 1200186L2 isissssssseelee ees 17 Async 232 Option Module P N 1200182L1 sssslsssseeesle ees 18 T3 Option Module P N 1200223L1 sssslssssseeseee nen 18 T3 Drop and Insert Option Module P N 1200225L1 000 eee 19 At A Glance Specifications 000 cece 20 FIGURES Figure 1 ATLAS 890 Front Panel Layout 0 000 cece eee 3 Figure2 ATLAS 890 Rear Panel 0 000 c cette nee 7 TABLES Table 1 CRAFT Port Pinout 0 00 00 cect eee 4 Table 2 ATLAS 890 Front Panel Description 0000 c cece 4 Table3 ATLAS 89O LEDS mod bbI4 eee d nei dg eruRePlxX tiw ebixrneeracikeddAus 5 Table 4 Admin r PInout s s uu aee Se usted E AEE aote Aer iuba uela d bd diit 8 2001 ADTRAN Inc ATLAS 890 System Manual 61200321L1 1A ATLAS 890 Section 2 Engineering Guidelines Page 2 of 22 Table 5 Ethernet PINOUT uus LRL ru ov vore e dete a Red det wal andere aed 8 Table 6 Alarm Relay Connector Pinout
375. tion of the U inter face 2 wire transmission line converts between Layer 1 formats used at the U and T reference points and performs some maintenance functions option modules Any optional hot swappable module that can be added to the ATLAS system for a variety of applica tions OSI Open System Interconnection It is a standard defined by ISO and the ITU T to allow interoperability between equipment of different vendors ATLAS 890 System Manual 2001 ADTRAN Inc 61200321L1 1A ATLAS 890 Glossary Page 9 of 12 overbooking ATLAS feature that reduces telecommunications expenses by allowing you to over subscribe switched bandwidth for situations where simultaneous access to the network by every subscriber is not required Packet A transmission that contains both control information and data Packet Endpoint A virtual port within the ATLAS that a specified physical port terminates its data into for further rout ing by the system Packet Switching A method of routing packets that avoids congestion and minimizes delivery time PBX Private branch exchange A telephone system usually owned by the customer that serves a particular location It provides connections from one phone extension to another and connects to the external telephone network PCM Pulse Code Modulation The most common method for encoding analog voice into a digital bit stream PIV Port PVC Interval Think of this as a resource meter The ATLAS
376. trols redundancy operation ICC The InterController Communications Channel HDLC The High Level Data Link Controllers Figure 8 ATLAS 890 System Controller Self Test Log CLEAR SELFTEST LoG Write security 3 Read security 5 Clears the self test log PING Write security 5 Read security 5 Allows you to send pings ICMP echo requests to devices accessible via the network Win Only one ping session can be active at a time IP ADDRESS Write security 5 Read security 5 Specifies the IP address to ping COUNT Write security 5 Read security 5 Specifies the number of pings to send The default value is 4 and the maximum value is 99 SIZE BYTES Write security 5 Read security 5 Specifies the size in bytes of the data portion of the ping request The default value is 64 bytes 2001 ADTRAN Inc ATLAS 890 System Manual 61200321L1 1A ATLAS 890 Section 4 User Interface Guide Page 34 of 234 and the maximum size is 1024 bytes TIMEOUT MS Write security 5 Read security 5 Specifies the time in milliseconds to wait for the ping reply before timing out The default timeout is 3 seconds and the maximum timeout value is 10 seconds ROUND TRIP MIN Read security 5 Displays the minimum round trip time of the ping request reply of the current set of pings ROUND TRIP AVG Read security 5 Displays the average ro
377. try in the Dial Plan ORIGINAL Designates the number s to be the search criteria for the substitution template The pattern can be a specific number or wildcards can be used as part of the number spec ification X Any single digit N Any single digit 2 through 9 Any number of digits of any value 9 This specific number 1 2 3 A single digit in this group Example 963 812 012 would be 963 8120 to 963 8122 SUBSTITUTED Designates the number to be substituted for the number s defined in the ORIGINAL field The pattern can be a specific number or wildcards can be used as a part of the number specification Any single digit Any single digit 2 through 9 X N Any number of digits of any value 9 This specific number 1 2 3 A single digit in this group Punctuation characters are ignored and a comma is interpreted as a 5 second pause in the dial string Example The ORIGINAL field contains and the SUBSTITUTED field contains 256 All calls routed out this connection will be delayed 5 seconds and contain a 256 prefix ATLAS 890 System Manual 2001 ADTRAN Inc 61200321L1 1A ATLAS 890 Section 4 User Interface Guide Page 191 of 234 Ld Wildcards used in the SUBSTITUTED field are only valid when used in the same position relative to the end of the digit string as the ORIGINAL field GLOBAL PARAM Write security 2 Read security 5 Sets ATLAS 8
378. ts The ADTRAN shipment of the HDLC Resource Module includes the following items e HDLC Resource Module e HDLC Resource Module Quick Start Guide Modem 16 Resource Module P N 1200181L1 Shipping Contents The ADTRAN shipment of the Modem 16 Resource Module includes the following items e Modem 16 Resource Module e Modem 16 Resource Module Quick Start Guide Async 232 Option Module P N 1200182L1 Shipping Contents The ADTRAN shipment of the Async 232 Option Module includes the following items e Async 232 Option Module e Async 232 Option Module Quick Start Guide Two DB 78 to Octal RS 232 cables ADTRAN P N 31251030 ATLAS 890 System Manual 2001 ADTRAN Inc 61200321L1 1A ATLAS 890 Section 4 User Interface Guide Page 1 of 234 USER INTERFACE GUIDE This section of ADTRAN s ATLAS 890 System Manual is designed for use by network administrators and others who will configure and provision the system It contains information about navigating the VT 100 user interface and using the four character display CONTENTS Navigating the Terminal Menu serere I Ih htt 3 Terminal Menu Window ssslllslle hr 3 Menu Path ees reti ate Exp RUE HNUS INE A ENS ENIRO EST Lo ras e P LE Re FARA 3 Window Panes 2e khe cte e oed gigs dote eh Pete ehe P a Rene 3 Additional Terminal Menu Window Features 00 0000 e eee eee eee 5 Navigating Using the Keyboard KeyS 00 00 cece eens 5
379. tual link ATLAS 890 System Manual 2001 ADTRAN Inc 61200321L1 1A ATLAS 890 Section 4 User Interface Guide Page 163 of 234 DELAY TIME Write Security 2 Read security 2 The time between when OSPF receives a topology change and when it starts a shortest path first SPF calculation HOLD TIME Write Security 2 Read security 2 The minimum time between two consecutive SPF calculations AUTO V LINK Write Security 2 Read security 2 All non backbone areas must be adjacent to the backbone Areas not adjacent to the backbone must create a virtual link through another area to the backbone When ENABLED virtual links are automatically created by the router in ABR mode if it detects an area which is not adjacent to the backbone REDISTRIBUTION Write Security 2 Read security 2 Conveys information from one Autonomous System to another OSPF and RIP when they are operating simultaneously on the router RIP TO OSPF RIP routing updates are translated into OSPF external link state advertisements LSA using the values defined here MODE Redistributes RIP into OSPF when set to ON EXTERNAL TYPE OSPF defines two external types TvPE 1 Cost metrics are comparable to the state link metrics TYPE 2 Cost metrics are assumed to be larger than the cost of any intra AS path EXTERNAL CosT Shows the cost assigned to all RIP routes learned when being advertised as an external LSA
380. ty 3 Read security 5 Controls the clock used by the ATLAS 890 to accept the transmit TX data from the DTE This is usually set to NORMAL If the interface cable is long causing a phase shift in the data ATLAS 890 System Manual 2001 ADTRAN Inc 61200321L1 1A ATLAS 890 Section 4 User Interface Guide Page 61 of 234 the clock can be set to INVERTED This switches the phase of the clock which compensates for a long cable DATA Write security 3 Read security 5 Controls the inverting of the DTE data This inversion can be useful when operating with a high level data link control HDLC protocol often used as a means to ensure 1s density Select either NORMAL or INVERTED Data inversion configuration must match on both ends of the circuit CTS Write security 3 Read security 5 Determines the behavior of the Clear To Send CTS signal If set to NORMAL CTS will fol low the value of Request To Send RTS If set to FORCED ON CTS will always be asserted DCD Write security 3 Read security 5 Determines the behavior of the Data Carrier Detect DCD signal also called RLSD on some interfaces If set to NORMAL DCD will generally be asserted when the interface is capable of passing data consult the ATLAS 890 User Manual for exact conditions If set to FORCED ON DCD will always be asserted If set to REMOTE RTS the value of DCD will track the value of the
381. ty 3 Read security 5 These options initiate different types of tests and display test results PRT Read security 5 Displays the T1 number Loc LB Write security 4 Read security 5 Causes loopback on near end local port see Figure 12 on page 108 The following options are available LINE Loopback without regenerating framing PAYLD Payload loopback framing and clocking are regenerated REMOTE LB Write security 4 Read security 5 Sends loopback code to Remote CSU The following options are available AT amp T INBAND LINE Works in ESF and D4 mode ANSI FDL LINE Requires ESF mode ANSI FDL PYLD Requires ESF mode INBAND NIU Works in ESF and D4 mode 2001 ADTRAN Inc ATLAS 890 System Manual 61200321L1 1A ATLAS 890 Section 4 User Interface Guide Page 118 of 234 PATTERN Write security 4 Read security 5 Test pattern to be transmitted out the port The following options are available ALL ONES Framed ones ALLZEROS Framed zeros QRSS Pseudo random pattern with suppression of excess zeros QRSS RLB RESULTS Write security 4 Read security 5 Displays current status of T1 tests including information regarding loopbacks and test patterns When displaying test pattern status the display string is composed of pattern sync status and errored seconds NONE No sync LOS Sync has been lost SYNC Pattern is synchronized ES Number of seconds with
382. ty 3 Read security 5 User definable name such as the name of the frame relay provider or the circuit ID PROT Write security 3 Read security 5 Defines the protocol operating on this port FRAME RELAY configures this packet end point for frame relay signaling TBOP configures this endpoint as transparent bit ori ented protocol PPP configures this packet endpoint as point to point protocol CONFIG FRAME RELAY Write security 3 Read security 5 Contains the configuration parameters for this packet endpoint SiGNALING ROLE Displays the frame relay signaling role for this packet endpoint The following options indicate the signaling role of this packet endpoint OFF The remote device does not support frame relay signaling AUTO Detects the role of the device on the other end of the circuit and automatically sets this packet endpoint to the appropriate value BOTH Operates in NNI mode 2001 ADTRAN Inc ATLAS 890 System Manual 61200321L1 1A ATLAS 890 Section 4 User Interface Guide Page 126 of 234 NETWORK Acts as the network side of the UNI interface USER Acts as the user side of the UNI interface SIGNALING TYPE Displays the frame relay signaling type for this packet endpoint The following options indicate the signaling type for this packet endpoint AUTO Detects the signaling type of the device on the other end of the circuit and automatically sets this packet endpoint to the same signalin
383. type specific field containing either a Router ID or an IP Address This field identifies the piece of the routing domain that is being described by the advertisement ROUTER ID Displays the router ID of the router who has originated the LSA TYPE Displays the LSA type The following types are possible ROUTER An advertised router which may be an Area Border Router Autonomous System Boundary Router or Virtual Link Router signified as ABR ASBR or Virtual respectively NETWORK Advertised intra area network SUMMARY NET Summary of multiple inter area networks SUMMARY AS Summary of autonomous system networks AS EXTERNAL Autonomous system external networks MULTICAST Multicast group LSA This is not currently supported GROUP NSSA EXTERNAL External Not So Stubby Area networks AREA GLOBAL Type 5 7 external networks OPAQUE 2001 ADTRAN Inc ATLAS 890 System Manual 61200321L1 1A ATLAS 890 Section 4 User Interface Guide Page 166 of 234 AGE SEC The age of this LSA in seconds SEQUENCE No The sequence number detects old and duplicate link state advertisements LSAs The space of sequence numbers is linearly ordered The larger the sequence number the more recent the advertisement CHECKSUM This is the checksum of the complete contents of the advertisement except the age field The age field is not included so that an advertisement s age can be incremented without updating the checksum
384. ubby Area uses link state type 7 advertisements to convey external route information obtained from any Autonomous System Border Router ASBR in the stub As an Area Border Router ABR the router translates type 7 to type 5 DEFAULT COST As an ABR for a stub area the router advertises the default route into the stub area with this cost FILTER INTER AREA SUMMARIES When set to ON only intra area routes are learned inside the stub area If the router is the ABR it advertises the default route into the stub area for all non intra area routes This is sometimes referred to as Totally Stubby Areas VIRTUAL LINK All non backbone areas must connect to the backbone area and all routing information must flow through the backbone Virtual links are used in OSPF to tunnel routing information through non backbone areas to allow a simple hub and spoke organiza tion MODE When set to ON the router attempts to create a virtual link to the specified router identified by its router ID 2001 ADTRAN Inc ATLAS 890 System Manual 61200321L1 1A ATLAS 890 Section 4 User Interface Guide Page 162 of 234 ROUTER ID Defines the router ID of the router that is to act as the other end of this virtual link AUTHEN METHOD Enables authentication for this virtual link at two levels SIMPLE and MD5 NONE Performs no authentication SIMPLE Transmits a clear text password in the OSPF hello packets MD5 Selects MDS as the hashing algo
385. uipment A supplementary equipment grounding conductor shall be installed between the product or system and ground that is in addition to the equipment grounding conductor in the power supply cord The supplementary equipment grounding conductor shall not be smaller in size than the ungrounded branch circuit supply conductors The supplementary equipment grounding conductor shall be connected to the product at the terminal provided and shall be connected to ground in a manner that will retain the ground connection when the product is unplugged from the receptacle The connection to ground of the supplementary equipment grounding conductor shall be in compliance with the rules for terminating bond ing jumpers at Part K or Article 250 of the National Electrical Code ANSI NFPA 70 Termination of the supplementary equipment grounding conductor is permitted to be made to building steel to a metal electri cal raceway system or to any grounded item that is permanently and reliably connected to the electrical service equipment ground The supplemental grounding conductor shall be connected to the equipment using a number 8 ring terminal and should be fastened to the grounding lug provided on the rear panel of the equipment The ring terminal should be installed using the appropriate crimping tool AMP P N 59250 T EAD Crimping Tool or equiv alent 5 SUPPLYING POWER TO THE UNIT AC Powered Systems The AC powered ATLAS 890 comes equipped with a deta
386. ulated statistics CLEAR Write Security 2 Read security 2 Clears current statistics in the IP ICMP TCP UDP and IP Fast Cache statistics tables UDP RELAY Write Security 2 Read security 2 Allows the router to act as a relay agent for UDP User Datagram Protocol broadcast packets Nor mally a router will not forward UDP broadcast packets However many network applications use UDP broadcasts to configure addresses host names and other information If hosts using these proto cols are not on the same network segment as the servers providing the information the client programs will not receive a response without enabling the UDP relay agent ENABLE Write Security 2 Read security 2 Enables disables the router to act as a relay agent RELAY TABLE Write Security 2 Read security 2 Lists up to four relay destination servers RELAY TABLE 0 3 Each server can be configured using the following menus ENABLE IP and UDP ENABLE Enables disables this field Select either STANDARD or SPECIFIED DISABLE is not used STANDARD default Relays any of the following standard UDP protocols DHCP TFTP DNS NTP Net work Time Protocol port 123 NBNS NetBIOS Name Server port 137 NBDG Net BIOS Datagram port 138 and BootP SPECIFIED Specifies the UDP port 1 to 65 535 in the UDP Port columns maximum of three per server 2001 ADTRAN Inc ATLAS 890 System Manual 61200321L1 1A ATLAS
387. uld be sent toward the network except the leading 9 STRIP MSD does not affect CALL ACCEPT criteria All of the digits including the MSDs that are subsequently stripped are used as accept criterion ATLAS 890 System Manual 2001 ADTRAN Inc 61200321L1 1A ATLAS 890 Section 4 User Interface Guide Page 203 of 234 NETWORK SPECIFIC FACILITY VOICE AND DATA Enables the sending of appropriate information to the PSTN The default for this option is NORMAL and in this case no Network Specific Facility Information Element is sent Unless one of the services listed below is subscribed to the selection should remain set to NORMAL The list below indicates services that may be subscribed to from the PSTN These ser vices require that specific information such as a Network Specific Facility Informa tion Element be sent to the network during call setup e AT amp T SDN e National ISDN INWATS e AT amp T Megacom 800 e Nortel Private Network e AT amp T Megacom e Nortel InWats e AT amp T Accunet e Nortel OutWats e AT amp T Long Distance e Nortel Foreign Exchange e AT amp T International 800 e Nortel Tie Trunk e AT amp T Dial It 900 Multiquest CALLED DIGITS TRANSFERRED Some PRI switches may be provisioned to send only a portion of the called number like DID This menu item allows the ATLAS 890 to know how many digits to expect choose from NONE THREE FOUR SEVEN and ALL The default is ALL and would almost always
388. umber of connection attempts minus the number of successful connections RESET STATS Read security 5 Resets the connection statistics for the given analog resource This option resets the connection attempts connection completions and the connections failures fields for the analog resource RATE STATS Read security 5 Displays connection rate statistics for selected data rates for the given analog resource The number of connections at a rate or range of rates is displayed ANALOG RSRC I O STATS Write security 5 Read security 5 Displays the input and output statistics for the analog resources available on the module All statistics are for the current active call and are reset once the call becomes disconnected ATLAS 890 System Manual 2001 ADTRAN Inc 61200321L1 1A ATLAS 890 Section 4 User Interface Guide Page 91 of 234 RSRC Read security 5 Indicates the resource number of the analog call resource On the Modem 16 Option Module analog resources are numbered 1 16 and digital ISDN resources are num bered 17 32 TX BYTES Read security 5 Displays the number of data bytes transmitted by the analog resource to the remote client modem during the current call This parameter is reset once the call is discon nected Rx BYTES Read security 5 Displays the number of data bytes received by the analog resource from the client modem curing the current call This parameter is reset once the call is disco
389. und trip time of the ping request reply of the current set of pings ROUND TRIP MAX Read security 5 Displays the maximum round trip time of the ping request reply of the current set of pings TX STATS Read security 5 Displays the number of ping requests transmitted n TXED the number of ping replies received n RXED and the number of ping requests that were lost n LOST RESET STATS Write security 5 Read security 5 Resets all ping statistics to zero If the ping client is active this menu will stop it START STOP Write security 5 Read security 5 If the ping client is currently idle this menu sends pings to the specified address If the ping client is active the menu either starts or stops sending pings ATEL CLIENT Write security 5 Read security 5 Allows a user to remotely configure ADTRAN TSUs using ADLP over the inband management chan nel on a V 35 port This feature only allows for remote sessions through the ATLAS 890 to the TSUs not vice versa ATEL ADDRESS Write security 5 Read security 5 Defines the ADLP address Unit ID assigned to the remote unit you are trying to connect to CONNECT Write security 5 Read security 5 Activator used to start an ATEL client session to the remote unit configured in the ATEL ADDRESS field ATLAS 890 System Manual 2001 ADTRAN Inc 61200321L1 1A ATLAS 890 Section 4 User Interface Guide Page 35 of 234 TELNET CLIENT Write
390. unit s 10 100 BASET port using Telnet client software use the procedure in DLP 003 to connect to the unit 2 Login to the unit Login to the unit using the read write password see DLP 006 for details 3 Go to the SYSTEM UTILITY menu and select the CONFIGURATION TRANSFER menu press lt Enter gt 4 Set the TFTP SERVER IP ADDRESS to the IP address of the machine running the TFTP Server Program If you are using the ADTRAN TFTP server the IP address displays in the STATUS field UT For other TFTP servers please refer to the appropriate documentation 5 Change TFTP SERVER FILENAME to a unique filename This will be the name of the configura tion file saved to the remote server Some TFTP servers constrain the format of the filename depending on the operating system of the server For example a TFTP server running on a PC under Windows 3 1 may only permit 8 3 for mat filenames 8 characters period and three extension characters 6 Select the SAVE CONFIG REMOTELY menu field and press lt Enter gt Enter Y to confirm the request 7 View CURRENT TRANSFER STATUS to verify the progress of the current transfer ATLAS 890 System Manual 2001 ADTRAN Inc 61200321L1 1A ATLAS 890 Section 5 DLP 011 Page 3 of 4 8 When the transfer process has successfully completed IDLE displays in the CURRENT TRANSFER STATUS field and TFTP DOWNLOAD COMPLETE displays in the PREVIOUS TRANSFER STATUS field 1 NG TFTP is
391. update or any errors encountered during the download process 8 Select BEGIN FIRMWARE UPDATE to start the update process Enter Y to confirm the transfer and set up the module to receive the XMODEM Upload ATLAS 890 System Manual 2001 ADTRAN Inc 61200321L1 1A ATLAS 890 Section 5 DLP 009 Page 3 of 4 10 When the ATLAS 890 is ready to receive the XMODEM upload the menu screen will clear and display Awaiting XMODEM Upload lt Ctrl X gt to Cancel If this does not appear please review the steps above for possible configuration errors From the terminal emulation software begin the XMODEM upload by using the appropriate command sequence This may take several minutes If necessary refer to the terminal emulation software documentation for help Also when specify ing the filename ensure that the file transferred is the one provided by ADTRAN Otherwise the update will not complete successfully Because XMODEM data is being transferred in band through the menu interface the VT 100 menus of the ATLAS 890 will be inoperable from the ADMIN or CRAFT interfaces You can cancel the update at any time within the terminal emulation software Please consult the documentation provided by the terminal emulation software to determine how to do this When the update process has successfully completed IDLE displays in the CURRENT UPDATE STATUS field and MODULE UPDATE COMPLETE displays in the PREVIOUS UPDATE STATUS field The
392. ur most popular products These courses include overviews on product features and functions while covering applications of ADTRAN s product lines ADTRAN provides a variety of training options including customized training and courses taught at our fa cilities or at your site For more information about training please contact your Territory Manager or the En terprise Training Coordinator Training phone 800 615 1176 ext 7500 Training fax 256 963 6700 Training email training adtran com 2001 ADTRAN Inc ATLAS 890 System Manual ATLAS 890 System Manual 2001 ADTRAN Inc 61200321L1 1A ATLAS 890 Section 1 System Description Page 1 of 6 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION This section of ADTRAN s ATLAS 890 System Manual is designed for use by network engineers planners and designers for overview information about the ATLAS 890 It contains general information and describes physical and operational concepts card functions network relationships provisioning testing alarm status and system monitoring This section should be used in conjunction with Section 2 Engineering Guidelines of the system manual System OVervIeW oor evite ws e hae ane ak Orla ei v a ante fa Geen 2 Features and Benefis 5 cca Sse eG eae ARR hae aa a E Er m REA REUS a ER E EU 2 Configuration and Management 0 00 cee tenes 2 Software Upgradeable isslseeleeseeeeele hh 2 Signaling SuppoM ep everday Bee E Bg ees Ee ee
393. urce is not currently allocated DSOs Read security 5 Displays the number of DSOs that are being used by the resource This value multi plied by the DSO Rate yields the bandwidth that has been assigned to the resource ATLAS 890 System Manual 2001 ADTRAN Inc 61200321L1 1A ATLAS 890 Section 4 User Interface Guide Page 99 of 234 56 64K Read security 5 Displays the per DSO rate that is being used by the resource This value multiplied by the number of DSOs yields the bandwidth that has been assigned to this resource TX FRAMES Read security 5 Displays the number of frames that have been transmitted by this resource RX FRAMES Read security 5 Displays the number of frames that have been received by this resource ERRORS Read security 5 Displays the total number of errors received by the resource Press lt Enter gt on this field to view the number of Total Errors CRC Errors Aborted Frames and Invalid Frames CLRCNTR Write security 4 Read security 5 Resets all counters for the resource channel gt MODULES MENU T3 OPTION MODULE The ATLAS 890 system controller automatically detects the presence of the T3 Option Module when it is installed in the system listed as DS3 To see the menus for the T3 Option Module via the terminal menu use the arrow keys to scroll to the MODULES menu and press lt Enter gt to access the module choices Refer to the T3 Option Module Quick Start Guide for a menu tree
394. ure Print echo 7 4 You are now logged in to the ATLAS menu system Follow up Procedures Once this procedure is complete return to the procedure which referred you to this DLP and continue with the tasks indicated there 2001 ADTRAN Inc ATLAS 890 System Manual 61200321L1 1A ATLAS 890 Section 5 DLP 006 Page 4 of 4 ATLAS 890 System Manual 2001 ADTRAN Inc 61200321L1 1A ATLAS 890 Section 5 DLP 007 Page 1 of 2 CONNECTING THE TERMINAL OR PC TO THE ADMIN OR CRAFT PORT Introduction ATLAS 890 shelf management and provisioning is facilitated by a series of intuitive menus that are acces sible on a computer screen Connecting either a VT 100 terminal or a PC emulating a VT 100 terminal to the ADMIN port on the rear of the unit in the middle of the System Controller module or the CRAFT inter face on the unit faceplate allows access to the menus and management features of ATLAS 890 This sec tion specifies how to connect the VT 100 terminal or PC to the ATLAS 890 The front CRAFT interface for the ATLAS 890 is located on the faceplate of the unit and is an RJ 45 con nector Access can also be made to the ATLAS 890 from the back of the unit through the port labeled ADMIN It is also an RJ 45 connector and is located on the System Controller module installed in the back of the unit Prerequisite Procedures The ATLAS 890 must be powered for terminal communication to function Tools and Materials Required e
395. urity 3 Read security 5 The performance fields either current 15 minute total or 24 hour total provide status on key perfor mance measures as specified in ANSI T1 403 and AT amp T TR54016 for each T1 in the T3 circuit Excepting CLR these fields are all read only The monitored parameters include the following PRT Displays the T1 number 1 28 CLR Clears performance information for the selected T1 ES Errored Second ES is a second with one or more error events OR one or more Out Of Frame events OR one or more Controlled Slips BES Bursty Errored Second BES is a second with more than one but less than 320 error events SES Severely Errored Second SES is a second with 320 or more error events OR one or more Out Of Frame events SEFS Severely Errored Frame Second is a second that contains four consecutive errored framing patterns LoFc Loss of Frame Count is a count of seconds in which a valid framing pattern could not be obtained 2001 ADTRAN Inc ATLAS 890 System Manual 61200321L1 1A ATLAS 890 Section 4 User Interface Guide Page 106 of 234 Css Controlled Slip Second UAS Unavailable Second Pcv Path Code Violation DS1 PERF 15MIN Write security 3 Read security 5 Stores the performance data for the previous 15 minute window Refer to DS Perf Current on page 105 for a detailed description of these fields DS1 PERF 24HR Write security 3 Read security 5 Stores the performance data for
396. urity levels The following threshold levels for the available selections DISABLED CRITICAL MAJOR MINOR WARNING NORMAL and INFO To deliver the SNMP trap packet with the COMMUNITY NAME unchanged define the STATION TYPE as NORMAL If you are using T Watch PRO define the STATION TYPE as T WATCH MGMT and append the COMMUNITY NAME with ADLP ADDRESS Within the SNMP trap packet this field is automatically updated before it is sent to the management station DS1 CuRRENT PERF THRESHOLDS Write security 3 Read Security 5 Defines performance threshold values for DS1 Line and Path statistics recorded in a 15 minute interval If a statistic value exceeds its threshold value then the corresponding Alert Trap will be sent if the alert event is armed and Alert Traps are enabled These thresholds apply to all DS1 interfaces in the system CURRENT ES THRSH CURRENT SES THRSH CURRENT SEFS THRSH The DS1 performance monitor Threshold Value for the Current 15 minute Errored Seconds ES parameter The default value is 65 for an approximate BER level of 10E 5 The DS1 performance monitor Threshold Value for the Current 15 minute Severely Errored Seconds SES parameter The default value is 10 for an approximate BER level of 10E 5 The DS1 performance monitor Threshold Value for the Current 15 minute Severely Errored Framing Seconds SEFS parameter The default value is 2 for an approximate BER level of 10E 5 20
397. vent damage to electronic dm components Place modules in antistatic packing material when transporting or storing When working on modules always place them on an approved antistatic mat that is electrically grounded 2001 ADTRAN Inc ATLAS 890 System Manual 61200321L1 1A ATLAS 890 Section 5 DLP 008 Page 2 of 4 DLP 008 Perform Steps Below in the Order Listed 1 Connect to the ATLAS 890 using either the 10 100 BASET ADMIN or CRAFT interfaces If you are not already connected to the unit s ADMIN or CRAFT interfaces either with a VT 100 compatible terminal or with a PC running VT 100 emulation software follow the proce dure in DLP 007 Alternately if the unit is part of a management cluster connected to the local network you may use a PC connected to the network to Telnet into the unit Use the procedures in DLP 003 and DLP 004 to connect to the 10 100 BASET interface 2 Login to the unit Login to the unit using the read write password see DLP 006 for details 3 Go to the SYSTEM CONFIG menu and select the ACCESS PASSWORDS menu and press lt Enter gt 4 To add a new user profile and password select the first column 0 and press for insert 5 Give the new user profile a name by selecting the LABEL field pressing lt Enter gt and typing the user defined name 6 Determine the password level for the corresponding label The ATLAS 890 contains six different password levels The table
398. work Specific Facility Information Element is sent Unless one of the services listed below is subscribed to the selection should remain set to NORMAL 2001 ADTRAN Inc ATLAS 890 System Manual 61200321L1 1A ATLAS 890 Section 4 User Interface Guide Page 206 of 234 The list below indicates services that may be subscribed to from the PSTN These ser vices require that specific information such as a Network Specific Facility Informa tion Element be sent to the network during call setup e AT amp T SDN e National ISDN INWATS e AT amp T Megacom 800 e Nortel Private Network e AT amp T Megacom e Nortel InWats e AT amp T Accunet e Nortel OutWats e AT amp T Long Distance e Nortel Foreign Exchange e AT amp T International 800 e Nortel Tie Trunk e AT amp T Dial It 900 Multiquest CALLED DIGITS TRANSFERRED Defines the number of digits to forward from the called number When attached to a PBX the PBX may be provisioned to expect to receive fewer than all of the called digits of the incoming call however this option would normally be set to ALL Choose from NONE THREE FOuR SEVEN or ALL OUTGOING CALLER ID Defines the number to use to provide Caller ID to the Network for outgoing calls sent through this endpoint Choose from SEND AS PROVIDED SUBSTITUTE IF NOT PRESENT or SUBSTITUTE ALWAYS Win The Caller ID number must be specific i e no wildcards SOURCE ID Simplifies the creation of a dial pl
399. xchange if all of the IXC trunks are unavailable busy or in alarm In this case the primary accept number for the local exchange would be N and the secondary accept would be 1 SECONDARY SEARCH The same accept rules apply for all secondary number searches as for primary searches DATA 64K DATA 56K AUDIO SPEECH Reflects the bearer capability of the attached user equipment typically a TA If the attached TA can only handle digital calls then a voice call sent to this endpoint would be rejected TREAT CALL AS Allows the incoming call to be treated as the selected call type regardless of the actual ATLAS 890 System Manual 2001 ADTRAN Inc 61200321L1 1A ATLAS 890 Section 4 User Interface Guide Page 189 of 234 incoming call type The default selection AS RECEIVED effectively disables the fea ture by using the actual call type Other options include DATA 64K and DATA 56K OUT REJ Write security 3 Read security 5 Defines the parameters for the outgoing calls that ATLAS 890 will not send to the network REJECT NUMBER Identifies which numbers this endpoint will not pass on toward the network Use when the outgoing call filter is different for different users sharing this endpoint The wild cards are identical as in OUTHACCEPT see Out Accept on page 182 0 1 rejects all long distance calls but only for this User termination If permitted in the Win Network termination endpoint this user cou
400. y be sent to an external Syslog server for storage Refer to Win DLP 013 Using the ADTRAN Utility Syslog with the ATLAS 890 for more details ATLAS 890 System Manual 2001 ADTRAN Inc 61200321L1 1A ATLAS 890 Section 6 System Event Logging Page 5 of 16 3 SYSTEM EVENTS Table 1 through Table 9 provides a listing of ATLAS system events This includes tables of events for each category according to the order they appear in the EVENT LOG setup screen Table 1 System Coniroller Events Console Log String Category Event AC Power Supply has Recovered CRITICAL AC power supply is functioning normal again AC Power Supply has Failed CRITICAL AC power supply is not operating properly AC Power Supply has Exceeded CRITICAL Internal system temperature has exceeded Temperature Limit safe operating limit AC Power Supply is Under Temperature CRITICAL Internal temperature has cooled to safe Limit operating limit DC Power Supply has Recovered CRITICAL DC power supply is functioning normally again DC Power Supply has Failed CRITICAL DC power supply is not operating properly DC Power Supply has Exceeded CRITICAL Internal system temperature has exceeded Temperature Limit safe operating limit DC Power Supply is Under Temperature CRITICAL Internal temperature has cooled to safe Limit operating limit Firmware invalid CRITICAL Corrupted firmware
401. y way to enable or disable IQ statistics gathering on all sublinks When this activator reads DISABLE pressing lt Enter gt disables IQ statistics gathering on all sublinks When it reads ENABLE pressing lt Enter gt enables IQ statistics gathering on all sublinks SUBLINKS Identifies the PVC to be polled Indicates the number of sublinks that ATLAS 890 will collect IQ data for within the given link NAME Displays the user designated name of the sublink up to 15 characters DLCI Displays the Data Link Connection Identifier circuit number ENABLE Indicates collection of IQ data for the target DLCI CONFIG Write Security 2 Read Security 5 Sets the parameters for IQ statistics gathering CURRENT PIVs Identifies resources used by IQ statistics storage A PIV is a port or PVC per interval ATLAS can track up to 10 000 PIVs Think of it as a resource meter The PIV number is derived from the MAX DAYS and MAX INTERVALS selected by the user Changing one affects the other INTERVAL PERIOD Sets the period for IQ statistics gathering Options are 5 10 15 20 and 30 min utes MAx DAYS Defines the number of history day intervals to keep Maximum entry is dependent on the MAX INTERVALS setting ATLAS 890 System Manual 2001 ADTRAN Inc 61200321L1 1A ATLAS 890 Section 4 User Interface Guide Page 137 of 234 MAX INTERVALS Defines the number of history intervals to keep Maximum entry is dependent on t
402. zed by ADTRAN EXCEPT FOR THE LIMITED WARRANTY DESCRIBED ABOVE THE FOREGOING CONSTI TUTES THE SOLE AND EXCLUSIVE REMEDY OF THE CUSTOMER AND THE EXCLUSIVE LIA BILITY OF ADTRAN AND IS IN LIEU OF ANY AND ALL OTHER WARRANTIES EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED ADTRAN SPECIFICALLY DISCLAIMS ALL OTHER WARRANTIES INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION ALL WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE SOME STATES DO NOT ALLOW THE EXCLUSION OF IMPLIED WARRANTIES SO THIS EXCLUSION MAY NOT APPLY TO CUSTOMER In no event will ADTRAN or its suppliers be liable to Customer for any incidental special punitive exemplary or consequential damages experienced by either Customer or a third party including but not limited to loss of data or information loss of profits or loss of use ADTRAN is not liable for damages for any cause whatsoever whether based in contract tort or otherwise in excess of the amount paid for the item Some states do not allow the limitation or exclusion of liability for incidental or consequential damages so the above limitation or exclusion may not apply to Customer 2001 ADTRAN Inc ATLAS 890 System Manual Customer Service Product Support Information and Training ADTRAN will replace or repair this product within five years from the date of shipment if the product does not meet its published specification or if it fails while in service A return material authorization RMA is required prior to returning

ATLAS 890 System Manual (Rev A)

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents